Bill Of Rights And Individual Liberties Essay Best College Essay Help

Introduction Enemies of the constitution played down the claim that the bill of rights was not needed in the constitution since it contravened the wishes and desires of the majority in the country. This followed after the proponents of the removal of the bill of rights argued that the state machineries had no powers and authority to deny individuals their personal liberties.

Those supporting the view that the bill of rights be excluded from the constitution claimed that the state was given a blank check on matters that the bill of rights did not talk about. Federalists such as Madison believed that the bill of rights was ineffective and had to be omitted from the constitution (Labunski 62).

Furthermore, writers of the federalist papers believed that immediate amendments to the constitution could cause more harm than good to the state. In Federalist 38, Madison commented that the bill of rights had to be done away with since anti-federalists could not actually agree on the most pressing needs as regards to the bill of rights. Furthermore, people had coexisted peacefully for several years without the bill of rights.

After a careful thought and further research, Madison realized that the bill of rights was important and had to be included in the constitution. He therefore chose to be neutral. In Federalist 44, he suggested that the constitution barred the states from infringing on the rights of individuals.

However, he underscored the fact that extra measures had to be taken in order to guarantee liberty and individual freedom. In Federalist 48, Madison noted that states could easily interfere with individual liberty even though the constitution protected individuals. According to Madison’s analysis, the bill of rights could do little to guarantee individual liberty and freedom.

In this paper, it is observed that the bill of rights is very important in protecting individual liberty and freedom. For this reason, it must always be included in the constitution in order to sanction it legally. In real sense, individual liberty is incompatible with state sovereignty. Without the bill of rights, the state would tend to deny individuals their rights in order to safeguard its sovereignty. The bill of rights defines the relationship between the state and citizens.

The Role of the Bill of Rights in Safeguarding Individual Liberty The US is one of the states that were established based on the fundamental freedoms and civil liberties. It was through the civil liberties as outlined in the bill of rights in the constitution that ordinary citizens could be assured their freedoms. In the current political arena, many opponents to the bill of rights suggest that the Patriotic Act should be embraced instead of the bill of rights. This is aimed at cutting the privileges enjoyed by the American populace.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Patriot Act was crafted to protect citizens against terrorism but it has turned out to be a tool that is utilized by the state machineries to deny people their rights. Critics to the bill of rights believe that state interests should be given priority implying that individual liberties should be regulated. This proves that individual liberties and state sovereignty are incompatible in practice.

Founders of the nation such as Patrick Henry insisted that individual liberty was inevitable. The patriot claimed that limiting individual liberty was the same as killing an individual. In other words, individual liberties were to remain intact. The American bill of rights is based on the Massachusetts Bay Liberties that was constituted in 1641. The collection of liberties gave citizens of Massachusetts a freedom to enjoy some rights that were equivalent to the modern day rights.

After the constitution was ratified, the congress moved to amend the constitution to include the bill of rights in 1791. It was viewed that without the bill of rights, the masters and the owners of the means of production would continue subjugating and perpetuating the rights of the unfortunate in society. During colonialism, citizens were not allowed to worship freely and their political participation was limited.

The law could punish any individual who opposed the existing social order. In this regard, the ruled had to follow what the ruler wanted them to follow. The relationship between the ruled and the ruler was skewed. The bill of rights was necessary to specify and clarify the relationship between the king and the subjects. In the contemporary society, the same thing can happen in case the bill of rights is scrapped from the constitution.

Before the enactment of the bill of rights, the constitution stated who was supposed to own property. Regarding the ownership of firearms, only the state had the power and authority to possess arms. Citizens existed at the mercy of state machineries. In the legal quarters, citizens were often treated unfairly.

Those with high social statuses were always given priority in matters touching on property ownership. This meant that the poor existed at the mercy of the rich. The bill of rights was established to check on this issue. The bill of rights was therefore established to serve as a foundation to civil liberties to be enjoyed by every individual in the state.

Furthermore, the bill of rights was incorporated in the constitution in order to prevent the government from taking control of individual life. The bill of rights provides individuals with legal defences in case the government attempts to go against the wishes and desires of the majority.

We will write a custom Essay on Bill of Rights and Individual Liberties specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Through the first amendment, citizens could enjoy various freedoms and rights. Freedom of speech, freedom of press, freedom of religion and the right to public assembly were all included in the first amendment. The individual could freely assembly to express his or her opinion without state intervention.

In this case, the individual had the right to petition the government on matters pertaining to injustice such as state brutality and state harassment. Moreover, the first amendment barred the state from introducing a state religion. In places where the bill of rights is not incorporated in the constitution, citizens have no choice but to follow what the state provides, including religious beliefs.

The fourth amendment provides that the state cannot forcefully investigate an individual without his or her consent. This clause limits the state authorities from searching and capturing an individual without prior notification. Due to this amendment, the security agencies cannot enter the compound of an individual without a court order.

In other words, no authority has the power to seize another person’s property without following a due process. This was not the case before the introduction of the bill. In the Fifth Amendment, the individual should never be forced to give information. In this case, torture is prohibited. State authorities could prefer using force to acquire critical information from an individual but this law prohibits them from doing so.

Works Cited Labunski, Richard. James Madison and the Struggle for the Bill of Rights: Pivotal Moments in American History. New York: Oxford University Press, 2006. Print


Corporate social Responsibilities of McDonalds UAE Report college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Definition of CSR

McDonalds’ policy on CSR

What McDonalds does to carry out their policy

Agreement with the policies of McDonalds concerning CSR




Introduction McDonald is a food company that has established outlets in the global markets. The company has been in operation since 1940 and has diversified in the number of food products it offers to the global markets. The company was established by Richard and Maurice McDonald, and the main goal was to produce hamburgers.

The headquarters of the company are based in the United States, and various subsidiaries have been established in over 120 countries. The company has applied the strategy of franchising, affiliation or corporate operations. These strategies have enabled the company to expand in many countries (Hill


Flirtation devices Essay college essay help: college essay help

In the ancient times, seduction was perceived to be a devils strategy in the disguise of love (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 98). Over the years, the art of seduction has transformed immensely. Seduction was mainly associated with the feminine principle to attract the opposite sex (Baudrillard 1).

The process of emancipation, flirting and seduction is as old as the invention of the arts (Rotella, Abbott, and Sarah 184). In the present era, seduction and flirtation has taken a new twist in enhancing communication practices to include flirting modules. Philosophy and ethics of the world today have changed the perception of seduction and flirtation (“On seduction par. 7). This liberation of desire has taken over almost all social material.

Even though, femininity and seduction are confounded, masculinity is still haunted by this reversibility (Baudrillard 1). It is remarkably vivid that the strength of the feminine is that of seduction. Flirting is perceived to be the simplest way for the shy people to interact (Freeman par. 1). However, this act has over the time encouraged many to become seducers.

There are various modest that seem to be best seductive approaches. These approaches include; girls natural beauty, accessories, behavior, dance and choreography, photographs, clothes, and many more seduction and flirting devices (Rotella, Abbott, and Sarah 184).

The appearance and looks are key considerations when one flirts. The artifices that are utilized most today are mobile phones, social networks, and the media. They have enhanced flirtation through these fields. These activities apparently guides flirts action, which eventually lands him or her to seduction. They explore a person innate grace and reflect them to allow perfection of the skill (“On seduction par. 7).

These artifices reflect the seductive nature of the seducer. When used correctly, everything falls in subtle allusion and it leads the target to the trap of the seducer. The seducer studies the amorous proclivities and uses the weakness of the target to lead him or her in the trap. Furthermore, seduction is infallible. It is just like a mirror. It reflects exactly what the seduced thoughts are saying (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 100).

Seduction in the modern world has taken a new meaning (Rotella, Abbott, and Sarah 184). Instead of the immoral character, it bowed; seduction has acquired a mythical feel of sacrifice. Interaction in the present times has become stale (“On seduction par. 7). Most messages replicated by different individuals solicit hysterical mannerism. The hysteria succeeds in making one limit the body barrier. This allows the seducer to fascinate and take over control of the seduced person (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 129).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This social channel is marred with erotic, soft seduction of feminization. Social Medias have undergone sexual revolution. There is increased presence of women presenting themselves in a sexy way for subliminal pleasures. The line between flirtation and seduction is extremely thin. It is quite difficult to differentiate when a person is flirting or seducing (“On seduction par. 3).

The advantage with seduction is that the power to submit vests upon the person who is being seduced (“On seduction par. 7). Some will submit with much ease whereas others will take time. When one submits the feeling will be deep and strong leading to love and romance. The weapons used by seducers are usually similar.

This makes the reversibility of the strategy possible in a way that the seduced can get back at the seducer. The seducer in this case is perverse. He or she deflects seduction from the rule of secrecy and closes in to his or her target intentionally (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 131).

However, the seducer differs from a pervert since a pervert will suspect seduction and immediately codifies it. The pervert will not adhere to the seduction rule of being secretive and decide to make his own rules. The perverse form of seduction will disregard the supple ceremonial and embraces a fixed ceremonial. This renders perversion invulnerable (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 124).

Flirting assists individuals to set the mood and pace for targeting the person they intend to seduce (Rotella, Abbott, and Sarah 184). The easiest way to flirt is to make the target smile and slowly allow the seduction influence to effectuate the change (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 136).

Flirting recruits all skills human possess. Skills such as body language, intellect, creativity and empathy to people are some of the skills a flirt will exhibit. When people are flirting, they show interest to each other but do not come clean to tell each other openly about their feeling. They always joke and compliment each other and make physical cues show their intentions.

In the modern era, most people have embraced the advent of technology to flirt from ordinary text messages to face book chats and tweets (Freeman par. 9). Strangers meet online and exchange flirtation banter, and within no time, they are already seducing each other (Standage133).

We will write a custom Essay on Flirtation devices specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Technology has become a place where men and women meet through the World Wide Web (Standage143). The platform has no restriction hence the freedom one gets allows them to flirt and even seduce each other. Flowers are also gaining fame as device of flirtation. Men will buy flowers to impress the ladies. On the other hand, women will use flower petals to entice men in bed. They spread the bed with these petals as a form of seducing men into sexual activities.

The social sector has embraced the art of flirting exceptionally well. This has prompted IT companies to come up with latest way to include these elements in their features. Face book has come up with various applications for its customers. The site has over ten applications for this feature.

The most used application in face book for flirts is the ‘would you sleep with me’ application. This application enables men and women to flirt with each other by telling them that they would like to sleep with each other. Apple inc. has embraced this feature in its products.

The total flirt app for its iPhone provides a concise interactive segment between friends (“iPhone AppCafe” par. 1). This has seen many individual flirting their way into romance. More and more flirts are being invented to attract the singles and assist them to get romantic attachment. The communications company came up with these apps so as to help people engage more and arrange remote dates.

These applications have automated the way humans flirt in real life (“iPhone AppCafe” par. 1). They allow the flirt to post pictures, profiles, send winks and inviting them to chat. Flirting within the relationship encourages both of partners to continue to woo each other. When couples use seduction they show each other that they are interested in each other and feel aroused (Freeman par. 6).

Most people like the technology on flirt devices because they are user friendly and allows men and women to maximize on their flirting efficiency. For instance, the girl friend keeper apps on iPhone allows one to set up an automated email or text feature where the girlfriend will receive text messages with love content (“iPhone AppCafe” par. 3).

The text will have been signed with the lover’s name. The message is not vulgar but humorous. This enables the couples in a relationship to spark their relationship and continue to keep it fresh. The boyfriend will continue to flirt with his girlfriend by using this application.

The app goes ahead to keep a record of birthdays, anniversary and memorable events (“iPhone AppCafe” par. 3). This will be a clear reminder for the man to be aware of all these events and dates. The company has also invented other apps that assist men to continue to flirt and wow their spouses. Apps such as iwrite apps which generates love poems for couples in a relationship (“iPhone AppCafe” par. 5).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Flirtation devices by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Poems are also becoming popular channels to seduce people. There are peculiar poets who have specialized in the field of writing erotic poems. A person who wants to grab the attention of the other party will seek the services of a poem and send it to their desired subject (“iPhone AppCafe” par. 5). Flirting with poems will eventually get the attention of a person since one feels enticed by the poetic words dedicated to them (Standage134). The poem carries its own illusions which depict figures and signs in the mind of the seduced.

When one receives several poems from his or her flirt, it will eventually result to sexual influence. This will be an easy way of seduction to get the target into sexual contact. Apart from poems letters are still strong elements of seduction (Good 42). People write letters as a gesture to show their feelings towards their counterparts.

They incorporate items such as love cards and postal cards to show elegance and as a result they end up getting the attention of the person to receive the mail. This will be followed with a series of events and eventually both parties will be holding each other and romantically involved with each other (Good 42).

Dance and choreography are also being used as flirting devices. The men and women indulge in moves that seem to send mixed messages to their counterparts. Like flirtation seduction can be invasive (Agamben 48). The dance implicated by both parties makes one be flattered and titillated. As a result, the both satisfy their pleasures. Dances in clubs have facilitated coercive behaviors among adults. The seduction dance relays its objective to capture the target of choice (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 126).

They exemplify seduction by using the dance. This in turn, controls the order of fascination. The dancers use their knowledge of seduction to captivate their counterparts. The controlled fascination results to pervasive power (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 126). The giddiness of seduction falls upon the passion both hold which results to exchange of sexual pleasures (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 107).

Songs and music are also gaining popularity as flirtation devices (Freeman par. 8). Song writers use their skills to write songs that will send unique messages to their targets. The same is replicated by musicians when they are in live concerts. Aspiring musicians will be found in karaoke clubs flirting while they perform karaoke songs.

They seek the attention of the crowd in a bid to gain popularity. Love songs are increasingly being appreciated since the crowds are attracted to the message. Female fans will be enticed seeing a male artist performing on stage. The reverse is also true. The female artist will perform while throwing certain gestures to the male crowd.

Individuals have perfected the art, and they have incorporated sensitive organs to assist them when flirting or seducing (“On seduction par. 7). Mind seduction is the latest mode of seduction that most seducers use nowadays. The mind can double up as both a flirting device and a seduction device. This is the ability to use conversation and engaging in jokes back and forth (Freeman par. 6). Women love and get attracted to men with such intelligence.

Women who are intelligent would use their intelligence to intensify their imaginations and manifest them to other people. The individual being aroused will fell deeply drawn towards the seducer. Mind seduction requires communication since the seducer uses the powerful silent power of the mind (Freeman par. 6). The effect is instant and physical results are displayed in terms of sexual influence. The effects are influenced with time.

The female stocking is another device that is increasingly used to arouse men. The female use these stockings to bring out a sexy look (Agamben 47). The stocking mask sensitive body parts which women like to flash out in public. The masked body image creates a deep illusion in men’s mind.

The created illusion draws them closer to the women. The opacity of sexual difference created by the female body led it to be manipulated and used in different fields (Agamben 49). The female body is now being used in adverts as well as enticing men to purchase certain products. There is increased mortality of organic bodies of human beings used along side different commodities all in the name of advertising. These bodies have been condemned for creating intimacy of erotic life to the public (Agamben 49).

When a person flirts he or she sends a message to the other party that they are interested (“On seduction par. 7). The information being sent says how one is fit in the proactive mode of getting to know the other party.

Social philosophers argue that the crucial motive behind flirting is sending a message of procreation to the opposite party (Agamben 50). Women are known to flirt by sticking out there hips in a bid to raise attention towards their pelvic (Freeman par. 6). This act is more or less seen to many as seducing men towards sexual influence.

There is also invention of devices that enhances women hips so as to raise attention. These devices as have increased the chances of women turning into seducers. Men are attracted to women with certain hip to waist ratio (Freeman par. 6). This makes many women work out their way to attain this crucial size so as to catch all men’s attention. Men on the other hand, attract women with their square jaw then strength ad power.

The men flirt by making intense eye contact and smiles (Freeman par. 3). This is equivalent to mind seduction. The women are attracted to them since the message they received from their flirtation indicates the men are prominent with strength and power it also shows that they are virile and dependable.

Flirting does not have to lead to sexual influence at times people flirt just to instill a friendly banter (Freeman par. 2). However, when the seducer sends confusing information to the person being seduced it leads to misunderstanding and disappointment. This may result to uncomfortable and embarrassing situation. The most salient element in flirting is to know the intentions behind it. Some times one can be innocent, but the mannerism and delivery of speech suggests otherwise (“On seduction par. 7).

The flirt must be able to understand the reaction of the opposite sex. He or she should be able to know if one is interested or not. Sometimes men can play hard to seduce. Efforts by a female seducer to close in to get attention of a man may receive opposition from the destination end. The man may opt to ignore her by keeping distance and feigning pedanticism (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 113).

He fails to respond to any feminine erotic gestures making her break off her moves. Before she abandons her motives she lets the gestures hang since they are favorable when left suspended (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 124). The patient seducer will wait until all the suspended signs are responded to before drafting the next move. When she succeeds to nail him into her trap, her femininity is neutralized by the illusions created between the two of them.

The pleasure they experience marks the death of the nothingness and emptiness which is covered with passion of erotic activity (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 139). To crown it the seducer adds an ascetic moment to the aesthetic movement. The engagement is recorded as an important moment in there romance. The aesthetic signals of the artifice consists play and sounds (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 111).

There is a strong difference between men flirt and women flirts (“On seduction par. 7). Women will always flirt to test the intentions of the male where as men will flirt out of sexual interest. The gestures used by both men and women differ as well. Men would be aggressive in eye contact while the female will have ambiguous gestures such as batting their eye lashes (Freeman par. 6).

Whenever a man and woman have chemistry with each other they move along the road to seduction. The power of seduction is never linear. It appears to be oblique to both parties. This obliquity cannot be duplicated (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 111). This allows it to traverse along the psychic universe and create a dream element.

This is replicated by reaching the far end of a person and capturing his or her blind spot. The spot remains a secret to both parties and sealed within them (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 111). The seduction process that is controlled by the lady will require the girl to mobilize her feminine resources in a passivity of innocence. The curves and twists brought about by seduction will require fate for it to be fully realized (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 137).

However, flirting can also be termed as sexual harassment. This happens when the person being flirted is left offended (Freeman par. 8). If the object or device one uses to flirt makes one feel violated then the flirt is guilty of sexual harassment. The double polarity exhibited by both parties during interaction can escalade to on having greedy desires which are hidden in smiles and happy talks during normal conversations (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 109).

The mortal mask in the noble human interaction keeps his or her perverse erotic motives until when they are ready to unleash them. In these modern times people have to be careful when they decide to give in to seductions and flirtations (Freeman par. 5). In most cases the seducer gets his or her erotic pleasures and disappears never to be seen again (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 141).

Apart from reliance to flirting devices, people have developed new methods of flirting (Freeman par. 7). They are using signals and signs that indicate they are flirting with someone. Mannerism such as smiling a lot, touching ones arm or knee, and using ones name in conversations, are the most common used signs and signals to show that one is a flirt (“On seduction par. 7). The touching may continue regularly and after sometime seduction may develop.

Other signals include leaning, standing closely and complementing (Freeman par. 7). The aesthetic signals easily transform what seems to be a vulgar eroticism to passion and romance. This allows both parties to express their mortal emotions and anticipate the game’s end (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 132). At times, the seducer exhibits weakness in the form of surfeiting emotions. This allows the opposite sex to capitalize by assembling all the minute details to provide variations in the inflamed desire (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 121).

A seducer will always turn his or her appearance to disturb or attract attention of the person being seduced. The seduced person replies by turning his appearance to create confusion and illusion to the mind of the seducer (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 98). This raises the curiosity of both subjects. This form of seduction maintains the hypothesis of the two parties.

The seduction is a form of a solicitation and attraction which both subjects take it as a secret challenge from a distance (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 137). The emotions born as a result of seduction depict the secret joy one experiences when playing with his or her desires. The seducers aesthetics go beyond ethics; it transfigures both the person seduced and the seducer (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 119).

The transformation reflects the appearance of things to look pure. The seducer captivates the charms of his or her target and makes them shine and rise in pure appearances. This deflects and inflects diverse feelings in both parties. This simply means the seducer is pervasive in nature (“On seduction par. 7).

According to Johannes, seduction starts from the female. They sacrifice their moral obligation to seek erotic satisfaction (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 103). While in the act they are seemingly defenseless because they do not leave anything to chance until they get what they desire (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 133).

Women who are attracted to men often use young boys to get close to the men. The young boys act like flirting devices and bait to get the men to talk to her. For example, a lady may opt to get his nephew to accompany her on a morning run or when walking down the street.

When they pass places where men hangout especially outside a forestation, the woman motive will be fulfilled since she would use the nephew as an excuse to get the men to talk to her. The men also are viewed to be seductive. For instance, many women find firefighters to be seductive. The female are attracted to them simply because they portray loyalty and social status. The women describe them as being sexy and hot (“On seduction par. 7).

Many have argued that seduction demoralizes the elevation of love. Many have been thrown to into the immoral perversely zone. Seduction is linked to affect fragility and of appearance hence they term it immoral. Baudrillard sees seduction as a game, a ritual and a challenge with a secret complicity (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 114).

He further argues that seduction and love interchange course since one falls in love after a seduction process. The seducer is also driven with love to seduce his or her target. In addition, the fantasy of sexual influences can be experienced in the genitals of the seducers. This is expressed as the genesis of love. The fantasy quickly extends beyond the original range, and once the love grows stronger the seducer will have an easy time to achieve what he or she had set eyes on.

Seduction is viewed as influencing other people against their will (Freeman par. 2). It can also be quite unethical if one influences married a person or someone who is in a relationship. This jeopardizes the marriage or even lead to breaking up of the relationship.

A seduced married person will live with frustrations of sexual matrimonial disenchantment (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 127). The guilt drives him or her to contemplate on breaking off their previous engagement. Seduction can also bring about the implication of peoples feelings and thoughts. According to Christians, the secrecy of seduction is impacting denial, deflection, diversion and humility.

All these aspects within seduction makes one is uncomfortable since the guilt of fantasizing and evil, erotic intentions are still fresh in his or her mind. Additionally vulgar seduction may provoke a person’s integrity (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 120). One feels humiliated by the vulgar language from the seducer. Seduction also terms females as tools for sex. Most men who seduce women perceive them as ideal victims of fascination and fulfilling their sexual urges (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 138).

Most seduction process never results from physical attractions. In order for seduction to succeed the person being seduced has to create illusions and images in his or her mind. The illusion and images intervene and mix up in the brain to raise the desires within the seduced person (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 137). This shows that the modern flirtatious devices are possible means of encouraging seduction (Freeman par. 2). This is because most of these devices do not require a person to have a physical attraction towards the seducer.

From the text messages, chats, poems, phone conversation and fashion, they all create an illusion in ones mind without the physical contact of the seducer. Baudrillard continues to lament that there is no difference between passive and active seduction (Baudrillard, “Fatal Strategies” 140). No one can seduce another without being seduced back. As a result, it terms seduction as a myth in giddiness of appearance (Baudrillard, “Seduction” 126).

Works Cited “On seduction (and flirting) in the twenty-first century: A communication-theoretical perspective.” South African Journal for Communication Theory and Research 32.2 (2006). Print.

Agamben, Giorgio. “Dim Stockings, from the Coming Community.” Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, (1993):47-50. Print.

Baudrillard, Jean. “Fatal Strategies.” Los Angeles: Samiotexte 2008. Print. 128-141.

Baudrillard, Jean. “Seduction.” Superficial Abysses. New York: St. Martin’s Press 2001. 98-129. Print.

Baudrillard, Jean. Seduction, Paris: CTHEORY BOOKS. 2001. Print.

Freeman, Shanna. “How Flirting Works,” 2008. Web.

Good, Michael. “The Seduction Theory in the Twenty-First Century: Trauma, Fantasy and Reality.” Madison, CT: International Universities Press 29.4(2002): 41-44.

iPhone AppCafe 2011. Web.17 April 2012.

Rotella, Mark, Charlotte Abbott, and Sarah F. Gold. “The Seduction of Place: The City in the Twenty-First Century.” Publishers Weekly 247.29 (2000):184.

Standage, Tom. The Victorian, New York: Walker publishing Company. 1998. 127-143. Print.


Aspects of Production Essay college application essay help

In business, there are various activities that result from manufacturing to acquiring of the final product. The main objective of an industry is to produce a commodity that will satisfy the consumer’s requirements. For instance, to produce soap it is necessary to perform a certain process to achieve the final product (Nickels, McHugh and McHugh 496). Soap has the ability to clean a surface, thus taken as a basic need for a consumer.

Amalgamation of caustic soda, plant oil or animal fat is a way of making soap. Therefore, the various additives are vital in order to improve the fragrance, color and also the texture of the soap. There are different methods of making soap some taking a number of days, while others take a little time to come up with the final product.

Today the most popular process is the continuous process which quickly gives the company a chance to produce a large set of products within a short period. Kettle process is another method of processing soap although it takes much time to get to the final product.

The various processes that take place during the process include boiling of the raw materials, salting to separate soap from glycerin, addition of caustic solution to remove extra fats, and pitching to separate the neat soap from impurities (Nickels 2008). In addition, an industry aims at making a profit as the byproducts obtained during the soap production, such as glycerin, are used to make drugs and lotions. There are four key steps in soap production. These include Saponification, Glycerin removal, Soap purification and Finishing.

After the company produces the product, it searches for a good market for its good. This means that the management needs to plan for advertisement of the product so as to ensure the consumers are aware of it. Advertisements can be done though various means like media and newspapers depending on the region targeted by the company. Since the company aims at making maximum profit, the management should ensure minimal utilization of revenue in marketing as well as a good distribution of the goods.

The management of the company ought to motivate employees to improve on the productivity, performance as well as the office customs. The motivation requires the management to set an excellent example for the employees and center on workers’ happiness, ensuring that there is the equal sharing of the company’s success among all, including the employees, as well as it is important to give the workers an opportunity to air their grievances (Nickels, McHugh and McHugh 296).

Moreover, the company may opt to promote the workers who show impressive performance in their work and also award those who work hard to achieve the success. Promotions create a better field where the workers compete for various posts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Payment of investors is another aspect that the management ought to mull over to ensure that the company benefits from selling its goods. There are two categories of arrangement that include debt and equity. Debt method involves the company borrowing revenue from an investor who lends the money at an interest.

In the second method, which is an equity method, the investor lends the company a certain amount, and via an agreement, the investor is entitled to some share in the company’s profits. The deals are normally flexible as the investors understand that the company needs time to pay them back.

In conclusion, the various aspects of production ought to be put into consideration so as to come up with a successful business plan. In addition to this, the management of an industry ought to ensure that workers’ needs are satisfied so as to create the necessary conditions to achieve the success of the industry.

Works Cited Nickels, William, McHugh, James, and Susan McHugh. Understanding Business. New York: McGraw-Hill. 2008. Print.


Ethics Program: New Consultancy Firm Code of Ethics Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Standards and procedures

Ethics training program

Systems to monitor, audit and report misconduct

Review and improve ethics program



Introduction Governments as well as various stakeholders have continuously called upon organizations and their employees to uphold high standards of ethics and moral while carrying out their duties, tasks and responsibilities. Indeed, there are various ways in which firms can respond to such calls. In most cases, business entities have responded by developing formal ethics programs which have been used to help employees to take appropriate actions while engaging in business.

According to Cheeseman (2010), a code of ethics refers to principles and rules crafted by an organization to guide employees. The primary purpose of code of ethics is to ensure that organizations and professional take actions that are socially, professionally and environmentally acceptable (Ferrell, Fraedrich


Grass Fed vs. Corn Fed Cattle Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction The beef industry has made remarkable progress in management, genetics, and nutrition over the past 30 years to attain the most affordable, productive, and efficient beef supply in the globe. However, the present times report the greater part of animals spend anywhere from 3 to 4 months in feedlots being nourished on granule before butchery.

Unless beef consumers knowingly choose grass-fed beef, the available beef in most stores is from corn fed cattle. Advances in corn-based grain in feedlots are more common in the food industry. These cattle live in fresh air and can increase nutritional quality of grassland; also, they can produce milk in high quality environment and grow healthier than the grain fed cattle.

On the other hand, corn fed cattle live in the feedlot, kept from the outdoor which gives the animals stress and makes them sick. In most cases, these feedlots are overcrowded which makes spread of diseases easy amongst the cattle. The feeding of cattle has been a significant issue of research and notable is the conclusion that cattle are ruminant by nature. This means that cattle feed in different ways, which means different cattle, can feed on different products.

Discussion The feeding patterns of cattle indicate that cattle feed on grass because that can easily digest. Grass is widely available, and plants can substitute in the event grass is not available. Feeding cattle on corn has several disadvantages including the fact that corn is not easily digestible. In addition, when corn stays in the stomachs of cattle for a long time it can make the animals sick.

Corn is not appropriate for animals particularly in cattle, because when they get sick, the cattle may cause an acidic environment. Corn fed cattle face health problems, which can lead, to spread of bacteria in feedlot. In order to curb the spread of diseases amongst the cattle, the animals get antibiotics injections, which help, prevent the disease in the animal, and it is widespread within the feedlot (Cynthia


There Will Be Blood Essay essay help online

The film ‘There Will Be Blood’ by Anderson presents various themes among them capitalism, greed, hatred, revenge and godlessness. However, the title of the film summarizes its most important concerns. Daniel Plainview is prevents the hero in the film from succeeding and later becomes lonely, a factor that ends the film tragically. This essay analyzes the perspectives presented in the title of the film and how they help in understanding the concept’ There Will Be Blood.’

Daniel Plainview is a complicated character in the film who is overly mistrusting. His last name ‘Plainview’ serves to portray his supposed lack of trust. He does not strive to gain a better understanding of people and never values them since they just like commodities to him. His ability causes him to be proud and also compels him to feel disgusted with the incompetence of other people. He cannot see anything in people that would make him like them.

The only person he ends up liking later is a child he adopted. He says that he cannot continue to do things with people he does not trust because it makes him feel lonely. Daniel’s first name means ‘God is my Judge’ and ‘judgment by God’ (A Critical Analysis of There Will Be Blood 2). The meaning of the name first implies that as the film ends, God judges him by retribution for his pride. Secondly, it is also implied that Daniel subconsciously considers himself as a God who judges.

He strongly believes that the words he speaks are powerful and that things must turn out they way he says they will. His appearance before people is characterized by talks of the things he intends to do for them. For example, his meeting with Tilford turns into a confrontational platform where he tells him that he should not lecture him on how to raise his own family.

He eventually threatens to cut his throat to silence him. After his winning of the oil contract of the union, he says that it was obvious for him to win. Plainview’s voice is his power thus he does not allow anybody to silence him. This helps the audience to understand him well and the reason why he always uses force to achieve his goals. He will use any means even it is shedding blood hence the title ‘there will be blood.’

As the film comes to an end, the words spoken are ‘I’m finished.’ The ending is quite a sad one as Plainview tries to prove that he still possesses the power of speech, although it is evident that he is not happy. He declares that the film has ended and also says that he is finished thus presenting double meaning. He destroys his life by perpetrating a murder in the presence of a witness. This portrays him as a person who will do anything to achieve what he wants.

He had said that there will be blood and this justifies the title of the film through this murder. Another significant portion of the film is the one that presents the idea that what is said is believed. In this portion of the film, the underlying meaning behind its title is clearly brought out. The first literal meaning is that violence will not be inevitable in the film. Plainview has the ability and will to kill in order to accomplish his mission.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second meaning is inferred from his words when he says there will be blood. This makes the outside audience believe so because he has said it while the third and most important one is the statement he makes as he attempts to create family or kinsblood for the sake of his mission. It is a desperate endeavor for an individual to create a family by simply saying it verbally. This is sheer vanity which forms the bulk of the play (A Critical Analysis of There Will Be Blood 5).

His son is a symbol of the God complex Plainview talks about. He strives to have the child resemble him. In other words, his desire is to see a rebirth of himself through the son. Unfortunately, the son suffers from deafness which is the last thing he could have expected. This makes him lose all the powers he has over his son hence he fails to raise him in the manner he wants to.

He can no longer use his authoritative voice to communicate to his son. Eventually, his verbal stories of being a family man never materialize. Plainview looks for blood to finish his loneliness in a manner that is rather pitiful. He declines to accept his alleged long-lost brother, Henry, and tells him that he must denounce his ambition.

This gives him an opportunity to have close association with somebody who does not challenge him. He later kills Henry when he discovers him to be an intruder since it is impossible for him to have people who are not his blood close to him. His shortsightedness causes him to lose any family that could be close to him.

The section of the film named reaping the conclusion leads to the film’s tragic irony and the other meaning of ‘There will be Blood. Plainview does not succeed in his attempts to solve the loneliness he is going through.

He ruins every person who qualifies to be his blood, even though not necessarily family blood. ‘There will be blood’ implies that sacrifices have to be made according to him. However, this compels him to lose individuals who could be his blood. His arrogant way of speaking does not negate the fact that he is human and mortal.

Irony becomes more evident when Eli is considered ideal. And yet, he continually offers sacrifices to the salvations due to his fate. This is God but in a person who is mortal. Biblically, Jesus was given to the human beings by God but this is a sacrifice that Plainview is not ready to make. In the name of God, Eli is false just like Plainview is in the image of God.

We will write a custom Essay on There Will Be Blood specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One important aspect to highlight is the misconstrued notion that the main focus of the film is capitalism. It is true that capitalism is one of the themes in the film but this is not what drives Plainview.

Human greed in the film resembles capitalism. The word refers to capital accumulation which means sanctioned property or riches. Plainview cannot be described as a greedy man because greedy people value personal gains rather than values and people close to them. In a bid to prove his ability, he chooses to pursue difficult long-term benefits instead of cheap short-term ones.

His wish to have a trustworthy person in his business is also evident (A Critical Analysis of There Will Be Blood 12). The film strikingly uses an appropriate cinematography to document the loneliness of Plainview. This is done through the inviting opening scenes and the shots that depict solitary vegetation and deserted landscapes. It is an interesting film to watch because in real life, many people have characteristics that resemble those of Plainview hence it is easy for them to identify with it.

Works Cited A Critical Analysis of There Will Be Blood 2008. Web.


Concept of the Jesus Resurrection in Christianity Report argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Religion and human beliefs are closely interconnected as depending on the country people live in and the culture they follow, people have particular vision of the past, present and future. Christianity is the religion which has many trends and direction. There are a lot of different confessions and beliefs within this system that it is difficult to distinguish those for a simple person.

However, the changes and the variations of the Christianity are rather new tendencies. Looking at the earliest Christians, it is possible to say that their beliefs were common. Thus, dwelling upon the vision of the Jesus’ resurrection and their view of the apocalyptic world, it is possible to say that Jesus’ divine, immortality and other specific characteristics connected with the resurrection may be believed as the central reasons for people to believe in the apocalypses.

The earliest Christians’ understanding of Jesus’ resurrection is based on the belief that by this action God has selected Jesus as the most deserving person on the world to become God, his followers. Additionally, many people consider Jesus’ resurrection as the hint for the whole mankind on what is going wait for those who follows the rules and principles of God.

Thus, Jesus’ resurrection is the reasons why people are sure that the life on the Earth has the end. It is possible to predict that those who are going to live the fair lives and follow the rules and principle taught by Jesus, they would have an opportunity to come through the way of Jesus’ resurrection (Ehrman 58).

The earliest Christians were sure that the death is like a sleep which is going to last for some time until the world is cleaning and only those who managed to lead a life according to the Jesus’ teaching may deserve the resurrection. It means that the early Christians believed that in the apocalyptic nature of the world as to resurrect people are to die, and the whole world is to disappear for a moment to start a new free from sins existence.

Nowadays, the main idea of the Christianity is the resurrection which is possible only if people lead the fair lives and in accordance with the God’s principles. Therefore, it may be even said that the Jesus’ resurrection is one of the reasons why people believe in the apocalyptic nature of the world. Jesus was the person who took all the sins of the humankind with the purposes to redeem them and help people start a new life free from cruelty, deception, and violation.

However, looking at the world where too much despair and suffering, Early Christians believed that the judgment day would come and only those who fairly believed in God and followed his principles would be saved. Therefore, the resurrection should come after apocalypses which is the judgment day when each one will have to answer for all the actions done on the Earth.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, it may be concluded that the Jesus’ resurrection has become one of the main reasons for the whole mankind to wait for the judgment day and resurrection of those who deserve it. Moreover, many early Christians are sure that God made it possible for all to see Jesus’ resurrection with the purpose to notify them that Jesus was going to be his followers and point at the future of those who are going to lead the lived free from sins.

Works Cited Ehrman, Bart D. A Brief Introduction to the New Testament. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008. Print.


Chinese Company Research Research Paper best essay help

Company summary HSBC was founded in 1865 in Shanghai and Hong Kong. It is a wholly owned subsidiary of HSBC group which has over 7,000 offices around the world. The bank’s headquarter is located in Hong Kong and serves about 570 branches in 20 countries and regions within the Asian-Pacific region.

The bank provides a wide range of banking and financial services, and is among the world’s leading organizations in the industry. Together with its subsidiaries, the bank holds consolidated assets worth HK$5,607 billion and reported total revenue of HK$187,559 million as at the end of FY 2011 (HSBC, 2011). In addition to being the source of employment, HSBC is engaged in Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) as well as other non-business activities that are important to the banking business.

Company performance

One of the major achievements of HSBC in the last five years is the establishment of HSBC Bank (China) Company Limited. The subsidiary is among the leading foreign investors in the Mainland China with investments worth US$5 billion.

The impact of this HSBC growth occurred when they launched gold-exchange business and became the first and only financial institution to conduct business as a party of the Shanghai Gold Exchange in 2008. Other notable developments include the expansion of banking and financial services by individual subsidiaries.

The consequence of these developments has been the continued increase in revenues which lead to profitability. The FY2010 indicated an increase of HK$12,201 million to reach HK$57,597 million as compared to HK$36,787 million in FY2009. The profits for FY2011 were HK$67,591 million which increased by HK$9,994 million (HSBC, 2011). This growth in profit is expected to continue as the bank continues to capture new markets.

Business strategies

HSBC and its subsidiaries provide banking and other financial services across the globe. The bank provides personal financial services including mortgages, private loans, wealth management, savings account, credit cards, foreign exchanges, customer lending, international payments and insurance policies.

The bank also offers commercial banking services such as foreign trade financing, treasury and capital markets, investment finance services and commercial cards.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The firm’s international banking provides financial solutions and investment banking; world asset management and capital investment products; and market operations that provide services in credit. HSBC operates in about 21 countries and regions. The areas of operations are divided into several territory including the Asian-Pacific, China, Europe, MENA region and Africa.

Competitive position

The HK and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited is probably the most competitive bank in terms of revenue acquisition when compared with other Chinese banks. In terms of assets and capital, the bank is the leader. However, this competitive position is attributed to the global presence of its banking and financial markets. Other banks such as Industrial and Commercial Bank of China, China Construction bank and Bank of China have indicated better performance at the local level. Indeed, the profit growth rate of the Bank of China is much higher than that of HSBC and its global expansion is a big threat.

Key questions

What is the firm doing to maintain the lead in the banking sector?

What risk management strategies are in place?

Does the bank prepare for economic crisis?

What strengths has the bank secured in order to increase profitability?

Given the current global economic situation, does the bank perceive any future threats?



Our Latin Heritage Report college admission essay help

The Church of the Palms is a Presbyterian church of very modern design, but with a Spanish Mission feel. The church offered a pleasant, light-filled performance space for the Saratoga Pops Orchestra’s February 12 concert entitled “Our Latin Heritage”.

The crowd was at or near capacity, having waited in line for the chance to hear music with a Hispanic focus. The choices of Robin Wilkes, conductor and director of instrumental studies at the State College of Florida, Manatee-Saratoga campus, highlighted music inspired by the rhythms, melodies, and moods of Iberia (State College of Florida).

This could have been an effort to reach out to the Hispanic community of the region, and familiarize the non-Hispanic residents with these musical themes. The conductor turned the experience into a learning experience for everyone with brief explanations of each piece

Of The Cuban Overture, George Gershwin (1898-1937)[1], wrote that the composition reflected his brief experience in Havana, and melded his own themes with decidedly Cuban rhythms (Los Angeles Philharmonic).

Its score calls for claves, maracas guiro and bongos, in addition to the usual complement of symphonic instruments, and it clearly required a definite percussion section (Stovall). This is what Samuels calls ”the colors and the rhythms of Havana” created when Gershwin “exploited the unique sounds of Cuban instruments, and fused rumba and blues into symphonic overture form” (Samuels 154).

Both the rumba and blues are audible. The piece starts with a syncopated rhythm, with an emphasis, as is common in Latin music, on the upbeat. The joyous outburst of the opening, with its frenetic melody (A), leads to more contemplative wind melodies (B). After an almost heroic, grand theme (perhaps C?), the orchestra returns to a clearly evident Afro-Caribbean dance rhythm and the simple, syncopated melody of the opening for the finale (A).

The rumba rhythm allows the listener to the first/last sections to pick out the characteristic slow-quick-quick beat, two beats with one subdivided, with a swaying feel that keeps it from seeming repetitive[2]. One never forgets that this is Gershwin – his soaring woodwind lines, and melodies shifting from major to minor, remind one of Rhapsody in Blue without ever departing from his goal of evoking Cuba.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The section from the Carmen Suite, No. 1, titled Les Toreadors, is so familiar that it is difficult to stop and truly hear it again, but this was a great opportunity. Here again, indigenous themes are transformed by a foreigner’s loving and appreciative ear, into something quite magical.

The rhythm starts out as a march, sounding as though it could be written in 2/2 time, but is actually probably marked 4/4 (Bizet). The piece leads off with an almost simplistic staccato melody – then becomes more lyrical, perhaps marked legato. The 4/4 time signature would indeed allow for this transition with less noticeable disruption (Bizet).

The instrumentation seems typically classical, although there is perhaps more unusual percussion sound, for example that of the tambourine or castanets, than are characteristic of a piece with a less exotic origin for its themes (Kuenning). In the melodies that are largely major in key but shift quickly, the composer was trying to evoke an atmosphere that included Gypsy, Spanish, and Basque influences (Boynton).

This call to the exotic is heard again in Maurice Ravel’s Bolero. Originally written to be part of a ballet (Asada and Ohgushi), (Spiers), it is reminiscent of the music played in Indian restaurants. He termed it an, “”instrumentation essay without music “ (Haus and Rodriguez). However, although it sounds a bit like those pieces, which often include some improvisation and elaboration on a simple melodic idea, Bizet begins with a rather long and complex melodic line.

Then he repeats it over and over again (Asada and Ohgushi), adding instruments and handing the melody off to other voices in the orchestra, in strophic form. The melody is reiterated, but the composer urged that the pace be kept the same all the way through (Spiers). The result is exactly what Ravel intended; he wanted a sound that was “insistant” (Spiers). It is hypnotic and sensuous, with what seems like an unvarying single beat, surrounded by the swirl of a melody that stays largely in major key.

The diversity is provided by the increasing complexity of the number of instruments. These add different timbres and tonalities (Haus and Rodriguez). This effect of increasing complexity of timbre substitutes for much harmony, of which there is very little. There is also a dynamic shift over the length of the piece. By the end, it is supposed to have become much louder, and there is a modulation into a new key at the end that rounds it out and gives a sense of resolution rather than the piece just drifting off.

There were other Hispanic-themed pieces on the program, all lively and well-appreciated. The crowd was attentive and responsive. For this listener, these works are newly re-heard favorites. Hearing them live, rather than, for example, in a parody, or as a movie score, allows the composer’s original envisioning of the music to shine.

We will write a custom Report on Our Latin Heritage specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Hearing them arranged for the particular musical resources of the local community adds a great deal of intimacy to the experience. This is music that is unavoidably vibrant through melodically, whether performed on a digital synthesizer or by committed enthusiastic musicians who are clearly having a wonderful time. This was a terrific experience

Works Cited Asada, Miki and Kengo Ohgushi. “Perceptual Analyses of Ravel’s “Bolero”. Music Perception: An Interdisciplinary Journal Spring 1991: 241-249. Web.

Bizet, Georges. “Toreador Song.” 2012. Flutetunes. Web.

Boynton, SUsan. “Prosper Mérimée’s Novella, Carmen.” 2012. Columbia University. Web.

Haus, Goffredo and Antonio Rodriguez. “Formal Music Representation; a Case Study: the Model of Ravel’s Bolero by Petri Nets.” Unversity of Milan, 2012. Web.

Kuenning, Geoff. “Bizet: Carmen Suite № 1,.” 1995. UCLA. Web.

Los Angeles Philharmonic. “Cuban Overture: George Gershwin.” 2012. Los Angeles Philharmonic. Web.

Samuels, Mariesse. “Latin Dance-Rhythm Influences in Early Twentieth Century.” 2012. Herrera Elementary School. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Our Latin Heritage by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Spiers, John. Bolero. 2012. Web.

State College of Florida. “SCF’s Robyn Wilkes Named Conductor of Sarasota Pops Orchestra.” 14 June 2011. State College of Florida. Web.

Stovall, Sara. “Sarasota Pops Packs the House.” 2012. SRQ Magazine. Web.

Footnotes It was premiered in 1932 after the composer had begun studying formal composition principles with Joseph Schillinger.

Samuels asserts that Gershwin’s engaging tunes and beats acquired for him the nickname of the ” Latin from Manhattan” and began a Latin dance craze (Samuels ibid).


Homeschooling as an Option for Formal Education Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Public schools




Introduction In the United States, homeschooling is common. Studies have showed that 77% of students use ‘a homeschooling publisher, individual specialist or catalog’. This is used for sources of curricula and books. This is about the same percentage of students who use the public library, which is 78%. This statistic clearly indicates that homeschooling has been adopted and accepted as a valid education system in itself (Dan


Sound of English Report (Assessment) essay help

The Peculiarities of the Phrase’s Transcription The phrase for transcribing and the further analysis:

Don’t you want to whisk her off to Barbados to get married?

The transcription for this phrase according to the Standard Southern English/NRP should be presented as the following one:

[doʊntʃə wɒnʔ (t)ə wɪsk (h)ə rɔf tə bɑbeɪdəs tə geʔ meri:d]

The cases of the phonemic alternations appeared in pronouncing the phrase

[doʊntʃə] – Fusion/Reciprocal Assimilation. Assimilation as a phonological process can be observed in a connected speech when one sound is influenced by another sound which can precede it or be located after this sound (Davenport


Strategic Plan: Conceptualizing a Business Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Strategic planning and management is a concept used in management concerned with organizational decision making in relation to growth, development and transformation of the company. Besides coming up with these decisions, strategic management and planning is also concerned with implementing and enforcing them.

This is usually conducted in two phases, that is the planning phase and the implementation phase. Strategic planning according to Thompson, Gamble and Strickland (2006) involves “determining the organization’s mission, formulating policies to guide the organization in establishing objectives, establishing long term and short term objectives and determining the strategies that are used in achieving the organization’s mission” (p. 86).

Strategic implementation on the other hand involves coming up with guideline to implement the strategy, identifying the resources required to achieve these objectives, organizing the activities in their respective order and monitoring the strategy’s performance in relation to the laid down objectives.

Event management is a kind of business that requires effective strategic management and planning. Events in this case include entertainment sprees, weddings, conferences and many other such like events. Strategic management plays a major role in the success of this business for a number of reasons.

First, it considers the future of the business and assists in laying down long term strategies. Strategic management ensures that future uncertainties in the industry have been taken care of and this includes changes in technology and the need to expand the market share.

The second importance of strategic management is that it results in a greater efficiency owing to the planning involved and this guarantees the success of the business. Third, it reduces instances of confusion since the procedures to be followed are clearly set. Besides this, strategic management catapults growth by discovering greater opportunities in the industry. When conducting strategic planning, the management has to do a thorough research in the industry, and in the process ends up discovering more opportunities.

Strategic management in the event organizing business also plays an important role in ensuring business continuity. The planning is done based on future parameters and this means that the company is protected from threatening competition. When conducting strategic planning, one of the most essential areas is the performance of competitors and the loopholes that they can take advantage of.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These are sealed and so the management is assured that they will remain on top of the market for as long as the strategies are still being implemented and improved. When running a business, there are many external threats that cannot be discovered without involving strategic management. This therefore forms the other advantage of conducting strategic management (Pearce


Structure of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro Research Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help

The history of these two cities is rich in civilization matters, religion, economic empowerment and development of the east. The history surrounding the land between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris known as Mesopotamia and ancient Egypt is one that can be closely related to the Indus valley cities.

This paper is going to discuss the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro of the Indus valley. Generally, the Hindu religion can be traced back to the Indus valley. The two words sound the same that is, Indus and Hindus. In fact “Their chief god was Indra, god of the storm, whose weapon was the thunderbolt, and he rode to battle in a golden chariot drawn by two ruddy horses. As puramdara, the ‘fortdestroyer’, he gave the nomadic Aryans victory over the sophisticated agriculturalists living in the cities of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro” (Cotterell 60).

Mesopotamia is attributed to agrarian revolution and industrialization. The most featured activities were discovery of clothes through the use of the spinning jenny, the domestication of animals, and the discovery of plantation farming. This really changed the world and put Mesopotamia in the books of history which will go a long way. The road of civilization owes a lot to the land between rivers Euphrates and the Tigris.

Other remarkable activities are the fields of mathematics that led to the calendar system, astronomy in the predictions of eclipses, and medicine where diagnosis, prognosis and physical examination were invented. “Could this old world, which man has overthrown, be rebuilt, could human cunning rescue its wasted hillsides and its deserted plains from solitude or mere nomad occupation, from barrenness, from nakedness, and from insalubrity, and restore the ancient fertility and healthfulness of Mesopotamia” (Marsh 64)

The Indus valley also had remarkable things that were recorded about it. And because of that, excavations have continued to demystify its cities. The studies are mainly on economic, religious, social cultural, political, science and art. This paper examines them basing the facts on the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro cities of the Indus valley.The Indus valley is also well recorded in the records of civilization of the human beings.

It is said that the Indus valley activities can be traced back in to the 19th century. However, “the story of the ancient Indus Valley Civilization developed gradually. It does not enter the archaeological record until 1924 when Sir John Marshall began excavations at Harappa. Awareness of Harappa remains, however, goes back to the nineteenth century” (Javonillo 2). The banks of the Indus River are now the Pakistan and western India.

Someone may wonder why it took a lot of time for the Indus Valley to be documented as much as Mesopotamia despite its significance it has in civilization. It might have been due to the poor technological and education systems in place. The cities’ history was recorded after archaeologists started excavation. In this paper the structure of the two cities is considered basing the study on the economic, political, agricultural, technological, science, art and humanities, and the history of excavation along the Indus Valley.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Brief History on Excavation Like it has been indicated earlier, excavation started in the early 1820’s. The two cities are the major towns of Indus Valley that is Harappa and Mohenjo Daro. During the 19th century and, “In 1826 an English visitor called Charles Masson sawthe ruins.Some years later another visitor, an archaeologist named Sir Alexander Cunningham, visited Harrappa, but the ruins had been knocked down and all that was left was a huge mound of stones and rubble.

Four hundred miles away from Harrappa was a large area of ruined brick mounds” (Evans 2). The people who lived nearby thought that it was a very old burial site and called it Mohenjo-daro meaning ‘Mound of the Dead’. This is what attracted the archaeologists to study the remains of the two towns.

The traveller Masson saw the sites but he lacked the knowledge to determine the age of the ruins and their significance. However the archaeologist Alexander after seeing the site was interested to know exactly what was there and demystify the name Mohenjo Daro.Javonillo (67) explains that, “The late Dr. George F. Dales, Jr. of the University of California at Berkeley led the last major excavation of the site in 1964-65 (Kenoyer 2005).

Most recent archaeological work has been under the auspices of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) which deemed Mohenjo-Daro a World Heritage Site in 1980.”

This clearly shows that the two cities were a major concern to the world. It is said that excavation was difficult because of two major concerns namely: the intensity of weathering and the desire to conserve the site. Weathering is understood to be what determines which information can be found and from what. Some of the excavated material that may have had important information may have been so much worn out such that it was difficult to get any information from them.

Despite the fact that the excavated material was delicate to handle there was need to keep them safe in the archives. They were not going to be used and then thrown away. The fact that they had to be stored somewhere was a challenge because they had to be handled carefully.

Generally speaking, the cities were built on brick and stone on firm foundation. It is recorded that they had the most sophisticated water and sewerage system in the ancient times. Most activities were recorded on stone tablets and stone tablets. Trade was practiced with developed weights and measurements that facilitated it.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Structure of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Their children also had games that were developed using beads and other stone components. All this obviously indicated that there was a system of administration in the cities. May be they had a mayor for the city as shown in the section of political organization in the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro.

The people of the Indus Valley Civilization also developed a writing system which was used for several hundred years. However, unlike some other ancient civilizations, we are still unable to read the words that they wrote (British Museum, 2012).

This one apparently shows that their alphabet could have been complicated or they wrote in a way that would protect their civilization showing how sophisticated they were. But the worry is no more that of the Indus Valley but today’s world which keeps information that is encrypted with passwords. Hopefully there will be more sophisticated tools to learn the current when it is ancient.

Structure of Harappa and Mohenjero Daro How they came about

It is said that the ancient Indus Valley was larger than the famous ancient Egypt. However, that cannot be said conclusively. The Harappa and Mohenjero Daro were first discovered by an English traveller who saw ruins and was fascinated with them. Later on another traveller who was an archaeologist visited the site and thus the process of serious excavation started.

The Indus valley produced many remains that clearly indicated the economic, spiritual, political, and socio-cultural activities that the people who lived there carried out. The figure below shows a section of the ruins.

(BBC 2012)

Jansen (165) asks the question whether the cities were imported or they are original. In his explanation he says that, “Since the cities appeared to emerge suddenly, many archaeologists have thought that the concept of town planning in the Indus valley was the result of outside influence, or, as Wheeler wrote as recently as 1968 in his ‘Cambridge History of India’, an‘idea imported from Mesopotamia at the height of the Sumerian civilization and adapted in the Indus valley by the local populations” Jansen (165).

This theory simply tries to indicate that the city was imported through the influence from Mesopotamia however; this has been highly contested by more recent archaeologist. The archaeologists have asked questions that cannot be answered by that simplistic theory.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Structure of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The archeologists argue that the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro cities were unique cities with their own civilization known as the Harappian civilization. This civilization is said to spread to the upper parts of Pakistan and Afghanistan, and West India. Further it is recorded that the links that Harappa and Mohenjo Daro had with Mesopotamia were trade by land and sea. If this link was there then it means that both borrowed a leaf from each other.

This is mainly because if a business man performed business man from Mesopotamia then they would exchange ideas which would influence the activities of the other. And this would escalate throughout the city. Take an example of an architectural design. Once one a person has constructed a structure and it looks appealing to his friend he/she would lend it to his/her friend who would then modify it to suit his/her situation.

Because of this then there will be as series of passing the design which make it look like the people didn’t have their original ideas. This however may not be true because the excavated material may not necessarily be the only structures that existed on the two cities. After all there could have been similarities despite the fact that they developed independently because in both cases they were working to achieve the best in there time.

How did the cities look like?

The available documentation available from the excavation gives an insight how life was organized in terms of buildings and the streets with the sewerage system. It is depicted that the cities Harappa and Mohenjo Daro could have covered the largest area in ancient cities. This also means that perhaps they had the largest population which supported the existence of these large cities.

In fact that, “the population of Sumerian cities, thus calculated, ranged between 7,000 and 20,000; Harappa and Mohenjo-Daro in the Indus valley must have approximated to the higher figure”(Karlovsky and Sabloff 10). This approximation clearly shows that the Indus valley was actually a very big civilization even more than the Mesopotamia where archaeological were extensively done.

In the excavation process many pictures were taken from hot air balloons. These photographs were then examined and various findings were recorded ranging from sophistication in the drainage system, the arrangement of the houses and the sewerage system. It is believed that from the studies those houses were arranged in a systematic order.

The systematic order conclusively was related to the construction of the houses at the same time. It was characteristic that houses were connected to the same drainage system at the same level which was highly associated to chronology. The houses were connected to baked soil pipes which were discharged to the streets.

The architectural activities were simply remarkable because the buildings comprised of staircases at the main door. The baking of soil also indicates that the civilization level was high at that time. The organization of the rooms was also something to reckon about. Some of the buildings had many rooms to which each one of them seemed to be having a specific use.

The two cities were just a master piece of the time in terms of town planning. This is concluded because of various reasons namely: the town had a serious drainage system, the sewerage seemed to be well planned, and pottery was used to make pipes and other drainage system facilities.

There was a clear indication that there were more spacious houses at the higher levels but at the lower level the room space was reduced drastically. Perhaps this was an indication of the large population as compared to an earlier lower population. Either way the town planning was well organized in order to accommodate everybody who belonged to the community. Granaries were also located in the studies this indicated that the cities tried to be self-sufficient in the planning.

The city streets were also aligned in a particular direction that eased navigation throughout the two cities. In fact the streets and the drainage system were constructed together so as to reduce the working on the infrastructure.

It would have taken a civilized society to think and plan their town in that manner. Most cities today have challenges with the drainage system. Some make construction during a dry season without considering the rainy season. More often than not the buildings usually block the rainwater and hence causing serious risks to the community.

These plans are usually approved by city planning engineers who do not consider other structures that may have been installed at the same location. These are usually known as infamous engineering errors.Just as the argument on the engineering faults on the Titanic ship that was allegedly the use of week bolts and nuts which perhaps would have stopped the accident from taking that magnitude.

The people of Harappa and Mohenjoro Daro

The people of the two cities were thepeople who were living in the mountains and foothills of the Himalayas moved down to the fertile plain of the INDUS Valley (Ziegler 451). Due to pressure on land that is more of barren and economic factors generally people had to migrate to fair places. This indeed was to increase the production of food to feed the population.

Shelter was also something to reckon about because building material were not available on the dry Himalaya slopes and it was wise to move to the Indus Valley so as to use the resources that were available. It seems like these people were creative and hard working individuals who really wanted to improve their way of living. They were of their own kind in the whole of Asia.

The people of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro were very unique in their own way but some things came out clearly during the excavations. These things recorded are the ones that make the two cities worth of studying in a history and a religious study class. The following things are remarkable about the people of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro:

They are the earliest known civilization in south Asia

They designed their cities in a grid pattern with a complex drainage and sewerage system

They cultivated cotton which they spun and wove into decorated textiles and clothing

They had evidence of trade activities and transport systems by land and sea

They had complex housing designs of the time

The Pottery and clay work was awesome and hence this illustrated improved technology and a civilization that was unique

The use of copper metal in the manufacture of cattle driven carts

The unique writing on stone tablets that nobody has been able to read up to date

In terms of religion it is believed that the people were polytheist and they believed in many gods. It is also believed that they believed that the cow was a sacred animal. There were very many small statues found in the cities which indicated that they worshiped them as gods. The horn was believed to be the god of fertility. The dead were buried in wooden caskets or coffins at particular place within the city. Clearly the people of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro were a sophisticated civilization of the time.

Some people say that Hinduism is so much associated with the way of worship of the Harappian civilization worship. These people were generally known as Harappians. Indeed, “Mohenjo Daro or “Mound of the Dead” is an ancient Indus Valley Civilization city that flourished between 2600 and 1900 BCE” (Kenoyer 2009). It is one of the cities with a great civilization in the ancient times.

All archaeologists agree that indeed the people of Indus Valley were very organized, sophisticated, and bright and engaged themselves in activities that would have built an emperor that would have lasted forever. Unfortunately they didn’t live forever in to generations. It is believed that they were unable to survive an attack that wiped the whole city. Some people supposedly say the people of Indus valley were attached by a nuclear bomb that burned everything down.

This is so because in the excavations ash was found in the debris and ruins of the houses. This is a theory that needs cleaning and more evidence to be true. The language of the people of the valley cannot be told because the records indicate that the writings on the stone tablets cannot be read hence it is difficult to know which language the people were using. However, the fact that they practiced trade with the people of Mesopotamia there must have been a way of communication.

Economical Strengths of Mohenjo Daro and Harappa Cities

One thing for sure comes out clearly from the history of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro that they had trade links between themselves and the people of Mesopotamia. What they were exchanging and the method of exchange is what can be learnt about. However, “on the other hand, nickel is sometimes present in the copper used at Mohenjoro and Harappa, rising to 9.38 per cent.

In one object and to 3.34 in another, and its presence is attested in the ores of Rajput Ana and Afghanistan. There is, therefore, in the present state of our knowledge an unfortunately wide field” (Piggott 90). This indicates that there was widespread use of copper perhaps as the currency and means of exchange in the trade.

It is recorded that the people of Harappa and Mohenjo Daro practiced both crop and anima farming. Some of the crops grown were wheat, barley, melons, peas, and dates. Cotton was also grown, from which cloth was made.Domesticated animals included cattle, buffalo, donkeys, cats, pigs, goats, and sheep.

Chickens were first raised for food in the Indus Valley. This together with the use of cotton would have been good items of trade to other parts of the continent. They were also good in art and architecture which would have been a human resource for other cities of the time.

There are no records so far that may indicate slave trade in the valley. The Harappa civilization is mainly said to be more of urbanism than agriculture based but the surrounding civilization may have been a source of what they needed for survival. Therefore in one way or another they must have had something to exchange with so as to buy what they wanted. It is recorded that they moved from the barren Himalaya slopes which therefore indicates that they had strong interests in Agriculture.

It is also indicated that once it rained from the mountainsthe drains came with fertile soils which were used to plant crops like cotton which was spanned and used to make clothes. These clothes would have been sold to other civilizations hence making it the major activity in the trade.

The two cities look like they had a strong economy by this can be put to doubt because of a number of issues. One, if the economy was that strong why did the two cities just disappear? And in the event of an attach after wiping out the Harappians why didn’t the attackers take the land if it was rich in minerals and other economic activities like being at a strategic point? This can be debated as well.

However, since the excavations did not suggest a well-organized system of governance then this could have been a weak administration that would have not defended its people. This would explain why they were wiped out easily. The valley at the least provided them with a livelihood because the land was not as barren as to that from where they came.

The fact that the archaeologists did not suggest a system of government does not really explain why there was no administration. In the case of being wiped out easily would have been issues to do with preparedness. It also indicates that for example the Indus Valley people had not received any aggression from anybody hence it was caught unprepared. Despite all this it was a remarkable civilization of the time.

Cultural Interaction across Afro-Eurasia

The Indus valley is a remarkable civilization for the Asian continent with links of up to date. “World history has been enriched by the Indus peoples,who participated in what has come to be called the 3rdMillennium Middle Asian Interaction Sphere,which linked peoples from the Indus to the Mediterraneanand from Central Asia to the Arabian Gulf in animportant trading network” (Possehl 1196).

It was a great interaction of the time mainly encouraged by trade to the land between the rivers Tigris and Euphrates. It is recorded that the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro traded various commodities to the Mesopotamia people. The range of products was: carnelian, lapis lazuli,pearls, various exotic woods, fresh dates, copper, andgold.

However it is not very clear what the Indus valley people were being traded with but through intuition once can suppose that they were receiving oil, perishables and cloth because that is what they were not selling. This indicates that they were selling and buying from the communities around the Asian continent. Since it took quite some time before excavations were done it is important to note that some information may have not been explained.

It is also indicated that they believed in a male deity usually depicted by use of a male bull or even a male buffalo. Then the people are represented by female images. There was worship of the fire at the later Vadic Indus but this cannot substantiate the worship of fire in the Indus valley. However the Hindu religion is somehow associated with the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro cities and their form of worship. The fact that the cow was sacred as well as the buffalo is a clear indication of the transfer of related forms of worship.

Demise of the Indus Valley

This is indeed was a powerful civilization however without serious military encounter. May be by that time military was not a way of solving disputes or perhaps there were minimum external aggressions. Then why was the Harappa and Mohenjo Daro attached and wiped out? Well this question can only be argued from the archeological findings and the explanations given by the archaeologists. There was evidence of violence especially from the Aryan Empire.

“This evidence of violence and of rapidly-changing populations can mean only that the RG IV and RG V phases represent a time of troubles, of insecurity and raiding, arson and pillaging in North Baluchistan” (Piggott 214). The Aryan people lived in different tribes and these tribes were always at war with one another. This kind of aggression is the one believed to be extended to the people surrounding them. The extortion of taxes from the people led to the establishment of the empire which then came to rule the land.

The death of Harappan urbanism may as well been associated with other theories. McIntosh indicates that a shift in the way of cultivation from the outer regions disrupted craft production, civic food defense, building and drain maintenance, and other publicly organized works on which the running of the cities depended.

Recent Developments

Although there is an ‘equifinality’ of possibilities, recent research has focused on the role of climatic changes which may have precipitated abandonment of settlements due to the rise or fall of rivers (Possehl 1002). Other things that are current about the Indus Valley are about its preservation as a cultural site.

The province of Sindh abounds with its rich cultural heritage, historical and archaeological sites and traditional crafts, said Chief Minister Qaim Ali while asserting that his government would ensure protection and preservation of the Indus Valley civilization (The Nation, 2012).

Works Cited Cotterell, Arthur. A Dictionary of World Mythology. Oxford:Oxford University Press, 1986.

British Museum, 2012. Indus Valley. Web.

Evans, Judith. “Indus Valley.”Collaborative learning, 2007. Web.

Jansen, Michael. “Mohenjo-Daro, city of the Indus Valley,” Endeavour, New Series, Volume 9, No. 4, New Yolk: Pergamon Press, 1985. Print.

Javonillo, Charise Jo. “Indus Valley Civilization: Enigmatic, Exemplary, and Undeciphered.” ESSAI: Vol. 8, Article 21. Web.

Karlovsky, Lamberg C. C.


Denver Health’s private cloud Case Study writing essay help

1. Patient information should be held confidential at all times. In order to meet this requirement, Denver Health makes sure that all handling and information storage is done in Denver Health’s private cloud. These sun rays require to be upgraded after every eight hours unlike the typical two to three years of PC.

They have also instituted the sign-on procedure that is used by doctors and nurses upon their arrival at work. They sign on a single Sun Ray terminal by inserting smart card and then logging-in the name and password. The doctor or the nurse withdraws the card, which logs off the session at that terminal but still leaves session active for the doctor or nurse.

When entering a patient’s rooms during the day, they are only required to reactivate the session, which takes 5-10 seconds. 2. Thinidentity can be used by schools to support the technology needs of faculties and as well as those of students. This can be done by instituting private cloud in the faculty to ensure that it runs its activities without unnecessary interferences from other faculties. This will make the coordination the between the departments under one faculty faster.

Use of Thinldentity will boost the quality of services they deliver to the students and other stakeholders. The faculty may carry out research and training to reduce the resistance to new technology. The faculty should redefine its roles to fit with the new technology. This will require some guidance and encouragement to reduce poor faculty retention. Thinldentity can support technology needs of the students.

With the increased varieties of mobile application and ever-expanding cellular network, the school can use mobile technology to achieve this by enabling its students to access some of the services using their phones. School management can encourage students to use laptops in the campus for learning. Increasing electrical outlet access and Ethernet ports will increase the students’ access to online study materials and frequent recharging for their laptops. The number of printing stations should also be increased.

Flexible and accessible learning to students should be ensured. 3.A public cloud is based on standard cloud computing model where a service provider makes the resources available to the public over the internet. It may be free or payable. As compared to the private cloud which is data center that uses cloud computing technologies, public cloud has certain benefits. Firstly, it has easy and cheap set-up because some costs are catered for by the provider.

For example, application, bandwidth and hardware cost. Secondly, it has scalability to meet the needs of the individual and lastly, there is no waste of resources because someone pays for what he uses. 4.The smart card is used for collecting and storing data related to a particular person.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The smart card serves to protect personal data thus ensuring that users are protected. Some of the features of smart card are secure key and data storage, storing device security, secure communications between the card and card readers and ability to store biometric templates, for example, fingerprints.

The sim card would safeguard the patient’s private information that he does not want it disclosed. In order to ensure that the patient has access only to his information, the password should be only known to the user. The information security should be strong to eliminate the chances of eavesdropping. The smart card should also support biometric authentication to enhance privacy of personal information.

The strong support for privacy of information is a requirement of a smart card because it can give firewall for an individual thereby giving only needed data and when it is required. 5.Denver Health can extend the Thinldetity beyond its environs by encouraging the patients who cannot be accommodated within their premises to embrace its usage. It would only work with the advancement of technology to those patients.

Doctors and nurses working from home would save many lives of patients and save a lot of time and resources. Use of mobile phones will make it easier and cheaper since no travelling expenses are incurred. 6.Denver Health has some of effectiveness metrics that may be used to justify their use of Thinldentity. Through its use, they have been able to minimize the loss of time incurred by doctors and nurses when entering patients’ rooms and logging in the computer.

The advantages of implementing Thinldentity are evident. It has reduced the costs incurred by $5.7 million. Denver Health used to lose $4 million per year due to physician loss of time. Costs are also saved in that the upgrading of thin clients needs to be done once in every eight years, which is far better compared to the previous PC that needed to be upgraded in two to three years.

With all those advantages, Denver Health is likely to have created a good name and hence attracting many clients due to faster and efficient service. In conclusion, Thinldentity has improved the status of Denver Health and should continue to be implemented. It has improved the welfare of the patients through better quality services and faster treatment of patients as compared with before.


Motivate Your Employees produced by BNet Video for CBS Money Watch Essay (Movie Review) college essay help near me: college essay help near me

The main issue which a lot of managers discuss as the controversial for them is the question of motivating employees. The video Motivate Your Employees is created by BNet in order to provide the answers to the question what necessary factors which can motivate employees for achieving their goals work and which aspects are significant to know for every manager.

Teresa Amabile, the author of The Progress Principle, and Lindsay Blakely, the Senior Editor of BNet, are invited to the studio to discuss the issue. Thus, the major problem for the discussion presented in the video is the question of how to motivate the employees effectively. With focusing on the information provided in her book, Teresa Amabile determines a range of aspects which can be considered as influential for increasing the employees’ motivation among which the major factors are accentuated.

BNet is one of the most popular business sites which works in association with CBS Money Watch and specializes in the questions of business management that is why the material from the site can be considered as credible. Motivate Your Employees is devoted to the current problem connected with the field of the effective management. It is stated in the video that employees provide the best results of their working process when they are happy, successful, and highly motivated.

Nevertheless, it is necessary for managers to pay attention to the aspects which can effectively motivate employees and stimulate them for reaching the best results in their work. It was very interesting to know that today 95% of managers really do not realize what aspects can motivate their employees inside organizations. That is why this problem requires its proper discussing.

At the beginning of the conversation Teresa Amabile presents the most surprising and unexpected factor which can contribute to increasing the employees’ motivation and which draws the audience’s attention. Thus, Amabile states that the issue of making progress in work depends on ‘little things’ which form our everyday reality and influence our behaviour and actions.

Small victories and any other little steps supported by positive emotions at workplaces can contribute to the larger progress. However, it is more interesting that the opposite side of this phenomenon is the fact that little negative things which can happen with an employee during his working day can influence his results more obviously, but negatively.

The managers’ task is to create the positive atmosphere at workplaces in order to guarantee the employees’ high level of productivity. Moreover, Teresa Amabile accentuates definite factors which can be used by managers for developing the necessary encouraging atmosphere in the organization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These factors are the recognition for the work’s results, set of clear goals, support of the positive interpersonal relations based on nourishers and interpersonal events, expression of respect and encouragement (“Motivate Your Employees”).

Thus, it is stated in Motivate Your Employees created by BNet that today managers are challenged not only to organize their employees’ work effectively but also to motivate them to make the constant progress. The employees’ intrinsic motivation is based on those positive and negative ‘little things’ which happen to them at their workplaces every day.

That is why the successful manager should concentrate on creating the stimulating atmosphere at the workplace, to encourage the employees, and to contribute to forming the supportive interpersonal relations between employees in order to develop the necessary conditions for their making progress.

Works Cited “Motivate Your Employees”. The Live One, BNet. 18 Aug. 2011. Video file. Web.


Civilization in Mesopotamia and Egypt Essay scholarship essay help

Civilization involves high level developments on the cultural, political and social aspects of a region or a country. Mesopotamia and Egypt can be described as the two earliest civilizations which were located along the great river systems. Mesopotamia and Egypt had well established religion, art, architecture, education as well as political organizations. Both of them were very similar although there were some differences (Seignobos, 123-127).

Both of them were found along the east. However, Mesopotamia was found in the Middle East, and it is currently known as Iraq. It was located along the two major rivers, Euphrates and Tigris. The word Mesopotamia is a Greek word meaning between two rivers. Both of them had political organizations. However, Mesopotamia had various states while Egypt consisted of a centralized state.

During the early days in Mesopotamia, the cities were headed by priests. However, these priests abused their powers, which led to the rise of kings. Each state in Mesopotamia operated separately from each other with its own government and gods. On the other hand, Egypt was ruled by pharaoh who was the only powerful king.

During this time, Egyptians stayed along the river Nile (Seignobos, 123-127). They were not living in the cities as compared to those people living in Mesopotamia. Both of them used calendars to guide them on their daily lives and farming activities. The people of Mesopotamia used calendars in order to determine when the floods could occur along the Euphrates and Tigris rivers (Chadwick, 126-140).

However, the two calendars had some differences. For instance, the Mesopotamian calendar was shorter than the Egyptian calendar with eleven days. Both Mesopotamia and Egypt had similarities in terms of religion (Rollin, 225-228). Both of them worshipped more than one god. They also believed that the good people on earth will be granted an everlasting life in heaven. The Egyptians also believed that their kings were spiritual leaders (Chadwick, 137-151).

Mesopotamia and Egypt had architecture and art which were their major achievements. Ziggurat was used as a centre of conducting celebrations in Mesopotamia. The Egyptians started building using bricks instead of stones, and they were regarded as the greatest builders. They built their first pyramids using six large stone brick tombs. In Mesopotamia people were well educated as well as in Egypt. Mesopotamians and Egyptians attained science and mathematical skills such as algebra, geometry as well as addition and subtraction.

Most of the people in Mesopotamia were able to compute quadratic equations, and they were also very advanced in algebra and geometry (Chadwick, 157-160). The Egyptians used their mathematical skills in order to build great pyramids. Mesopotamians had a lot of mathematical skills as compared to the Egyptians. The Egyptians had a lot of developments in the field of architecture and art than the Mesopotamians.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Both of them had great rulers. In Mesopotamia, there were Sumerian rulers known as Lugal while the Egyptians were ruled by Pharaohs. The first government in Mesopotamia was formed by Akkadians who had an absolute power. Cyrus the great was a powerful ruler in Persia. He led the Persian to revolt against the Medes (Rollin, 324-328).Alexander the great was another powerful ruler in the history of civilization.

He conquered Egypt without facing any opposition. He respected the culture, religion, customs and the people of Egypt. The Egyptians liked him as he delivered them from Persia. He was considered as a god in Egypt .he introduced the Greek culture in this country and launched the city of Alexandria.

Works Cited Chadwick, Robert. First Civilizations. Chicago: Equinox Publishing Limited, 2005.Print.

Rollin, Charles. The ancient history of the Egyptians,Cathaginians,Assyrians Medes and Persians. New York: FQ Books, 2010.Print.

Seignobos, Charles. History of ancient civilization. New York: Nabu Press, 2010.Print.


Hunger Games – Character Analysis Essay essay help

Katniss Everdeen is the main character and narrator of the novel The Hunger Games. We first meet Katniss as a teenager of 16 years who must support her family after her father’s death. Her mother also suffers from depression. Katniss must also support her younger sister. Katniss and her family live in a poverty-stricken coal-mining District 12. It is the realities Katniss encounters that shape her traits.

Katniss is the stalwart of her family. She has to support a depressed mother and her younger sister after the death of her father who died tragically in the coal mine accident. The fact that her mother could not cope with the loss made Katniss to take the role of the head of the household.

She must provide for the household, and save her family from starvation. Katniss talks about her roles as follows. “It was slow-going at first, but I was determined to feed us. I stole eggs from nests, caught fish in nets, sometimes managed to shoot a squirrel or rabbit for stew, and gathered the various plants that sprung up beneath my feet. Plants are tricky. Many are edible, but one false mouthful and you’re dead. I checked and double-checked the plants I harvested with my father’s pictures. I kept us alive” (Collins 4.19)

Katniss symbolizes the will of a woman to survive despite all odds. She must be innovative and hardworking to do this through foraging and hunting. These are what form the core of her female roles and identity.

Katniss also offers support to others outside her family. Katniss also extends her protective instinct to a friend and an ally, Rue from District 11. She tells us that Rue too is a survivor, and that is why she formed an alliance with her. This is crucial among the female characters in this novel. They must survive despite all odds.

Katniss’ role of protecting and providing for others extends even to male characters in the novel. Peeta Mellark is a son of a baker who is only good with cake decorations. Peeta lacks hunting and gathering skills we notice in Katniss. Katniss risks her life so that she can deliver medicine that can save Peeta from a near death.

We can see Katniss as a female character who others can rely on for their survival. However, we must ask what role Katniss will play if she wins Hunger Games. This makes her ponder her possible new identity and role in society. “For the first time, I allow myself to truly think about the possibility that I might make it home.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To fame. To wealth. To my own house in the Victor’s Village. My mother and Prim would live there with me. No more fear of hunger. A new kind of freedom. But then…what? What would my life be like on a daily basis? Most of it has been consumed with the acquisition of food. Take that away and I’m not really sure who I am, what my identity is. The idea scares me some” (Collins 23.62)

This reflection remains unresolved at the end of the novel, but we can guess Katniss will have to find herself a new identity and role once she returns to District 12.

Life in District 12 is hard; thus survival is the term other characters use in the description of other characters. This makes Peeta’s mother says “She’s a survivor, that one” (Collins 7.31). Survival is the main concern for Katniss wherever she may be. The needs to survive have made her fish, hunt, fight, and trap all manner of food items.

The survival instinct makes Katniss a hardened person. Katniss has no strong attachments to other characters or things. Thus, she lacks strong emotions to relate with other characters.

Katniss has all her energy directed to daily activities of making ends meet. Consequently, she is a sentimental character. This trait makes her different from other female characters in the novel.

For instance, Katniss shows lack of love for Buttercup, the family cat. Katniss views Buttercup as “another mouth to feed” rather than a playmate. This could be the reason why Katniss tried to drown the cut so as to save it from starvation and death eventually. Likewise, Katniss has no strong attachments to children. She is not thinking of having children.

This makes her tells Gale “Who would fill those mouths that are always asking for more?” (Collins 1.28). The thought of bringing children in a poverty-stricken life scares her. This is a deviation from normal role of female in society. As a female, society expects Katniss to take the traditional role of women, such as child-bearing and house chores.

We will write a custom Essay on Hunger Games – Character Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Katniss does not approach the issue of love like any other normal female. It is difficult to understand her feelings of love given she has to struggle and provide for her family. However, we can notice some form of love among characters she interacts with in the novel. Team Gale provides some of the most important moments in Katniss life.

These are some of the moment happiest times in her life. However, Katniss keeps her feelings to herself because of family responsibilities. We notice this through her opinion on children and the need to cater for her family.

Peeta has always loved Katniss. However, Katniss does not return his love because they are competitors in the game.

Critics may consider Katniss a heartbreaker because Katniss ignores Peeta’s feelings. Peeta declared his love for Katniss before a National Television making a private affair public.

Amidst her confusion, what comes out of Katniss is “Peeta has made me an object of love” (Collins 10.33). In this context, the statement may present ambiguity. It can empower and disempower both characters. Katniss must play a role before the audience that may change her life. She must act as Peeta’s object of love because both of their lived depend on it. Therefore, rejecting Peeta before the audience is impossible.

This shows that women may take up some roles in order to save their positions in society. The idea of relating women to object of love seems to persist in society, and not likely to end soon.

Life changes for Katniss when she enters the Capitol. She becomes a celebrity and engages in celebrity games. However, this looks like an appearance to her than reality. She must change her traits to meet those of celebrities and public figures, and create a persona out of herself. However, she manages these roles with the help of Cinna, her stylist.

She also learns these new appearances from Haymitch, her coach. She can manipulate the audience of the Hunger Games through the romance act with Peeta. We can notice that Katniss can only achieve her success and win the audience through becoming Peeta’s object of love.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Hunger Games – Character Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This makes Haymitch comments “It’s all a big show. It’s all how you’re perceived. The most I could say about you after your interview was that you were nice enough, although that in itself was small miracle. Now I can say you’re a heartbreaker. Oh, oh, oh, how the boys back home fall longingly at your feet. Which do you think will get you more sponsors?” (Collins 10.24)

Works Cited Collins, Suzanne. The Hunger Games. New York: Scholastic Press, 2008. Print.


Information systems management at IBM and Dell Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction The management of information systems in any organization is indeed an inevitable that cannot be ignored by an organization bearing in mind that the modern business world largely relies on the optimal flow of information as part and parcel of improving production.

It is also worth noting that information plays a key role right from the point of production up to the level of final consumption. While some organizations might find it unnecessary to establish and subsequently manage their information platforms, it goes without saying that such organizations indeed miss out on vast opportunities through which they can expand their operations on a day-to-day basis.

A case study of Dell Inc. and IBM Inc. in terms of information management is indeed typical of dissecting the relevance of thorough management of information systems in organizations. This paper examines Dell Inc. and IBM’s management of information systems to determine how it aids the two companies in managing internal operations, making decisions and gaining a competitive edge.

A brief background of IBM and Dell Inc. IBM has developed into a formidable company that employs information system in conducting both internal and external business operations for many years. Studies reveal that IBM’s historical development began can be traced back to a time when the use of technology in business had not been fully realized. Research indicates that the company was began and set out to operate as a as a

Tabulating Machine Company. Under the leadership of Hollerith Herman towards the close of 19th century (1896), studies reveal that the company’s line of specialisation and products was in the development of punched card data machines.

Its products were widely sold and bought in both local and global markets, a consideration that was driven by massive marketing campaigns and better business strategies. It is imperative to point out that the demand for tabulating machines and application of new technology to make quality and efficient products grew by leaps and bounds thereafter.

The 1896 punched cards gave the impetus for the generation of machines which would later be referred to as IBM. However, in 1911, the business exchanged hands when Charles Flint bought it at slightly over two million dollars. This enabled the original founder of the company to develop Computing Tabulating Recording Corporation (CRT) which was later incorporated on 16th June 1911.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, the multinational American computer technology corporation (Dell Inc) was formed back in 1984 and has over the years developed and grown in its application of technology to develop support and sell quality computer products and computer related services.

Its leadership and management team have ensured effective application of information systems, a consideration that has seen the company attain a competitive edge over others and emerge as o0ne of the largest technological corporations in the world today. Some of its products that have dominated the market include software, data storage devices, servers, computers, network switches, printers, cameras and HDTVs.

Over the years; IBM and Dell have been able to manage effectively their operations and information systems through mergers. According to recent studies, the need and articulation of mergers in Dell and IBM is based on their holistic need to formulate a common unit which guides their operations mainly through assimilation of common objectives.

The management both companies as noted by Rao (2010), sought to establish a highly integrated system where key players were represented in the management. Particularly, these companies formed the major baseline and therefore determined the model that would be followed in running the widely spread system. Besides, the structure was further expanded to smaller holding companies which were equally affiliated to the different mother countries.

Comparison of Dell and IBM’s use of information systems in management

At a time when the business trends are increasingly becoming reliant on the global market dynamism which is driven by an ever-changing consumerism patterns, effective management of information systems remains the most critical aspect that can guarantee a business’ success. Studies indicate that the emergence of the computer system and its subsequent adoption in mainstream business circle is one of the key developments in business.

It is worth noting that the systems that have been developed to aid organizations in meeting their information needs and approaches to development of strategies in the current business environment have developed due to availability of information (Rao, 2010). Information systems are therefore a critical factor in the current business environment whose role in ensuring that the needs of the society are accurately addressed makes it vital to operational success.

Effective management of Information systems has taken a fundamental position in modern business operations. As a matter of fact, it has led to the simplification of tasks and speeding up of business transactions thus leading to sustainable profitability.

We will write a custom Essay on Information systems management at IBM and Dell specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Both Dell and IBM have form many decades used their information systems to mange their internal operations and make key decisions that impact positively on their success. Studies reveal that one of their objectives in managing their information systems is assure their investments in IT to generate business value (IBM 100, 2012).

This has ensured that their information systems provide the required services throughout its life span thus meeting the needs of all users, particularly the critical ones. For instance, Dell has invested huge finances in IT system expecting to reap the benefits associated with it (Dell, 2012). It is worth noting that effective management of its information systems has continued to provide it with numerous operational benefits.

Studies indicate that success of adopting and using an information system in organizations is dependent on a system selection process. The system Dell has selected has been designed in a way that ensures that the organizational objectives are timely met and the system adopted has a long lifespan.

Developments in both computing and internet technologies have mainly been aimed at ensuring greater operational stability, improving the speed of the transactions and ensuring security. Most new technologies apart from adding to functionalities are generally aimed at ensuring greater speeds and dealing with security threats that are faced by previous architecture.

Many are aware of the application of e-commerce systems though few are aware of its internal systems and fewer have mastered the art of efficiency in implementation of e-commerce systems (IBM 100, 2012).

The management of information systems at Dell and IBM in internal operations and decision making have been designed in such a way that they seek to generate value within the businesses. The use of information systems in decision making has led to its being cited as a strategy which can be implemented in three distinct stages; production, processing and reception that are interdependent on each other.

Their communication strategies, appraisal and even promotional strategies have been effectively carried out with the aid of information systems (MBA Knowledge Base, 2012). There is no doubt that the role played by information systems in theses companies in generating value and as a platform for implementing organisational operations cannot be ignored.

The managements at Dell and IBM have ensured that procedures, policies and even standards have been developed with the sole aim of developing a clear approach employed by manufacturers in developing their systems which has played an important role in ensuring the development of more robust systems (IBM 100, 2012). Over the years, their operating system designs, security system designs and even the role played by information have transformed and presented security as one of the key threats that they face in developing an e-commerce presence.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Information systems management at IBM and Dell by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Awareness on the role played by information system in their security is not a recent development in their business segments rather it is one of the key areas that they have guarded jealously over the years. Besides, they have traditionally guarded their strategies against competition and kept their finances in well guarded safe houses and accounts due to awareness on insecurity (Rao, 2010).

One of the major problems that IBM encountered before fully adopting information system in decision making was brought by its increasing consideration to promote high level focus and raise the value outlined in its vision. Even with its organisational structure of five discrete divisions that handled strategy and change in the organisation, the initial dilemma of decision making in all its operations appeared to continuously haunt the company (IBM 100, 2012).

The primary objective was to focus on growth opportunities available for it. However, the steps to follow in achieving this strategy were unclear to the management and the company as a whole. To effectively assimilate a clear outline that would enhance the ability of the company to maintaining a stronger competitive advantage, information systems applications based on growth standards were established with target being set at high profitability (MBA Knowledge Base, 2012).

As studies reveal, living to the same status generated vast pressure to the company and its structures. The outcome of this pressure led to decentralization of information systems in the company. However, at the initial stages, managing the assimilated information system was still problematic to handle the new transformation demands (IBM 100, 2012).

Competitive advantage It is worth noting that management of an organization’s information technology strategy for decision making and managing internal operations is essential in determining how well an organization articulates the main procedures.

It was from this consideration that Information and Communication Technology managers at both IBM and Dell were able to focus on effective strategy that consisted of major concepts like global standardization which was later built on to promote growth and development. The strategy entailed change articulation in all the systems to infer the necessary re-alignments that dictate its overall ability to capture and edge out the correct niche that can give it a competitive advantage over others in the market (Dell, 2012).

The ability to address complex situations was harmonized at the management level and articulated in the most viable option that facilitates higher returns. Clear implementation of information system strategies as exemplified by Dell and IBM must therefore precede all aspects of management that have higher chances of enhancing greater returns.

In IBM, the use of information systems is crucial for decision making on short and long term strategic planning for the corporation so as to realize growth, seize opportunities, strategising change within the organisation as well as maintaining high profile market competition in order for the organisation to remain profitable. Besides, it is also used for communication with the Customer Relationship Management that handles all customer related queries such as general inquiries and complaints.

In Dell, the communication and organization of the Supply Chain department is effectively conducted via the use of information systems. This aid it in the efficient distribution of Dell products and services from manufacturing points to the target market. In addition, it is also used in financial management responsible for all the monetary or financial matters of the corporation (MBA Knowledge Base, 2012).

Organizational consequences of the use of information technology potential security breaches

It is important to note that the challenges that businesses are faced with in operations that are a result of their internal systems and changes within their macro-environment are commonly perceived as threats. The security of a business relying on technology can be looked at from both strategic viewpoints and as component of information systems.

There are multiple threats that Dell and IBM face in implementing their information systems which present a large number of factors that have to be considered in formulation. A research that sought to determine the areas that business lack in developing their strategies points to the lack of awareness on the threats that businesses face in formulating strategies as being central to a number of security breaches that are being recorded in e-systems (Rao, 2010).

Various reasons have been cited as being central to the vulnerabilities that systems and even applications display. Though there have been numerous developments in computing, secure programming techniques are yet to be well developed.

Most applications are developed in a manner that does not place priority on security of the resulting package. The commercialisation of software development effectively implies that software packages are developed in a rush to meet deadlines owing to the high level of competition that is being displayed in software development.

Research have identified highly competitive Dell and IBM e-commerce segments as potential breeding grounds for application that have been developed for the sake of competition and place no emphasis on security of applications which plays a role in determining the level of usability that can be attained by the developments (MBA Knowledge Base, 2012). Some of the security threats that may face


Viruses are computer programs that easily copy and infect a computer without the owner’s knowledge. Due to the fast growth of use of technology, viruses have become a major problem to businesses that rely on computer systems to manage information systems as they adversely affects the hosts’ computers causing massive malfunctioning in them.

Some of the most important viruses that may impact on information systems operations at IBM and Dell include resident viruses like W32-Randex, Dloadr-CMJ, and Elvirus which dwell in the RAM and corrupts the files from there to the programs that are either copied, opened, or renamed in the computer.

Perhaps one of the most important aspects that these companies can resort to limit insecurity is the understanding of how to address the virus threats (MBA Knowledge Base, 2012). Owing to the fast developing technology and globalization that threatens to consume the same world that it operate in, there is need to generate the necessary guarantee that can secure businesses operations systems.

It has been predicted that viruses will continue being a major threat to e-commerce as competitors seek to gather competitive advantages in the market. Stronger technology should therefore be constantly sought to generate the correct traces for the viruses and destroy them before they affect and cause malfunction of the businesses systems (IBM 100, 2012).

Trojan Horses

A Trojan horse is a destructive program that masquerades to majority of the computer programs mostly as benign application. To infect the computers, Trojan Horses claims to get rid of the computer viruses but instead introduces them to the system. Trojan horses occur in seven different forms that are classified based on their breaching and damage that they affect in the system (Rao, 2010). To begin with, Remote Access Trojan usually hides in the smaller programs and wait for activation of the PCs to affect their damages.

Data Sending Trojans provide attackers with very sensitive information such as log file, passwords, Instant Messaging contacts, and Credit card information. In most of the cases, these Trojans seek particular information by installing key loggers and sending the records to the attackers (Dell, 2012). According to Rao (2010) Data Sending Trojans are some of the most dangerous threats to the on-line businesses globally.

In order to affect the smooth functioning of information systems at Dell and IBM, the destructive Trojans will delete files of the attacked computers. Just like the Data Sending Trojans, Destructive Trojans causes great inconveniences and losses to the involved businesses when their respective information on their transactions and accounts are lost (MBA Knowledge Base, 2012). A vivid chance will indeed be given to the attacker by a proxy Trojan. As a result, there are quite a number of transactions that will be effected by this kind of attack.

For instance, an entire business system may be affected by a single wave o Trojan attack. In addition, there are other forms of Trojans that may interfere with any well established security system and as a result, be able to gain access to important and discrete data in an organisation (IBM 100, 2012). In this respect, they stop or kill the programs like antivirus without the user’s knowledge. Finally Denial of Service Trojans attacks a network by flooding it with useless programs that are not authorized by the owner of the computer.

Conclusions To sum up, it is clear that at a time when the business trends are increasingly becoming reliant on the global market dynamism which is driven by ever-changing consumerism patterns, effective management of information systems remains the most critical aspect that can guarantee a business’ success. IBM and Dell are some of the leading companies that have greatly relied on information systems to make important decision and carry out effective internal operations.

Information systems as brought out in the discussion have played a key role in creating a competitive edge for the two companies. However, issues of security and threats related to use of modern technology have presented immense fears on possible attacks which may affect the smooth operations of the businesses.

References Dell (2012). Data Center Systems Management. Web.

IBM 100 (2012). Information Management System. Web.

MBA Knowledge Base (2012). Case Study: Management Information System at Dell. Web.

Rao, L. (2010). IBM Buys Information Management Software Company PSS Systems. Web.


Christianity in the Roman Empire Term Paper best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Early Roman Empire Religion

Early Years of Christianity in the Roman Empire

Dominance of Christianity in Rome

Influence of Christianity on Politics

The Decline of Roman Empire



Introduction There has always been a link between Rome and Christianity since the first Christians were Romans in the sense that they lived in the Roman Empire and had their culture and language heavily influenced by the dominant Roman culture.

However, in its early years, Christianity had negligible political power compared to the Roman Empire. Christians did not share in Roman religious practice because they thought that Romans worshiped idols; a practice prohibited in Christianity. This led to Christians being persecuted in the early years of the religion.

Christianity prevailed politically in the fourth century when it took over the political institutions and laws of the Roman Empire. Henceforth, Christianity and the Roman Empire had an intricate and dynamic relationship which had important consequences for both.

This paper will discuss the role of Christianity in the Roman Empire with specific focus on the influence of Christianity on the politics of the time. The paper will begin by providing a brief history of religion in the Roman Empire and trace the rise of Christianity within the Empire.

Early Roman Empire Religion The Roman Empire enjoyed significant cultural, economic, and military success starting from 200BC to 200AD. The subjects of the Empire enjoyed a high standard of living due to the accumulated wealth and the expansionary success of the Empire.

The Roman Empire incorporated many cultures and embraced a multitude of religions as a result of its expansionist politics. Roman popular religion was “pagan” in that they worshipped multiple gods, enacted rituals and engaged in animal sacrifice. In addition to this, the Roman emperors were to be worshipped as gods by all the subjects of the Empire.

In the early years, Roman authorities endorsed religious diversify and cults or religious organizations were allowed to operate as long as they did not cause public disorder. As a result of the polytheistic religion, Roman paganism was generally tolerant and the gods which individual citizens worshiped was of no particular concern since the god someone else worshiped was not viewed as a threat. Christianity joined the pool of religions that were already present in the Roman Empire.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Early Years of Christianity in the Roman Empire Christianity began as a tiny religious splinter group that grew to become the dominant religion in the entire Roman Empire. Christianity was the religion started by Jesus Christ and to be a Christian simply meant to live by the teachings of Jesus. In the years following the crucifixion of Jesus, Christianity benefited from Roman tolerance for religious diversity.

Willems (1993) notes that because of this tolerance, there was no attempt to completely eliminate Christians in the early years of the religion. In its early years, Christianity was viewed with contempt since it was regarded as a sect which appealed primarily to slaves and women (Rietbergen, 1998).

Initial objection to Christianity was caused by a number of factors. To begin with, Christianity had its origins in the lowest strata and the followers practiced underground making it a secretive religion.

In addition to this, Christians refused to worship Roman deities or even the deified emperors. While the Roman authorities were at first not worried about the Christian sect, they began to persecute individual Christians as enemies of the state due to the tenets of the Christian faith, especially its abhorrence of emperor worship (Rietbergen, 1998).

Because of their loyalty to the one God, Christians refused to make sacrifices to the gods and emperor of the Roman Empire and for this, they were suspected of treason and suffered persecution. The refusal by Christians to take part in religious rituals which were mandated by law was therefore a major factor provoking persecution by Roman authorities.

After AD 250, the religion was made illegal and bloody, large-scale persecution of the followers took place. This persecution did not diminish the popularity of this new religion and instead, Christianity was able to grow considerably even under severe persecution from the government. However, the wide-scale persecution made public worship by Christians impossible and people were unwilling to publicly declare their faith for fear of repercussions.

Even with these difficulties, the religion was able to acquire a significant following. By the end of the first three centuries after the death of Christ, Christianity had developed significant influence and boasted of significant influence in the Roman Empire. This can be attributed to the fact that in the final centuries of the Roman Empire, the state was falling into chaos and people were turning to the teachings of the Christians in search of answers as life became increasingly difficult.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Christianity in the Roman Empire specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Dominance of Christianity in Rome The union between church and state traces its origins to the reign of Emperor Constantine (Willems, 1993). Constantine became a supporter of Christianity owing to the increasing importance that the Christian minority were having in the Empire. Willems (1993) notes that it was in Constantine’s best political interests to gain the support of the church if he hoped to control the Empire.

As previously noted, in the first three centuries AD, Christians were at risk of execution for refusing to worship the gods of the empire. Constantine developed a policy of religions toleration which led to an end to the persecution that Christians had faced in the past centuries. The most important proclamation was what the “decree of Milan which was issued in AD 313 (Rietbergen, 1998).

The “Decree of Milan” was a series of orders addressed to important civil servants all over the Roman Empire which called for an end to Christian prosecution and demanded that the Christians be given the same freedom to practice their religion as other religions. Christianity was recognized as a licensed cult and its followers could now profess their faith without fear of persecution.

Constantine was therefore instrumental in the helping Christianity to become legally equal to other religions. He also actively promoted the adoption of Christianity by many Romans therefore increasing the following of the religion. These actions led the church to hail Constantine as the Champion of the Christian cause.

There is lack of consensus whether Constantine adopted Christianity as a result of political opportunity or out of a personal religious conviction. Regardless of the reason, Constantine’s conversion to Christianity heralded a new dawn for this previously disreputable religion.

Christianity assumed not only a position of favor with the state but it became the chosen instrument for political regeneration (Wolin, 2006). Both Christianity and the Roman Empire stood to benefit from the union between state and religion. For Christianity, having the state actively promoting the faith increased the reach of the religion significantly. For the state, Christianity offered a model that could be exploited for political ends.

Influence of Christianity on Politics Christianity held the moral allegiance of the people and it was therefore an important force in controlling the conduct of the people. Clark (2004) observes that the teachings of the religion called for the abidance with a strict code of moral conduct for all followers. Christianity helped the Roman Empire to create good citizens who were integral to the success of the Empire. The Church articulated the responsibilities of the Christian citizenship.

Another important role that Christianity played is that it encouraged communal bonds. Christians formed communities bound to one another in which people could live in harmony and peace. The political system therefore worked through the church to maintain the morality of the masses. This was important since a disciplined nation was easier to rule compared with an unruly one.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Christianity in the Roman Empire by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Christianity acted as a unifying religion which suited the Roman Empire’s needs. Using this religion, Rome hoped to unite its most dangerous opponents and therefore ensured its continued prosperity. This unification was made possible by the universal appeal of Christianity was also helpful for the Roman Empire which was made up of diverse cultures and people of varying social standings.

Christianity was accommodative to all classes of people and its promise of eternal life and reward was for the rich, poor, aristocrats and slaves alike. Romans philosophers were impressed with Christian monotheism and the adherence to ancient laws by the followers.

Following the unification of church and state under Constantine, a vast number of Romans converted to Christianity. The civil law put in place promoted Christian values and there was a blurring in the distinction between the theological notions of sin and legal consequences of crime (Willems, 1993, p.11).

The Church taught that there existed Good and Evil ant that man could only escape his own inclination towards evil, and therefore injustice and misery by submitting to God. Submission to God required man to follow the teachings and rules of the Church which had been established on earth by Jesus (Rietbergen, 1998). The church and the state were inextricably linked and while the church expected the government to validate its doctrines, the government relied on the church to preach its politics on the pulpit.

Politicians need the backing of a significant portion of the population and Christianity provided the Roman Emperor Constantine with a much needed support-base as well as a platform from which he could reach his subjects. Constantine and the emperors who followed him promoted Christianity and therefore made it a partner in the controlling of the Roman Empire.

The privileges that the state afforded the church led to a vindication of imperial authority. While Christianity had previously been opposed to Roman rule, church leaders and their followers now acknowledged the divine right to rule of the Emperor.

Christian leaders took up some leadership roles in the Empire. The Christian bishops who were in essence supervisors were given a role in the local administration of law. A strong and unified church had tremendous political advantage as long as its loyalty to the Empire was unquestionable. The strong Christian attachment to the empire led to increased loyalty to the Emperor by the Christian subjects.

Wolin (2006) states that to early Christians, there was a major distinction between political and religious order in that the latter alone controlled the practices of redemption. Therefore, while the government provided peace and order and an environment which fostered prosperity, it did not advance the salvation of the believers.

This changed as the church gained more political power and therefore demonstrated that the power could promote the divine mission of the Church. An important development is that there was an equating of Roman law with God’s law. The state could in effect define church doctrine and people were obliged to follow it.

The Roman Empire was renowned for their military adventures which were characterized by repression and domination over conquered territories. Augustine (1631) defended the use of power through Christianity. He argued that unity was a desirable quality of society since it contributed to an environment of peace which made a Christian life possible.

Augustine endorsed the use of righteous persecution since according to him; power and love were not mutually inconsistent. Such a stance was supported by the Romans since they could make exercise great cruelty and punishment so long as it was motivated by a spirit of charity.

Christianity served to reinforce imperial authority since it treated the empire as an instrument of divine policy. It helped to strengthen political authority and hence increase the hold of the Roman Empire over its subjects. This is because the religion taught that the existing political order was from God and that it was for the good of the Christians.

This idea was especially emphasized by the apostle Paul who stated that Christians should be subject to the governing authorities. Wolin (2006) states that the Apostle Paul put up a strong case for political obedience by stating that “the powers that be are ordained of God… whosoever therefore resisteth the power, resisteth the ordinance of God” (p.89). Christians acknowledged the Roman state as the bearer of order in the world.

Those powers appointed in human society had the divine right to exercise authority over the lesser and to command their obedience. Augustine (1631) argued that the creation of the Roman monarch and of the advent of the pax Romana was not an act of man but rather willed by God. This notion that the Roman empire was founded by God and invested by him with a redemptive purpose for all humanity led to great allegiance being paid to the Roman Empire.

Christianity helped to develop a political consciousness that was mostly advantageous to the Roman Empire authority. This consciousness was emphasized by Augustine (1631) who viewed the Roman Empire authority as the vehicle for human fulfillment. If the Roman Empire could facilitate the Christian life, then politics was to be seen as a central aspect of Christian life.

The Roman Empire had a mission to unite the whole human race under one from of authority and since this assist in converting the world to Christ, the Empire had Christian sanction. Augustine declared that those in authority have the power to command their subjects to do things which might be contrary to customs or constitutions. He states that it is lawful for a king in the city he reigns over to command that which never any prince before him has (p.129).

Christianity assisted the Roman Empire to continue with its expansionist ambitions. Once it had become the state religion in Rome, Christianity created the conditions for a fanatical use of political and military force to obtain uniformity in the realm and to resolve conflicts by force.

Augustine of Hippo elaborated a theory of Just War which was an effort to control, tame, and use violence constructively (Coward


Ghazali on the Principles of Islamic Spirituality Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Response These readings provide information that is very useful to the Muslim faith. One of such topics is the one on exaltation of hunger. I found this topic particularly useful. According to Ghazali, hunger can be a path to the afterlife. This is because hunger has several benefits. Among the listed benefits is the fact that it helps a follower achieve purity of heart. This part is very useful because I finally got to have an in-depth understanding of the connection between hunger and spirituality.

For example, Ghazali writes that through hunger one can be able to punish his ego. When an ego is punished, it in turn becomes humbled. A humbled ego has the ability to be obedient. In another part, Ghazali gives an example of how hunger can lead one to prayer. He says that when one is hungry it is possible for him to wake up and pray. Moreover, through hunger one can be able to show contentment with just a few worldly belongings.

Another interesting part of these readings is the one that addresses the evils of speech. This part starts by quipping that what all the limbs do is connected to the heart and especially the tongue. It goes on to quote a reading that if one can be able to control his tongue; he is guaranteed to make it to heaven.

All these readings indicate the magnitude of the evils of speech. Given that everyone sins with his tongue occasionally, then this part of Ghazali’s readings may be of help to many. Some people have no control of their speech whatsoever. If you do not happen to be one of them, then you definitely know one.

According to these readings, there are twenty evils of the tongue. This is probably why it is so hard to escape evils of the tongue. Ghazali lists lying as the first of these evils something that is easy to agree with. Nevertheless, what I found most interesting is the scenarios in which lying is permitted. According to these readings, one can lie to mend a relationship, when in a war, and when talking with his wife. The last scenario is likely to elicit some controversy.

The part of the readings detailing the fourth evil was however unclear to me. According to this part, a little joking is permitted. This notion may sound possible in theory, but in practice, it might be impossible. This is because when a funny joke is offered, it is natural to want more. In addition, the fact that joking is only recommended for women and children, raises some questions.

The motives for seeking prestige as described in these readings fail to make much sense to me. First, perfectionism is related to prestige. Prestige and perfection are parallel notions that do not seem to be related. This is because someone seeking perfection would most likely shun prestige. This person would be able to know that prestige only leads to destruction.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When Ghazali wrote these readings, he must have been on a very high spiritual level. This is because some of the things he addresses seem out of reach for people whose spiritual level is at its infancy. Many people may find Ghazali’s claims preposterous especially if they are not ready to embrace the highest form of spirituality. This is why for anyone willing to try; I would recommend a systematic adherence to these claims.


There Is No Word for Goodbye Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents TallMountain Reveals Her True Self

Tragedies in TallMountain’s Life

The Poem Is Prophetical


Works Cited

TallMountain Reveals Her True Self Mary TallMountain remains one of the most remarkable poets and writers of the twentieth century. This Athabascan woman inspired many people to listen to their heart (Welford, “Mary TallMountain’s Writing” 136). Some say that this woman’s works have opened up a new world of her culture to the world of Whites. Some claim that she rediscovered her native land for herself. However, the poet herself once said:

Then I went to Alaska and found my people. This poem has nothing to do with what I found out about them; it is more what I found out about myself. (Bruchac III 13)

It is clear that the woman rediscovered her true self and revealed her self in her poems and stories. The reader can feel her sorrows and her joys. The woman lived an extraordinary life which resulted in numerous brilliant works. It is essential to state that any of her works is unique and beautiful.

Each of her works reveals some facet of her individuality or some part of her biography. However, there is one poem which stands out. “There Is No Word for Goodbye” can be regarded as a specific title to her entire life. This poem is a symbol of eternity and eternal life. To understand the real meaning of the poem, it is essential to take a closer look at the writer’s life.

Tragedies in TallMountain’s Life Mary TallMountain lost her mother when she was only six (Welford 61). Her mother was terminally ill with tuberculosis. Her two brothers were sick also. The horrible disease took away the dearest people in Mary’s life. The doctor who tried to help her mother took the orphan away from her village.

In her interview with Bill Moyers, TallMountain recalled details of her departure. She noted that it was not that easy for the doctor to take her away from her people as Athabasca’s were reluctant to “give up” their people (Moyers). TallMountain stressed that even though she was a girl, it was challenging to adopt her. She added that the doctor would have never taken her if she had been a boy.

During the interview, TallMountain also tried to reveal her feelings at that time. Of course, she was a little girl, and she could not decide what she wanted. It was difficult for her to leave as she left her homeland for life. On the other hand, she admitted that she was also happy to learn something new and open up a brand new world for her (Moyers).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is important to note that it was not much of her decision, which still influenced her life greatly. At the very beginning of his film, Bill Moyers claims that people hear the voices of their ancestors. The journalist states that these voices often help to make the right decisions and never give up no matter what (Moyers).

Allen also focuses on the importance of heritage (13). The author points out that each should take into account his/her traditions as they give strength and determination (Allen 14). TallMountain felt what researchers analyzed in their works. Mary TallMountain lost her guardians, and she found herself all alone in the new world which she had to understand. TallMountain could feel the emptiness inside her. Of course, she could fill the emptiness regaining her heritage.

When she traveled to her village, she could feel safe at last. She tried to help her people, and she wanted to learn everything about her homeland. This was the time when she devoted her life to literature. She wrote various poems and short stories which revealed her emotions, her ideas, her beliefs, and her longings.

TallMountain had a lot to say to people. She wanted to share her heritage. In 1994 Mary TallMountain passed away. However, her works live the life of their own. Her works made the devoted Athabascan woman immortal. This idea of immortality is revealed in one of her most famous poems “There Is No Word for Goodbye.” This poem is very symbolic as it can be a metaphorical illustration of TallMountain’s life.

The Poem Is Prophetical Admittedly, there have been various works on Mary TallMounttain’s life. However, no biography can be as good and as precise as her famous poem “There Is No Word for Goodbye.” In the first place, the poem reveals the source of the poet’s ‘illumination,’ i.e., her heritage. The poet addresses her sokoya (aunt):

Sokoya, I said, looking through

the net of wrinkles into

We will write a custom Research Paper on There Is No Word for Goodbye specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More wise black pools

of her eyes. (TallMountain n.p.)

The poet understands that one of her people could give the right answer. “[W]ise black pools / of her eyes” should be regarded as a metaphor referring to Athabasca’s heritage. TallMountain understands that only an old Athabascan woman can help her to find the right path.

Apart from the source of illumination, the poem reveals one more valuable idea. TallMountain does not merely depict the beliefs of her people. She also makes it clear that she accepts this outlook. TallMountain accepts this outstanding and straightforward philosophy:

We always think you’re coming back,

but if you don’t,

we’ll see you some place else.

You understand.

Not sure if you can write a paper on There Is No Word for Goodbye by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There is no word for goodbye. (TallMountain n.p.)

TallMountain’s entire life is a kind of manifestation of this philosophy. She did not have to use the words (to say goodbye) when she was leaving her homeland as she came back. She did not have to use the words when she left people who lived there as she came back to see them again. She did not have to say goodbye to her closest people as they must have met in some other place.

Likewise, it is impossible to say goodbye to TallMountain and her works. Again her poem explains why it is impossible to do that:

She looked at me close.

We just say, Tlaa. That means,

See you.

We never leave each other.

When does your mouth

say goodbye to your heart?

TallMountain speaks to people’s heart. It is impossible to forget words which help people to live.

Conclusion On balance, it is necessary to state that Mary TallMountain lived a complicated life full of losses. However, she managed to find the source of her inspiration and strength. Her heritage helped her to create numerous brilliant works which have spoken to people’s hearts and have helped people to keep on living no matter what.

Mary TallMountain was one of those inspiring people who managed to reveal the truth. She articulated one of the most important ideas: people should resort to their heritage whenever they are lost. This motto is revealed in one of her most famous poems “There Is No Word for Goodbye.” This was her motto for life.

Works Cited Allen, Paula. The Sacred Hoop: Recovering the Feminine in American Indian Traditions. Boston: Beacon Press, 1992. Print.

Bruchac III, Joseph W. “We Are the Inbetweens: An Interview with Mary Tallmountain.” Studies in American Indian Literatures 1.1 (1989): 13-21. Print.

Moyers, Bill, dir. Ancestral Voices: The Power of the Word. Public Affairs Television, 1989. Videocassette.

TallMountain, Mary. There Is No Word for Goodbye. Gavilan College, 2010. Web.

Welford, Gabrielle. “Reflections on Mary TallMountain’s Life and Writing: Facing Mirrors.” Studies in American Indian Literatures 9.2 (1997): 61-68. Print.

—. “Mary TallMountain’s Writing: Healing the Heart – Going Home.” ARIEL: A Review of International English Literature 25.1 (1994): 136-154. Print.


Francis Scott Fitzgerald college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Early Life

Literary Career

Critical Review

Later in Life

Analysis of the Themes

Fitzgerald’s Lifestyle: My Impression

Works Cited

Introduction Francis Scott Fitzgerald is a renowned American writer of the Jazz Age. He wrote about the disconcerting time in which he lived, where people were either rich or dreamt of wealth. Just like the majority of Americans, Fitzgerald could not resist the urge of wealth accumulation; unfortunately, this quest brought misery and devastation.

Fitzgerald’s life is an example of both sides of the American Dream: the joys of young love, wealth and success, and the tragedies associated with success and failure. His prodigious literary voice and style provide remarkable insight into the lifestyles of the rich and famous, as well as himself.

Early Life Francis Scott Key Fitzgerald was born in “St. Paul, Minnesota, the U.S. on 24 September 1896 (Edward 5). His father, Edward, was a nobleman from Maryland. Francis’ mother, Mary McQuillan, came from a wealthy background. Fitzgerald first attended St. Paul Academy, in 1908-1910, before joining the Newman School, a Catholic preparatory school in New Jersey, in 1911-1913.

His dreams of fame came close to reality later in 1917 at Princeton University, where he became a member of the prominent Princeton Triangle Drama Club. Fitzgerald made a significant contribution to the club, by writing scripts and lyrics for the club’s music, and contributed to The Princeton Tiger Humor Magazine and the Nassau Literary Magazine(Broom 65).

Fitzgerald struggled with his academics and finally dropped out of the college of Princeton and joined the army in November 1917, where he was commissioned as a second lieutenant in the junior team. Fitzgerald “fell in love with Zelda Sayre, the youngest daughter of an Alabama Supreme Court Judge while in Camp Sheridan, near Montgomery, where he had been assigned, in June 1918” (Curnutt 96). He had grand hopes of marrying Zelda Sayre, who was eighteen years old then, in a few years (Bryer and Barks 36). After discharge from the army, in 1919, he involved himself in advertisement work, in New York, to in a bid to get money for marriage.

More about This Topic In Chapter 7, Why Does Gatsby Stop Giving Parties? 5 104 What Does Nick Mean by the Last Line of The Great Gatsby? 5 34 “So We Beat On, Boats Against the Current…” Explain the Quote 5 906 What Does The Great Gatsby’s Ending Mean? 5 82 In July 1919, Fitzgerald quit from advertisement work and engaged in writing the novel “This Side of Paradise,” which made Zelda famous almost overnight on 26 March 1920 as one of the characters in his publication (Donaldson 56). They had a reunion and had a marriage a week later in New York, where they got on as young celebrities with expensive living.

His wife Zelda became pregnant during his summertime in Westport, where he was writing his second novel, and they had the first trip to Europe in 1921 before settling in St. Paul for the birth of their only child, Frances Scott, in October 1921 (Prigozy 96).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Literary Career The literary works of Fitzgerald include the novel “This Side of Paradise” that he begun in Princeton. He wrote the book after breaking with fiancée Zelda Sayre and returning to St. Paul, Minnesota. The inspiration for writing this novel was to highlight both sides of youth in the U.S., morality, and immorality.

The novel was published in 1920, which made him famous. Within no time, Fitzgerald could make publication in prominent literary magazines like Scribner and other high paying popular publications, which included The Saturday Evening Post.

“The Beautiful and Damned” was his second novel, which he wrote in New York City, where he had rented an apartment after riotous summer in Westport, Connecticut. The book gives a picture of the immoderation of the Eastern Elite, during the Jazz age, through the characters Anthony and Gloria Patch, who end up to carefree life, as they wait for the young man to inherit wealth. The novel, a collection of short stories, “Tales of Jazz Age” in 1922, sold remarkably well, and Fitzgerald rented a house on Long Island.

Fitzgerald went to Europe for over two years, where he made publication “The Great Gatsby” in 1925 and began companionship with Ernest Hemingway of Scott. His first movie assignment was in 1927 in Hollywood and afterward went abroad several times. “Tender Is the Night” was his other novel based on his wife, Zelda, who had a main nervous breakdown in 1930 and her treatment in a Swiss Clinic. It describes his futile fight to save their marriage.

The novel describes his failure to marriage through the description of a psychiatrist, who gets used up after marrying one of his patients and exerting his vitality on her. “Tender is the Night” expresses Fitzgerald’s downright hopelessness and struggle caused by depression and Zelda’s sickness.

Critical Review His fellow authors Ring Lardner and Ernest Hemingway, were critics of his first novel, “This Side of Paradise,” who appreciated his work (Eble 84). The book brings out the theme of romantic egoism, which he uses to enlighten his fellow America’s youths. The understanding of this novel, though outdated in the current generation, is that money should not be the only factor to determine love.

In the novel “Tender is the Night,” Fitzgerald describes the society in Riviera where he and his family had moved to live after his misfortune of late inheritance. They had joined a group of wealthy American expatriates whose life was profoundly influenced by Gerald and Sarah Murphy.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Francis Scott Fitzgerald


Modernization Theory Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Since the 18th Century, people have had the idea that they can develop and change their societies for the better. Arguably, the topics of growth, development and modernization are inseparable in the modern world. Three key aspects of development exist, namely the economic, sociological and psychological perspectives.

It is the aim of each and every country to achieve a higher state of development, since this represents better living standards and welfare of its citizens. This paper explores the topic of modernization, critically analyzing its basic argument, its features and characteristics, and discussing the contribution of Walt Rostow in the form of his five stages of economic development.

The modernization theory explains the process through which modernization occurs in societies. Its origin can be traced back to the 18th century, to the development of the basic principles of the Idea of Progress. This period came to be referred to as the “Age of Enlightenment”, signifying the period when people brought up with the idea that they could change their societies.

The fundamental line of reasoning of the modernization theory is that societies change from traditional to a modern form. A number of factors are associated with this change, including technology, economic growth and development, education, religion and culture. According to Marquis de Condorcet, economic development and advancement in technology can lead to change in cultural value, consequently leading to social progress (Perry et al. 194).

This became evident since as societies adopted the idea of modernization, further radical changes in the social structure came into existence, bringing about the social evolution. This was characterized by division of labor in the society, industrialization, globalization and capitalism. According to this theory, development is the process through which societies achieve modernization.

According to the modernization theory, traditional societies can achieve the same status as the developed societies using the same criteria as the latter, provided the former gets the necessary assistance. The modern society refers to the U.S.A and Western Europe countries. All other countries aiming to achieve the status of a modern society must imitate these developed countries.

Modernization theory exhibits several characteristics. Top on this list is the proposition that development leads to modernization. This theory suggests that a country can only achieve modernization if it experiences significant levels of development in three key areas: economically, sociologically and psychologically. The psychological aspect is a significant element of development, since psychological intentions form the driving force of economic growth (McClelland et al. 5).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Focusing on the economic aspect, one of the most significant contributors to this theory is Walt W. Rostow. For instance, he put forward a non-communist manifesto identifying five stages of economic development (Stages of Economic Growth 4). According to Rostow, development can only be achieved through capitalism and industrialization (Process of Economic Growth 6). This theory is discussed in details later in this paper.

Another significant proposition by the modernization theory is that development is a linear and irreversible process. The process of transformation of a society from the traditional to the modern state through the Rostow’s stages of economic development is as a result of influence of both internal dynamics and external forces.

This theory also takes economic growth both as a means to achieving economic development and a result of economic development. According to Todaro, there can be economic growth without development, yet there cannot be economic development without economic growth (22).

Apart from economic growth, economic development also encompasses elements such as increase in national income, betterment of living standards of the citizens, higher life expectancy, lower child mortality rates, better health care and improved education systems.

Several methods of measuring economic development exist, including determination of increase in Gross National Product (GNP) and GNP per capita; improvement in welfare of citizens of a country and through the use of social indicators. However, the most accurate and commonly used method is through measurement of increase in GNP per capita (World Economy 8).

Traditional and modern societies exhibit totally contrasting characteristics, according to the modernization theory (Torado and Smith 203). Traditional societies are based on socialism while the modern societies exhibit capitalism. While the economies of traditional societies depend on agriculture as the main source of income, modern societies’ economies are based on industrialization.

Production at the level of traditional societies is for subsistence only while modern societies exhibit surplus production. Modern societies extract their labor from formal labor markets. Such markets are non-existent in traditional societies, and the source of labor is families and clans. While modern societies apply advanced levels of technology in production processes, traditional societies apply primitive technology, which raises the production cost and often results in low productivity.

We will write a custom Essay on Modernization Theory specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Other characteristics include an underdeveloped, rural, religion based society exhibiting collective social relations and a culture based on traditions for the traditional societies; as opposed to a developed, urban, rational, secular society exhibiting individuality and which is based on rules and laws; as in the case of modern societies.

The economic aspect of modernization follows the Rostow’s stages of economic growth. Walt Rostow identified five stages of economic development, namely the Traditional Society, Preconditions for Take Off, Take Off, Drive to Maturity and High Mass Consumption.

During the stage of the Traditional Society, the economy is dominated by subsistence production. All the output is consumed by the producers, implying that no surplus is left for sale. Such societies exercise barter trade, where there is direct exchange of goods for other goods.

This form of trade depends on a double coincidence of wants between the seller and the buyer. Production in traditional societies is labor intensive and utilizes only limited amount of capital. Further, such societies utilize traditional methods of production, since modern production methods and technology are either inaccessible or unavailable. The political organization of the traditional societies is not centralized, while the social organization is hierarchical and based on inheritance.

The Preconditions for Take-off can be referred to as a transitional stage, in which an economy exits from the traditional society. During this stage, there is the rise of new ideas that are favorable to economic progress. These include better education systems and entrepreneurship.

There is the emergence of new and better capital mobilization institutions. There is a dramatic increase production; resulting from investment in infrastructure and specialization in production. This leads to surplus production, which can be used for trading.

Improvement in the infrastructure also facilitates trade and administration in the society. Take note that although there is the emergence of a new industrial sector, traditional social structures remain in place. This results in what is known as a “dual society”. Another significant change that takes place during this stage is the change in the political structure. This involves change to nationalism, characterized by the formation of a centralized national government and administrative power.

The Take-off is the most essential and the hardest stage to achieve, according to Rostow (Stages of Economic Growth 299). It involves sustainable growth of industries and a significant rise in investment.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Modernization Theory by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Technically, this stage requires a revolutionary advancement in agricultural production. In order to achieve take-off, three conditions must be met: First, the rate of investment must increase to between 10% and 12.5% of the national income. Secondly, there must be emergence and high growth rate of at least one (preferably more than one) leading manufacturing sector(s).

Such a sector employs the latest advancements in technology and stimulates supplementary growth sectors and derived growth sectors. This leads to an overall growth in the economy (299). The third condition requires the existence of a social, political and institutional framework that can adequately support the leading sector and allow the benefits of the economic expansion to spread throughout the economy.

Drive to Maturity is the stage occurring about two decades since the beginning of the take-off stage. The former is characterized by slowing down of growth of leading sector(s), hence other sectors become more prominent.

At this level, modern production techniques are not limited to the leading sectors as in the case of take-off – they now exist in most sectors in the economy (World Economy 2). Production at this level aims at maintaining competitiveness in the international market, not just for social necessity. The factor facilitating the development at this stage is the emergence of mass education.

Age of high mass consumption refers to the stage when per capita income exceeds the cost of basic needs. There is the accumulation of significant economic surplus. Consequently, consumers have sufficient disposable income.

Economies at this level may choose to extend their social overhead capital and social-welfare policies, strive for world power by building up military power and colonization; investing overseas, including exportation of capital and expertise; or gear the economy towards given consumption patterns.

This stage is characterized by a shift of the leading sectors towards housing and durable consumer goods; in addition to education, health and recreation services in the economy. Note that the first three stages seek to prolong the drive to maturity while the last option will result into the entrance into the age of high mass consumption.

Through his theory of economic development, Rostow brought out the point that development requires substantive investment in capital. This concept can be applied in enforcing development in less developed countries (LCDs) as follows: Foreign direct investment and aid can only be of help in inducing development if it is given to the LCD in its take-off stage, meaning that the economy has already reached the preconditions for take-off stage.

His theory also proposes injections in the form of capital, foreign investment and aid as the means to fill the financing gap facing LCDs, hence attain development.

A number of weaknesses have been identified with the Rostow’s theory of economic development. For instance, this theory is based on observations of American and European societies. Assuming that third world countries have to follow the same path towards modernization may be incorrect, since they face different environments.

They may, therefore, have to follow different paths towards their economic development In addition, Rostow’s theory assumes that growth occurs automatically by the time an economy reaches its maturity stage. This was disputed by Kuznets, who denoted that all levels of growth require external forces (Todaro 431). There is also an overlap between the preconditions for take-off and the take-off stages of the Rostow’s Model (431).

Works Cited McClelland, David, et al. The Achievement Motive. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, Inc., 1953. Print.

Perry, Marvin, et al. Sources of the Western Tradition: From the Ancient Times to Enlightenment. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2002. Print.

Rostow, Walt. The Process of Economic Growth. 2nd ed. London: Oxford University Press. 1960a. Print.

Rostow, Walt. The Stages of Economic Growth: A Non-Communist Manifesto. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 1960b. Print.

Rostow, Walt. The World Economy: History and Prospect. London: Macmillan. 1978. Print.

Todaro, Michael, and Stephen Smith. Economic Development. 6th. Ed. London: Macmillan. 2009. Print.


Tuition Reimbursement Essay a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction Tuition reimbursement refers to an arrangement between an employer and an employee that outlines and specifies terms that allow an employer to pay for the employee’s advanced education (Martocchio, 2003, p.23). A tuition reimbursement plan provides suitable employees with an opportunity to improve their capabilities associated with their career.

They do this through participating in certain courses offered at accredited institutions of study and organizations specializing in career related training (Martocchio, 2003, p.25). It is very important for employees to understand the company’s policy on such programs. Reimbursement tuition may cover certain courses and exclude others. An employee is required to take a course that is included in the company’s tuition reimbursement program.

Discussion Tuition reimbursement helps companies build a stronger workforce (Willis, 2010, par1). However, the common benefit of an employee tuition reimbursement program is controversial in that some human resource gurus say it is a waste of money or mismanagement at its best.

The common complaint is that employees do not learn anything related to their current jobs and at worst the employer pays for a staff member’s degree in an unrelated field, only for them to lose the employee to a different company (Willis, 2010, par2). Tuition reimbursement is one of the best and competitively priced retention tools for a business for a number of reasons.

The business should structure the plan appropriately by ensuring that it only gives opportunities that comprise of courses associated with jobs offered by the business. This will guarantee a certain level of benefits to the business through the application of employees’ newly acquired knowledge. Through improved skills and newly acquired knowledge by employees, the workforce strength will be enhanced, thus increasing the overall output of the business (Willis, 2010, par4).

A degree in business and communication will improve the employee’s motivation to work and improve interaction with clients, which will enhance the image and integrity of the business (Willis, 2010, par7). It is important for a business to consider its employees as valued resources whose capabilities are worth improving regardless of the career course they choose to study.

The business should take responsibility and encourage employees to fund their study courses because it is a personal initiative to improve one’s career through advancing one’s current education level. This is because benefit is more likely to be a motivator and loyalty builder, which will boost the business reputation as a good place to work (Willis, 2010, par8).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A tuition reimbursement program helps in attracting younger employees (Smith, 2004, par2). The advantage of this program especially for small and midsized businesses is in attracting younger employees, since they know the benefits of joining such a business organization.

This helps in incorporating new ideas and more vibrant workforce into the business that is important in meeting business goals (Smith, 2004, par2). It is inevitable, regardless of the degree an employee will pursue, that the knowledge on a multitude of things will increase. This makes the employee more marketable for advancement with the current employer and a better employee (Smith, 2004, par4).

A tuition reimbursement program ensures favourable relations with employees (Smith, 2004, par6). Employers and managers in a business are supportive of employees trying to better themselves in terms of career advancement through advanced learning.

The presence of such employees and their commitment to attending college classes, serve as motivation to the employer to consider the employee for possible advancement opportunities. They do this because they consider the employee’s initiative to advance education as a positive step in personal growth and an opportunity for the overall growth of the company.

A tuition reimbursement program for a Bachelor in Business and Communication will make employees highly competitive (Willis, 2010, par5). Career options for such graduates include public relations and human resource officers, business and marketing managers, government administrator, media and marketing officer, promotions officers, advertisers, management consultants, information systems specialists (Willis, 2010, par5).

This degree program focuses on management. At some point in an employee’s working life, management may be included as part of a job’s responsibilities.

A Bachelor in Business and Communication degree combines various aspects of business management and communication. Employees learn the interaction between market forces within external and internal business communities (Martocchio, 2003, p.49).

We will write a custom Essay on Tuition Reimbursement specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They expand their skills in leadership and management, problem solving, public relations and critical thinking. Employees in a master’s class learn to think critically and creatively about problems facing a free market economy. They explore effective and ethical management concepts and learn the complexity of changes in an organization.

Professions for employees with a bachelor in communication include journalism, public relations, marketing and advertising. For example, after pursuing a business degree, a Human Resource assistant can become a systems manager, a teacher can become a school administrator, a mechanic can become the workshop supervisor and a marketing assistant can become a marketing director (Martocchio, 2003, p.43).

Business degrees mainly include courses in commerce, business finance, information technology, entrepreneurship and marketing. The main advantage of pursuing this degree is the attainment of knowledge and skills that are necessary in any field in the different sectors. Precisely, it diversifies opportunities available to employees who have taken that degree course. These skills include leadership, communication skills, report writing, teamwork, problem solving, data analysis and time management.

Another reason why this degree is important is that it offers many opportunities and most important, it provides an employee with a chance for promotion in the work place and advancement of career. In addition to advancement of career and promotion in the work place, employees who undertake the course earn higher salaries compared with those who fail to pursue the degree.

According to the bureau of labour statistics, those with an economics or business degree entered the workforce in 2007 with an average starting salary of $47,782 (Willis, 2010, par6). After a given period, employees with degrees in business related fields earned more than the average salary of other degree majors. Those with an associate’s degree made, on average, $7,228 more per year than those with just a high school diploma (Willis, 2010, par6).

Those with a bachelor’s degree made, on average, $20,488 more per year, while those with a master’s degree made on average $31,980 per year than those with a high school diploma (Willis, 2010, par6). According to recent studies, seven out of the top 25 highest paying jobs of 2008, required masters degree in business administration or a related business degree. In addition, management and consulting services were recently ranked as the fastest growing industry. This is attributed to the fact that both require a professional business degree.

Conclusion When making a decision on whether to pursue a business degree or not, it is important to consider certain factors. First, consideration of personal career goals is important and secondly, the goals and objectives of the organization should be in line with personal career goals. A business and communication degree does not guarantee an employee rise to a chief executive officer position, but it does offer a flexible way of enhancing education, updating job skills, and an opportunity for a more fulfilling position (Willis, 2010, par3).

Therefore, it is important for businesses to develop tuition reimbursement programs for employees to increase output, improve their credibility, strengthen their workforce and increase loyalty from staff members. In addition, it is important for employees to take up reimbursement opportunities in order to enhance their skills, improve their market worth and foster motivation in the work place.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Tuition Reimbursement by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Martocchio, J. (2003). Employee Benefits: A Primer for Human Resource Professionals. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Smith, M. (2004). Does Tuition Reimbursement Benefit Employers? Web.

Willis, M. (2010). Tuition Reimbursement Helps Companies Build a Stronger Workforce. Retrieved from


Motif-Based Literary Analysis Of “Check One” Essay best college essay help

The changes in the world and society brought the changes in every area of the public’s life and its art, culture, and spiritual life. Thus, today the American poetry develops according to the contemporary tendencies, and a poem’s performance becomes the part of the vivid action basing on a number of controversial aspects discussed in the definite piece of poetry.

The ‘Slam’ as a kind of poetry performance contributes to the realization of the poets’ motifs and intentions in the spoken word and to the satisfaction of the audience’s desire for provocations and controversies. Regie Cabico is a pioneer of the ‘Slam’ movement and one of the most successful its participants whose voice is not only heard by the public but also appreciated. Speaking about his origin, Cabico states that “I am the product of Filipino immigrants.

I straddled African-American


The theme of Performity Essay best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction Performity involves both performance and performativity. Performance is the manner of carrying out an activity or a piece of work. On the other hand, performativity is the process by which individuals construct their identity or position by expressing themselves actively. Erving Goffman was among the first thinkers in utilizing his dramatizing principles about the social.

He considers how individuals present themselves and their activities to others the way they guide and control the impression formed about them. These things they may or may not do while performing an act before others. He stipulates that two types of expressions are conscious and unconscious ones (Bell, 1999).

Discussion According to him this is performance. To describe performance, he for example; talks of interaction and the self. Judith Butler is one of the other sociologists who extended this interest in the development of the theme of performativity. She was a post-feminist who gave an influential analysis of sex, gender, sexuality and the body.

This was a major contribution to feminist gender theory and is regarded as providing a finding contribution to queer theory. Her approach involves the analysis of performative production of sexed identity on the processes through which gender and sex are portrayed as natural extensions of a body rather than, taking the biology of the body as a starting point (Duttlinger, Ruprecht,


Social, political and economic history of the United U.S from 1981 to the present Essay essay help

The history of the United States of America since 1981 has been greatly affected by oil resources. As a matter of fact, oil has largely shaped the socio-economic and political history of the U.S since the 1980s. In addition, it is worth noting that oil has been the center of focus bearing in mind that it is the major source of energy that the country relies on. In addition, the United States of America has been a dependant importer of oil throughout her economic history (Baker 12).

It is against this backdrop that the United States often undergoes tense economic and political moments when the oil prices fluctuate in the world market. For instance, consumers always feel the burden of high oil prices both economically and socially since they have to shoulder the extra burden of increased taxation. On the same note, the political arena was also affected as a result of high prices in oil products.

The nation relied heavily on building political leadership so that it could be in a vantage position to control oil resources. It is against this background that this paper discusses how oil played a role in shaping the American history in three main areas of life namely politically, socially and economically.

To begin with, it is important to explore the economic impact of oil in the history of United States of America. Monetary spending on importation of oil has indeed acted against the United States economy since there is a lot is spent on the importation of crude oil compared to the value received on exports although the latter is still impressively high. The U.S. financial system has become significantly reliant on foreign oil.

It is interesting to note that most of the oil resources used in the country is imported (Baker 42). In addition, transport department had used a great percentage of oil than any other department. Transport has consumed more because many of the citizens have vehicles that guzzle a lot of fuel. The nation has spent most of its finances on importing oil and this has affected the cost of life for the American public.

Since 1981, the U.S history has experienced lasting price deflation through high oil price. High oil price has worked against economic development of United States. This phenomenon has also affected the price of basic commodities in the market and consequently hindered economic expansion. From the same period of time, price instability has of basic consumer goods has more than doubled bearing in mind that any slight change in the price of oil has a direct effect on the production of other goods and services.

Price shocks slow down the rate of development and decreases the level of productivity. Low rate of growth coupled with weak level of production have been on the forefront towards aggravating recession. Consequently, this has led to the rise in price level of consumer goods and other important services offered by the government.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Iranian revolt in 1979 was behind this worldwide recession. Later, Iraqi invaded Kuwait in 1990 and America’s economy was affected negatively by another recession. It is apparent that high price of oil was the result of the same economic decline during the same period of time (Baker 57). The recession that occurred in 2001 was to a certain extent caused by the sharp rise of oil price. That was after California suffered energy crisis and socio-economic pressures emanating from the Middle East.

The price of oil also rose quite highly between 2003- 2008 largely due to market fears. For instance, it is worth noting that the Middle East region was under war while Iran was fast on track with its nuclear threats. As a result, the supply of oil was equally put under threat leading to unstable supply of the commodity in the United States. The oil prices were pushed up as a result of this fight for looming oil shortage.

In yet another encounter, the economy of the nation was affected and living standard of many Americans was distressed (Baker 68). The fear of oil shortage was also coupled with high rate of unemployment as well as lower wages which led to poor living standards. Oil had its social role in American history. A good example was when two key engines of the local boom became unsuccessful in 1980s.

The failure brought a bust in oil market. What happened later were compound social problems related to lasting decline in job opportunities at New Orleans port. The latter was one of the metropolitan regions that were left in a state of depression. Worse still, the American citizens were affected socially since they could not find jobs during the same period of time. The overall result of the depressive economic times was the poor standards of living.

Another social role played by oil was contributed by the fact that the Americans has accustomed their way of life purely on oil consumption from domestic to industrial applications. Whenever shortage of oil was reported, their social life was equally changed negatively.

This means that throughout history, America has found it cumbersome to do without depending on foreign oil. Their expensive lifestyles heavily rely on oil resources that are also scarce at the same time. Their history proved that despite trying to look for other sources of energy, they were not able to survive without importing oil from other countries.

Oil has also affected the political history of America. The Americans have always yearned to vote political leaders who would come up with favorable government policies concerning oil. Since 1989, it was the government policy to minimize over dependence on foreign oil. The political leadership including the presidency introduced political policies towards oil importation.

We will write a custom Essay on Social, political and economic history of the United U.S from 1981 to the present specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the policies was that of the free-market economy. The adherents of this policy were Presidents Ronald Reagan and George H. W. Bush. Reagan forsook conservation and optional energy initiatives and decided to regulate oil prices. President Bush sustained these policies further until his term in office expired.

One of the outcomes of this policy was a boost in imports from the Middle East. Free-market policy increased oil supply in America and during the 1990s, the Persian Gulf regions were exporting oil in huge volumes. During the same period of time, the American public enjoyed high standards of living due to reduced rate of inflation on the economy.

The Gulf War that took place in 1991 affected the supply of oil in America. It was through President Bush administration that national energy rule was crafted in order to chart the way forward for a stable energy policy in United States. President Bush was concerned over the need to have some lasting supply of oil as well as security in the country.

At latest, subsequent administrations tried to cut down on finances used on oil importation by establishing nuclear energy firms. Despite the preservation efforts of these administrations, the demand for petroleum products persisted for a considerably long period of time. By the onset of the 21st century, the nation was already using million barrels of petroleum on daily basis.

This demonstrates how oil has been significant According to the above information on how America as a nation had depended on foreign oil for many years in history, it is imperative to mention the following points. First of all, it is quite cumbersome to separate the role of oil in the history of America be it socially, politically or economically. The nation had experienced high rate of inflation due to hikes in oil price.

Furthermore, it is also worth noting that the justifications of the 2003 war on Iraq by the Bush Administration did not single out ‘oil interests’ as one of the reasons for the attack. Definitely, the American public and the world at large could not have expected such a rationale to be put forward. Nonetheless, critics of the Bush Administration reiterated that the latter had some underneath agenda on the oil resources found in Iraq.

An earlier blue print by the neo-conservative group known as the Project for the New American Century (PNAC) emphasized the dire need for the United States government to restore its 20th century superpower image and global domination. Indeed, the acquisition of Iraq oil resources through indirect control was thought as one way of advancing U.S foreign policy in Middle East and t also a way of building a robust U.S economy through cheap or ‘near-free’ imports of crude oil from Iraq (Baker 76).

Works Cited Baker, Dean. The United States Since 1980. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social, political and economic history of the United U.S from 1981 to the present by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Information Technology Changes in Business: Strategic IT Analysis Case Study argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction The MCDM (medical device contract manufacturing) Inc was established in 1972. The firm is involved in “contract manufacturing and packaging services of the medical devices industry” (Jeffery and Norton 2).

The company has its headquarters in the United States, although it operates other 19 subsidiaries in 35 cities. The company “specializes in medical device contract and manufacturing and assembly, clean room medical injection molding, and design and fabrication of specialty assembly equipment for medical device manufactures” (Jeffery and Norton 2).

In the 1980s, the firm was among the largest corporations in the industry owing to its success in manufacturing medical devices and customer satisfaction. The company promised to offer more to its target market in comparison with its competitors. In 1974, MDCM held 42 percent of the U.S market share and by 1985, it had grown to over 54 percent (Jeffery and Norton 3).

The company’s success was boosted by small business acquisitions leading to consolidation and further expansion in the US market. Between 1989 and 1990, MDCM lost its major four out of ten consumers and as a result, the company witnessed a massive decline in profits and revenues. Profit margins began to fall as a result of buyers’ consolidation.

The firm’s pricing power was lost as it could no longer compete with other players in the industry on pricing strategy. The company’s market share and profits continued to decline up to 2000 when the management decided to make modifications to reduce internal costs, increase the flow of information, and increase its efficiency.

The adoption of information technology enables an organization to cut down its operational and internal costs. Consequently, opportunities are realized in three major ways which are business/organization portfolio, competitiveness, and internal costs. Briefly, competiveness means the extra advantage associated with the development of IT leading to a competitive advantage.

Internal costs imply the process of improving effectiveness and efficiency of a company thus cutting down costs. Lastly, business portfolio refers to the adoption of IT and its influence on the decision making process of potential investors.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Strategic objectives of MDCM Based on the case study, the current strategic goals of MDCM are to cut down its operational costs, make information available to different departments in real-time, increase market share, be a market leader of the industry, and reduce internal costs (Jeffery and Norton 1-5).

At the moment, the primary strategic objective of MDCM Inc is to cut down the production costs incurred in the process of producing medical merchandise. The case study highlights that reduced costs could be achieved through internal costs as some of the problems noted result from internal environment. For example, the company lacks a proper network system which could be used to connect all the 19 subsidiaries in 35 countries.

This has resulted in increased operational costs (Jeffery and Norton 3). The firm’s operating system is outdated and it causes delays in relaying information to the MDCM employees. Lastly, the company lacks a standardized and proper email system that can be used to communicate with its employees. The legacy of the current system increases administration costs such as duty, financial, custom sales, and inspection systems.

The other noted strategic objective is to increase its market plan and go global through internationalization and globalization. It is important to note that at one point, the company was the largest market shareholder in the medical services industry (Jeffery and Norton 2), but this has since declined. The company once had a market share of 54 percent but due to a decline in its competitive advantage the share decreased (Jeffery and Norton 3).

Due to the aforementioned reasons, the company is planning to increase its market share and going global in order to realize market diversification. The company has the strategic objective of becoming a market leader in a market that it once dominated. The company is therefore on a mission to realize the benefits associated with investing in the IT sector in order to add value, increase profits, and expand its market share (Jeffery and Norton 8).

Competitive environment in which the firm operates (a competitive forces analysis) MDCM operates in a competitive industry whereby the company is involved in contract manufacturing and packaging services of medical devices (Jeffery and Norton 2). However, in the past four quarters, the company has been reporting losses. In a competitive market like the medical devices industry, making such losses could be detrimental to a company in the long run.

To better determine the competitive environment in which the DCM firm operates, Michael Porter’s 5 competitive forces of market analysis have been adopted. The five forces include presence of potential entrants, presence of perfect substitutes, traditional competitors, suppliers, and bargaining power of buyers/consumers (Porter 12). The forces are presented in the diagram below.

We will write a custom Case Study on Information Technology Changes in Business: Strategic IT Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Figure 1: Porter’s 5-Forces Model

(Source: Porter 2008)

the medical service industry is a multi-million dollar industry with many competitors. Based on the case study, MDCM used to be the largest player in the industry with 42% market share in 1974. By 1985, the company’s market share had increased to 54% (Jeffery and Norton 3). However, since the 1990s, the company has witnessed a drastic decline in its market share and profitability, thanks in large part to new entrants in the industry. Based on the case study, the company was unable to compete with the prices set by new entrants and rivals.

Threat of potential substitute’s products/services: because of the decline in market share and increased cost of producing merchandise, MDCM is prone to potential threat from substitute products and services. The threat has the potential of reducing the company’s competitive advantage relative to its competitors.

Traditional rivals: MDCM operates in a competitive market made up of traditional rivals in the US market. These rivals are a real threat to the survival of the firm. Traditional rivals have the capacity of getting MDCM out of business if the company does not undertake a strategic response to counter their moves. It is important therefore for the organization to address this issue.

The three threats discussed above have the highest potential of affecting MDCM although the bargaining power of both buyers and suppliers have potential effects as well.

The strategic response(s) MDCM should employ to address the most critical strategic threats identified above The three threats mentioned above (that is, traditional rivalry, threats from near entrants, and threats from potential products and services substitutes) need to be addressed if at all the organization wishes to achieve its organizational objectives. The strategic response for new entrants in the market could be addressed by raising the barriers to entry.

For example, MDCM could get copyrights and patents for most of its invention and discoveries, thereby prohibiting new entrants in the market. In addition, the firm needs to invest more on information technology to ensure information flows freely from marketers in the field to the production departments. This would ensure that new entrants are discouraged from entering the market as there are no loopholes to take advantage of.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Information Technology Changes in Business: Strategic IT Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The response to customers and suppliers bargaining power could be addressed by switching the costs for the consumer. Switching costs can be defined as the costs resulting from moving from one particular supplier to another supplier with quality services and at low costs. Through a value added IS the cost that would be used to identify a new supplier would be increased hence retaining the existing consumer and supplier.

This would suppress the suppliers’ and consumers’ bargaining power. On the other hand, by reducing the switching costs, the organization would be in a position to attract new suppliers.

The newly attracted supplier may have better supplier costs making them cost effective than the former suppliers. As a result, the low costs of suppliers would give the organization a competitive advantage in the market. Reduced costs and an increase in competitive advantage would enable the organization to start gaining strength and market share.

To prevent the presence of substitute products and services in the market, the organization should consider investing in research and development. For example, the adoption of the new IT would ensure that the company produces more competitive products thus gaining competitive advantage over its rivals and competitors. This will ensure that the organization is not threatened by the production of potential product substitutes from competitors.

Critical tactical objectives for MDCM MDCM should also consider using tactical responses as they would assist the organization to achieve different strategic goals. At the moment, the major tactical objectives of MDCM are increase the switching costs for the consumer, reduce the switching cost of the consumer, produce innovative products, raise the entry barriers, and invest in IT, and R


History and Development of Ballet Research Paper college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Ballet appeared as a distinctive form of dance in Italy sometimes before the sixteenth century. It initially involved movements, music and special effects that were integrated together. The first dance that was performed in France was organized by Balthasar de Beaujoyeux, a violinist and it was known as The Comic Queen Ballet (Lee, 40).

This became the production of the dance, the court ballet (ballet de cour), and an earlier and initial version of the current / modern ballet. This production influenced a sixteenth century entertainment known as masque in an English court that was characterized by dance interludes (Lee, 91). In 1588 Orchesographie became the first piece on ballet dancing.

The major ballet dance development occurred in the 17th century in France. During the initial stages of this development at around 1610, the divertissements scenes came into being and resulted into the grand ballet. In 1661 and 1669 the Royal Ballet Academy and the Royal Music Academy respectively were founded by Louis XIV (Lee, 66).

The Royal Music Academy later transformed into the Paris Opera to later become the foremost National Ballet School in 1672 ( Lee, 71). The performances were mainly carried out by male dancers in which the female roles were played by boys in masks and wigs (Lee, 53).

The first ballet of a kind that incorporated trained female was the 1681 Triumph of Love that involved music by Lully. During this period until 1708, ballet continued to be a court display and involved drama or opera. This was followed by the first public performance commissioning of ballet (Lee, 58).

Afterwards, ballet was infused with new ideas which saw it develop as a distinct art. However, the court ballet maintained its historic conventions. It is during these times that they saw the beginning of the choreographic notes and the legendary themes.

A ballet school based in Italy brought in great influence that resulted in more elevated movements while the horizontal movements became less. The five classic positions of a dancer’s feet were developed by Beauchamps (Lee, 75). These positions form the strength of the dancer’s movement and stance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There was a shift from earlier cumbersome costumes to newly designed ones that allowed for greater and unrestricted movement. Some of them include slippers, short tight skirt as well as heelless shoes. This style became popular from the second century courtesy of Duncan Isadora.

It was not until 18th century when d’action principles were brought about in the letters on ballets and dancing by ballet master (Lee, 110). His intentions were to shape ballet in such a way that it tells story with music, dance and décor as aiding tools. He wanted more of a dance, facial and body expressions.

To emphasize on naturalism, Noverre abolished the use of mask at around 1773. This was followed by other major innovations by several artists as well as technical innovation within the field of dance movement due to the continued alteration of the ballet attire (Lee, 111).

This was followed by a romantic period which formally began in 1832 after the production of La Sylphide (Lee, 135). This ushered in a new epoch that was characterized by brilliant choreography that stressed on beauty and proficiency of the prima ballerina. Ballet dance adopted filmy and calf-length costumes.

The new ballet involved the conflicts of flesh and spirit, reality and illusion. Legendary themes were put an end to and their place taken by fairy tales and love stories. During this period, a dancing style commonly referred as sur les pointes became favored by many and by the end of this century, there was the emergence of tutu, a short and buoyant skirt that ensured the legs were free. Costume sets and the choreography stopped being interesting and the imaginative feel required in ballet had been lost (Lee, 151).

The modern ballet period followed. This has seen major development in countries such as Russia, Britain and the USA. The Russian ballet has greatly developed with figures such as Sergei Diaghilev being hailed for their contribution. Russian dancing has for some time now been to its highest level and boasts several top ballet companies (Lee, 301).

The British ballet has not been left behind and the period between 1918 and present day has witnessed several transformations (Lee, 278). In 1930, Ballet Club was founded while the now famous Royal Ballet was established a year later. Through Royal Ballet’s efforts, the world is slowly giving male dancers an added colorful showcase (Lee, 278).

We will write a custom Research Paper on History and Development of Ballet specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the USA, the American Ballet company was founded in 1934 which was followed by a first major school that helped to develop the talents of several famous American dancers (Lee, 312). Several companies have since then been created and via formal training and movement, choreographers from US have come up with new style of ballet that depends less on literary plot but more on electronic and modern rock music. The costuming and décor has been greatly simplified.

Works Cited Lee, Carol Ballet in Western Culture: A History of Its Origins and Evolution. London: Rutledge, 2002.


Jay Gatsby custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Gatsby and Eponine


Works Cited

Introduction Every human being is born with unique character traits. Even identical twins cannot have similar characters. Despite the uniqueness, some people may exhibit related characteristics to some extent. This paper compares the characters of Gatsby and Eponine. Gatsby is the main character in the book “The Great Gatsby,” while Eponine is one of the characters in the book “Les Miserables.”

Gatsby and Eponine Gatsby is a noted habitual liar. Even his closest associate, Nick, and his girlfriend, Daisy, were equally victims of his lies. One of his apparent lies was that “he studied at Oxford University” (Fitzgerald, 156). The truth is that Gatsby worked as “an army man, sailor and bond seller” after he dropped out of St. Olfa’s college, where he had learned for only two weeks (Fitzgerald, 153).

Eponine’s character was filled with malice and perception. At the age of eighteen, she would fight much like men older than herself. She chose not to disclose anything about her past. Gatsby, at the same time, kept lying to his friends about his past (Roche, 161).

Gatsby struggled from a poor background and eventually became a wealthy man. The much wealth he amassed through illegal means made him proud and flashy. Jay liked showing off with his money. The author narrates how he kept on organizing brilliant parties for strangers. He lived in the class of the rich; his mansion was built with expensive construction materials with a luxurious “tower on one side” (Fitzgerald, 152).

Further Research In Which Point of View is the Great Gatsby Written? 4.5 94 Why Does Nick Feel Responsible for Getting People to the Funeral of Gatsby? 5 78 Where Is Nick Carraway From? 5 38 How does Nick describe Gatsby’s car? 5 79 “Can’t repeat the past? Why, of course, you can!” Explain the Quote 5 273 What Were the Rumors about Gatsby? 5 125 The nicely finished compound had a swimming pool lined with marble and enclosed in a large parcel of land on which he tended a lawn and flower gardens. Eponine was also proud, just like Gatsby. She was very proud that she knew how to write and read. “I am going to write something to show you,” this was her statement to express her feelings about her literacy (Hugo, 112). Her literacy placed her in a different social status with the rest of the women.

Gatsby was quite a gentleman. He extended his generosity to everyone he came across. When Daisy, his girlfriend, was accused of killing Myrtle, Gatsby stood by her side and defended her throughout the case (Fitzgerald, 151). He was kind to everyone and was ready to use his money to please people.

In one of the parties he organized, he gave a new gown to one of the guests whose dress was accidentally torn while at the party (Bohlin, 162). Eponine was emotional and fearful. All of her songs are emotional (Roche, 162). She cried so often as a way of expressing her emotions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Because of his cheating nature, Gatsby was a susceptible character. He embraced lies as a strategy to protect himself and perpetuate his “great name” (Bohlin, 220). This character made him loose all his close friends. He also used the lies to convince her girlfriends in romance. Eponine acts more like a boy than a lady. She is associated more with barricade boys and fought just like men. She bears the brand of “on my own” attitude, which is more of a man’s character than a woman’s one (Hugo, 109).

Conclusion This essay made a comparison of the characters of Gatsby and Eponine as detailed in the books “The Great Gatsby” and “Les Miserables.” The two personalities were effectively used by the writers to bring out the themes of romance, social class, and struggles of life.

Works Cited Bohlin, Karen. Teaching Character Education through Literature: Awakening the Moral imaginations in Secondary Classrooms. New York: Routledge Falmer. 2005. Print

Fitzgerald, Scott and Prigozy, Ruth. The Great Gatsby. New York: Oxford University Press Inc. 1998. Print.

Hugo, Victor. Les Miserables. Fairfield: 1st world Library. 2007. Print

Roche Isabel. Character and meaning in the novels of Victor Hugo. New York: Purdue University.2007.Print.


Film Analysis-Danton Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Danton is a famous film that was directed by Andrzej Wajda. It was created in France after authorities in Poland closed down studios belonging to Wajda on allegations that he was sympathizing with trade unions. The political events that took place during this period of time influenced him greatly as portrayed in the film. The film depicts the power struggles that existed in Poland (Cabin 2).

The French Revolution which took place between 1789 and 1795 can be compared to the famous Russian Revolution. The armies allied to Louis XVI went beyond the borders of France to rescue Bourbon monarchy causing the entire French people to join the revolution later. Despite the fact that the armies crossed the borders, the fierce battles of the revolution took place in Paris and its environs.

The leaders of the revolution in Paris assisted by irate mobs created policies that would have been initially rejected by the population of the country. The direction taken by the revolution was determined by a tiny section of young men who began as idealists before turning into comrades and good friends. They separated after a few years and became enemies. Those who were considered traitors were taken to the guillotine because of betraying their fatherland (Cabin 3).

The film narrates a true story of the life of Georges Danton. Danton played a crucial role in the French Revolution before his guillotining by the state together with others who were equally instrumental in the revolution. The film highlights the political struggles that took place as idealists tried to forge the state. The idealists fought against the state that purported to care about the welfare of the people yet it had turned tyrannical and corrupt. The film uses the spoken word rather than physical violence to achieve this.

The story of the French revolution which started with the relationships among renowned personalities is clearly explained in the film. Among the prominent characters in the film are Maximilien and Georges Danton. Danton represents a passionate man who has some attributes of dishonesty.

He is a respected revolutionary leader whose attitude towards the revolution becomes moderate with time. The moderation he embraces is considered an act of betrayal and Robespierre, who is a moral lawyer, agitates for the trial and subsequent conviction of Danton. Danton protests by screaming as he is pushed to the guillotine.

The film which is a co-production of Franco-Polish was directed by Wajda in France. The role of the fanatic Robespierrists in the film is acted by actors from Poland while the loyal and honest Dandonists are represented by actors from France. This probably explains why the government of Poland was not interested in showing the film in the country.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The film depicts Danton as someone who is conscious about the revolution unlike Lech Walesa, who speaks on behalf of the solidarity movement of Poland. Robespierre is portrayed as a person who does not care about the feelings and needs of the citizens. He is a dictator who approves the execution of many people for the good of the country. Danton is used in the film to represent the west while Robespierre stands for the East (Cabin 4).

Danton presents a clear picture of the most interesting moments during the French Revolution. It was in the early months of 1794 after a self-imposed retirement that he went back to Paris with the aim of bringing the terror to an end. January 1793 was a year that witnessed the beheading of Louis and by October the same year, there was mounding terror.

This came up after Marie Antoinette, the chatty, Madame Roland, and those who moderated the revolution were killed. Danton followed the advice of his friends who wanted him to go Paris instead of running away although he knew very well that his action was exposing him to the guillotine (Travers 3).

The film maintains the chamber-piece characteristic of French Revolution by playing out Danton in numerous confrontations with Robespierre. This makes the scenes of the film dramatic and easy to understand such that a viewer who has no knowledge of what happened during the French revolution finds the film informative.

Some of the scenes of the film that are not so compelling include those which try to bring out the political drama by using the context of a city rebelling against a nation. The crowd scenes in the film are important since they remind the viewers about the Hollywood mobs of 1935.

Although the reputation of Danton is not completely cleaned up in the film, most of the bad things are not shown on screen. Things like bribery, love for property and women are mentioned in the film. Danton pleads for forgiveness because it is the public safety committee he formed that enables Robespierre to gain control over the country. The film does not so much focus on the role he played during the 1793 massacre. During the massacre, mobs raided prisons and killed anybody they met (Travers 5).

The film effectively dramatizes the conviction of Danton about the fury portrayed by the revolution. The fury of the revolution betrayed the same revolution it was supposed to support. The film can be described as appropriate with regard to its capacity to illuminate the French revolution and the political happenings in Poland.

We will write a custom Essay on Film Analysis-Danton specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Cabin, Chris. Danton. 2009. Web.

Travers, James. Danton (1983). 2000. Web.


Jay Gatsby college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



Works Cited

Introduction The role played by a character in any play defines his or her traits. These roles depend on the themes that the writer wants to discuss throughout the play. The writer could talk about love and compassion, greed and injustice. The theme of the play brings out the main traits of character revealed within the play.

A positive theme shows positive traits whereas a negative theme highlights negative ones. Different styles become necessary to help represent better the traits designed for the plays. This essay compares and contrasts the characters of Gatsby and Jean Valjean in the Les Miserable novels and films.

Gatsby was a young man whose life got transformed from poverty to riches. He grew up under sheer impoverished circumstances as a young boy but became extremely wealthy. He should be about thirty years old and full of life.

Raised from a struggling family, Gatsby desired riches and hated the miserable life his family lived. He became obsessed with seeking shortcuts or a quick way to gain some fortune and wealth. He was eager to get power that came with being wealthy. He hated processes and procedures. He could not keep up at school because he did not see how the school curriculum could get him out of poverty.

He dropped out of school barely two weeks after admission because of dissatisfaction with the duties assigned to him at school – janitorial duties. He could not bear the shame of the assigned duties. This was also his only way of paying his school fees. Stopping to do the chores meant that he would have to leave school. That is what he did by expelling himself (Fitzgerald, 2008).

Left with no other choice, Gatsby resorted to criminal living. He formed a gang engaging in several organized criminal activities including the sale of illegal brews (alcohol) and stolen securities. The decision by Gatsby to live such a life came as a need to be loved by a lady Daisy Buchanan.

The obsession for riches and wealth got fueled by the desire to have this woman as his wife. He wanted to make a great impression on this lady with his wealth and would not give up until he acquired everything he wanted. The lady Daisy was from a rich family with an elegant background. Gatsby lied about his own background in order to prove that he is worth this lady.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The writer of the novel, The Great Gatsby, deliberately delays the information about Gatsby’s obsession with lady Daisy until the end of the novel. He presents him rather as a flamboyant man who loved to throw opulent parties at his luxurious mansion. He paints him living a luxurious life surrounded by powerful men and gorgeous women (Bloom, 2010).

Jean Valjean is a central character in Les Miserables who became the main figure of love and compassion as highlighted in the Gugo’s trials. He was a criminal whose life got transformed by the deplorable conditions and experiences acquired at the prison. He went into the prison naïve and emerged as a hardened criminal with immense hatred for the church and society. He did not care about respect and greeted even the bishop with much contempt and hatred.

His meeting with Myriel Digne changed his life. He was forced to make a promise to become honest in all his undertakings. The once hardened and desperate criminal was influenced by love and yielded to its redemptive power and compassion. His diligence helped him to become a symbol of change within his hometown. Jean Valjean ended up as a philanthropic wealthy man (Hugo, 2006).

Discussion The stories of the dominant Gatsby and Jean Valjean show some similarities concerning their characters. Both of them have lived criminal lives even though fueled by different passions. They are both conquered by love. Gatsby and Valjean end up wealthy and powerful. On the contrary, the two characters differ in their personality and strength. Gatsby strikes the readers as a naïve and lovesick individual though his character is negative. His desperation is clear.

He is a cheat who tells lies about his background. He is selfish. He only thinks of himself and what he wants as opposed to what can benefit the others. When conquered by love, Gatsby resorts to criminal activities to sustain it. On the other hand, we see Valjean who is physically strong and hardworking. He is an honest man who keeps his word (promises). His life is transformed by love and compassion.

He becomes visionary and philanthropic. Gatsby spends his money and wealth only on himself. He is evil and lacks a vision. Valjean is a symbol of hope. The factual changes that occur in the life of Valjean prove that anyone can experience a better life after a negative experience. Gatsby is a symbol of evil and discontentment. He is constantly in pursuit of what he lacks for. He is not willing to discover and do what is right while Valjean seeks to do what is right.

Conclusion Gatsby and Valjean have similarities and differences. Valjean’s life changes for the better in the face of love unlike that of Gatsby. Their stories highlight the fact that these individuals are unique and different.

We will write a custom Essay on Jay Gatsby


The Death of Ivan Ilyich Essay best essay help

Ivan Ilyich’s Life as Most Ordinary and Most Terrible Ivan Ilyich is the main protagonist in Leo Tolstoy’s novella ‘The Death of Ivan Ilyich’ first published in the year 1886. Through this widely acclaimed literary work, the author has clearly addressed some of the important perspectives of life as well as the inevitability associated with death.

The writer takes us through the story of Ivan Ilyich who appears to have enjoyed an exemplary wealthy and high statue life in the society. Ilyich is a well regarded court official who is described by the writer as a noble. Ivan’s life however, is a life which is observed to have been most ordinary as well as most terrible.

In an in-depth analysis of this wonderful description regarding the life of Ivan, we are able to see him as someone who is much willing to accomplish all what is expected of him in the eyes of other people. Things seem to be much smooth for Ivan even after he gets married and the same values and behavior of a responsible man would be exemplified upon his family.

As a competent and highly acclaimed magistrate, Ivan is defined as an average and common place individual of all sorts and it is actually through this obligatory nature of him that we get to see his life as being most ordinary in all aspects.

Ivan’s life however, takes a different course after his wife Praskovya becomes pregnant and it is owing to this unexpected intervention of nature that Ivan realizes the disruption facing his smooth and decorous lifestyle. As a result of this, Ivan decides to avert his concentration towards his official duties and assignments, completely detaching himself from the obligations of his family.

He cannot stop priding himself at work for successfully detaching his personal attributes from his list of events and priorities. However, when he turns at home he tries to adopt quite a formal concern and attitude toward his wife. This lack of concern and interest about social, emotional, or physical life of either his family or the many people upon which his ruling as a magistrate would be executed is actually one of the things that would make Ivan’s life seem more terrible.

With time, Ivan is rapidly promoted in his law job and he is over-ambitious about being awarded the prestigious post of a presiding judge but this is a wish he never achieves. Owing to his selfish desire of a high lifestyle, Ivan accidentally succumbs into a serious injury that completely changes his life. The worsening situation of the sickness makes quarrelsome and irritable to the many people around his ailing world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this state, Ivan is observed to be constantly pondering his imminent death as he progressively continues to question the rationale behind his plight. One day, while looking upon his past life, Ivan is joyous in the sense that, his suffering is justified and for thus, he senselessness resigns to his death. It is through these brief observations that we get to see why Ivan’s life is observed to be the most ordinary and the most terrible.


Death of Ivan Ilych Explicatory Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

The life of Ivan Ilych in the context of Man’s Search for Meaning In the Death of Ivan Ilych, Tolstoy presents one of the main characters, Ivan Ilych as a person who does not have a stand of his own but is dictated by the society. This essay analyzes the life of Ivan Ilych in the context of Man’s Search for Meaning, by Frankl Viktor. To achieve this target, the essay gives a brief summary of Death of Ivan Ilych with special focus on Ivan Ilych, a shallow judge manipulated by the society. After this synthesis, the character of Ilych is discussed in the context of Man’s Search for Meaning.

The Death of Ivan Ilych commences on a sad note when judges are privately meeting and learn about the death of Ilych, through Peter Ivanovich, a close friend to the allegedly dead person (Tolstoy 1). Even though the judges are unhappy about the death of Ivan, they cannot help but marvel at the opportunities which had been created by the departure of their colleague. For this reason, they are consoled by the fact that they are not the ones who have died, but a different person.

While observing Ivan’s corpse, Peter notices a bothersome expression on his face, denoting warning and disapproval. While at Ivan’s home, Peter is confronted by Ivan’s wife who wants to know possible ways of making use of the vacuum left by her husband in the government. After sharing the news with Gerasim, Peter is surprised by Gerasim’s view concerning death, when he mentions that death was everybody’s path (Tolstoy 4).

The author shifts and focuses on Ivan’s life, thirty years ago. As a second born in a family of three, Ivan is described as an average person in the society. He studies law, becomes a magistrate and moves to a different province. He’s comfortable until his wife changes her behavior occasioned by pregnancy (Tolstoy 13).

Ivan decides to distance himself from the family and sinks in his official duties. After missing a highly anticipated presiding judge post, Ivan is disappointed, takes a leave of absence and relocates to his brother-in-law’s house. He looks for another job in St. Petersburg and purchases a high-class house for his family (Tolstoy 133).

Ivan gets unwell after experiencing pain in his left side, associated with the minor accident he had before. As the situation gets worse, Ivan visits several doctors who disagree on his illness, making him fearful and depressed (Tolstoy 44). He is filled with immortality thoughts and believes that his illness was a die or live issue and finds no way of changing his ever-deteriorating condition, which cannot be understood by his wife.

Gerasim gives his best in helping Ivan who observes pretence in those around him and are unable to confront the reality of death. After his “deep black sack” dream he cuts links with Gerasim and his situation worsens (Tolstoy 55). He ponders about death and finds joy in his previous life memories. He believes that his prosperous past could not allow him to understand his suffering and maintains his artificiality view over those around him even at his death point.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ivan’s greatest shortcoming is that he fails to live a life of his own but follows what the society and people around. He believes that by imitating those in high social status, he will find satisfaction and happiness in life. He marries because of his status, and buys an expensive house to match his perceived status. He is intolerant towards all he considers to be hindrance towards his happiness; he distances himself from the family after Praskovya’s pregnancy (Tolstoy 13).

He reduces his relationships to almost nothing as he sees everybody to be artificial. This isolation earns him pain and total dissatisfaction even at death point. His death forces him to reflect on his life and confront the consequences of his isolation. Through this confrontation of reality, he notices that he had not lived rightly. He realizes that love and compassion are the main values to be upheld in life and are a major source of joy and happiness.

In Man’s Search for Meaning, Frankl describes his experiences during the Nazi regime in Germany as a condemned Jew. However, he does this authorship without vengefulness and bitterness. He reflects on how prisoners reacted towards death camps in three phases and through personal experiences, noting that victors of brutality were characterized by the right conduct. The three phases; admission, entrenchment and liberation presented different challenges.

According to the author, inmates lost meaning in life during the final phase by reflecting on passed events and the murder of family members. He notes that seekers of empty pleasures find life to be meaningless. This view can be directly linked to Ivan Ilych who lived a life of seeking pleasure in everything without realizing the true values of life.

From high paying jobs to a materialistic life, Ivan fits in Frankl’s description of “empty pleasure-seekers”. As a result of a meaningless life, some inmates remained in bed instead of reporting to work as expected by prison rules. In comparison, Ivan takes an absence leave after missing a promotion to a higher paying job, not factoring in other factors which may have cost him as a way of seeking pleasure.

From personal experience, Frankl learnt the need of being responsible in solving problems and performing tasks (Frankl 97). From his perspective, life does not have a general definition; life’s purpose is mostly suggested to every person through situations, problems and challenges, which have to be faced rightly. He further affirms that there is no value in seeking a convenient and inspiring meaning towards life. In describing Ivan’s character, he adopts what Frankl refers to “inspiring” definition of life.

When he reflects on his previous life, he is unable to find the meaning of life and believes that his success could not allow him to understand his suffering and the problem at hand. When his wife gets pregnant, he is unhappy because of her change in behavior that generates inconveniences. As a result, Ivan gets absorbed in his official work as a magistrate, forgetting the love that his wife needed during the pregnancy period. According to Frankl, the meaning of life is found in unavoidable suffering moments of our lives.

We will write a custom Essay on Death of Ivan Ilych specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This seems impractical to Ivan who tries to run from challenges and searches the meaning of life in his prosperous past instead of confronting his suffering and death that are unavoidable. Since his unsuccessful promotion quest was beyond his control, Ivan was to find meaning of life in this situation but fails to do so by quitting and finding pleasure in a better paying job.

Frankl further digs into his school of thought by introducing “Logotherapy” in realizing a fulfilling life. He believes that the inability of people to see meaning in life is the root cause of frustrations and self-destructive traits. This approach contrasts Ivan who finds no meaning in life and develops self-destructive behaviors.

These include distancing himself from family members and seeing artificiality in every person around him. Frankl denounces a life that is based on self mechanism (Frankl 121). What is Ivan’s living mechanism? He finds convenience in life by being overwhelmed by the need for material gain and rising to a higher social status. This mechanism forces him to live a life of others by sinking into an aristocratic society.

The most significant argument presented by Frankl is his emphasis on individual definition of life. He believes that numerous situations and challenges pave way for the understanding of life. He further notes that the purpose of life keeps on changing as long as one lives. Does this apply to Ivan? He definitely does not view life from Frankl’s perspective. While he is seeking the meaning of life in his past, Frankl recommends the integration of current situations in finding a realistic meaning for life.

Additionally, Frankl notes that anticipatory anxiety generates prophecies that are aimed at fulfilling ones desires. On the other hand, hyper-intension refers to trying beyond allowed limits to achieve something falling outside our reach, to fulfill a certain behavior within us.

For instance, he advocates pursuance of one’s fears to overcome obsessive fears that could be haunting us (Frankl 147). Conversely, Ivan is overwhelmed by the fear of death after all doctors gave conflicting prescriptions. This fear makes him to be arrogant and sees malice in his family members.

The analysis of Ivan Ilych’s life in the context of Man’s Search for Meaning, presents contrasting views towards the true meaning of life. While Ivan is seeking inspiring definitions from his past, Frankl opposes the idea, arguing that life’s meaning lies in different situations and challenges, which continuously change. Because of his wrong understanding, Ivan’s suffering and death are meaningless.

Works Cited Frankl, Viktor. Man’s search for Meaning. Boston, U.S: Beacon Press, 2006. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Death of Ivan Ilych by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Tolstoy, Leo. Death of Ivan Ilych. Solon, OH: Findaway World Llc, 2008. Print.


Gold’s Production and Processing Research Paper essay help site:edu

This research revolves around the production and processing of gold as one of the most precious metals in the world. Gold was never actually formed and it is a natural element that can only be obtained through mining. In that case gold is itself a highly valuable mineral categorized among other precious metals such as platinum, silver, palladium, and uranium among others.

Gold is acquired as pure yellowish metallic element through mining. The nature of the primary locations from where gold is extracted is examined in this research. Other significant aspects such as the environmental concerns tied to the material as well as the infrastructure and labor involved in its production and distribution are also examined in this study.

This research also tries to compare the cost of Gold relative to other similar commodities in the market such as silver, bronze and diamond among others. However, there is no way we can examine the overall production of gold without mentioning the environmental concerns associated with the overall usage of the material by humans.

Gold has always been regarded as the most valuable commodity in the human history owing to its obvious dazzling beauty as well as the relative scarcity commonly associated with it. Gold can be defined as a naturally occurring commodity of metallic element which is highly reputed for its great economic value and worthiness.

As the most precious metal on earth, the production, usage and distribution of gold is equally significant, and it involves a lot of concern from diverse population across the world (Jenkins 279). There are many societal issues associated with Gold in the various places where the commodity is produced.

Mining of gold, processing and its distribution is observed to have broad social as well as societal benefits for many people in the world. For one, apart from the economical value of the commodity to the global economy, the overall gold industry has continued to offer job opportunities for many people ranging from the work force in the mines to the category of personnel in the entire gold market sector.

Just like any other mineral, the production of gold is quite a complex and hazardous exercise that requires explicit human and machine effort to accomplish. Today, gold can primarily be found in very minimal concentrations of solvents and in this case, the only way of extracting the material existing in such small quantities is by establishing large open pits known as ‘mines’ through blasting where large amounts of ore would be excavated.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As we all know, mining processes have never been safe since pre-historic times and they would be observed to create a potential environmental threat both in the course of the mining exercise and even after the exercise has been accomplished. Some of the most common risks in gold production is the blasting exercise and the poor disposal of cyanide; a toxic solution used in dissolving and extraction of gold.

The biggest environmental concern in the production of the commodity would be the disposal of the overburden stuff removed from the mine zones or pits.

However, the current observation of the ‘Surface Mining Control and Reclamation Act’ requires all gold miners to observe a number of measures in ensuring that humans, wildlife and the environment are protected from the exposure of hazardous components from gold mines. Various mining operations in the U.S. and other countries have taken extra precautions in accommodating cyanide solution in special pads that are lined with plastic membranes to avoid leaching (Kesler 67).

Cyanide waste is also treated through various processes such as photodegredation, oxidation and hydrolysis. These processes would facilitate the complete breakdown of the harmful chemical thus minimizing its hazardous effects to people and the general environment. More importantly, cyanide can also be recycled for reuse and this would greatly take care of the harmful toxics associated with it.

Apart from the various environmental issues mentioned in this research which may be associated with gold production, there are other major social issues as well attached to the overall practice of gold production. The exercise of extracting the commodity from the underground is observed to have caused inexplicable problems to masses all over the world.

Communities have been displaced and their traditional livelihoods spoiled as people are evacuated from their homes and lands to create space for more responsible mining fields. However, it is this severity of the social as well as the environmental issues associated with the production of the mineral that has generated a big concern from the global authorities leading to interventions of governments in the moneyed industry of gold.

This really explains the reason why governments are observed to own the largest gold mines in most of the largest global producers of the commodity such as China, Russian and Australia. This has resulted into exaggerated politics in the gold mining industry making it one of the most corrupt sectors in the world.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Gold’s Production and Processing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As I mentioned earlier in this essay, the production of this precious metal is a complex and costly exercise which involves many hazardous processes. Human labor, diesel fuel, machinery, electricity, and explosives, just to mention but a few are some of the necessities required to bring gold into our markets right from the soil where it is extracted.

This must be enough to explain the levels of extravagancy associated with the mineral’s production no wonder its great worthiness and value compared with other similar materials. Even though its market prices keeps on fluctuating constantly, gold is arguably one of the most expensive commodities on earth and for thus, its price has remained relatively high to that of most physical things based on a per weight basis.

According to Frank and Stengos, gold is extremely more expensive compared to other similar commodities in the market such as silver, diamond, and bronze (553). However, the high demand and the great value of gold in the commodity market has been as a result of not only its practical applications in various sectors of life but more as its significant role as a store of value and as an investment.

The overall production of gold however, has been surrounded by a big controversy regarding the cost of production labor compared to where and how the commodity is used in the contemporary world. Issues have been raised that cheap labor is used for the production of gold when compared to its final value and abundant usage in numerous ways.

Personally, I tend to agree with this observation; what the people in the gold mining industry, especially the miners get for their hazardous work is very dismal compared to what the commodity fetches out there in the markets. Gold, just like soil is observed to be everywhere and currently, there are many countries producing the commodity to cater for the global consumers.

Gold is not rare, but what makes it rare is its high value and worthiness compared with other minerals; the two qualities which make it a preserve only for the rich in the society. In this regard, there are no any concerns about limited supply of the commodity. All the same, no one can foretell an increase in its cost. In fact what we expect to see is further fluctuation of gold prices as a result of increased production and supply.

Gold is indeed among the few elements on earth known to be chemically stable. This makes it resistant to any chemical changes that might physically spoil its surface and for this reason, it has found use in diverse sectors of life. The only environment risk associated with gold production would be in the mining process where cyanide solution is applied to facilitate its extraction (Strelow 116).

Chemically, gold is less reactive than most similar elements of its nature. It also does possess high luster as well as higher melting points compared with other metals. Pure gold is observed to be non-toxic and would cause no irritations when ingested by humans. More significantly, gold is a noble metal and this explains its user-friendly nature to humans since it does not react with other substances and neither is it flammable.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Gold’s Production and Processing by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Another notable advantage of gold is its recyclability nature and this would guarantee for an eco-friendly products of gold, all coming in exclusive high quality. It is also another way of giving the customers a value for their money out of the used products. owing to its outstanding economical value, gold would previously be used as a form of currency before it would be transformed into a common industrial as well as investment commodity of all times by many nations in the world.

As observed in the findings of this research, the production and distribution of gold has diverse societal and social benefits to people across the world. Big environmental concerns are constantly administered to ensure that human as well as animal health and safety is well-taken care of. Gold is widely used in our world owing to its nature and value and this would progressively serve as a form of employment for many people in the entire gold industry.

Out of this research, we have got to see the value of gold compared to other similar materials. Some of the social, economic and environmental issues associated with the gold industry have been given much concern in this study. More importantly, there is also a discussion about the broader range of problems that would be associated with the hazardous activity of extracting the commodity from the mines.

This research has also examined the politics and propaganda surrounding the gold mining industry as investors and governments take significant roles in the control of this moneyed sector. Finally, out of this study we get to learn the nature of gold as a recyclable non-toxic element. All these qualities are enough to make the commodity and its products user-friendly to humans. Finished products of gold are safe and healthy for our lives and for this reason everybody would like it.

Works Cited Frank, Murray.


Effects of deindustrialization and downsizing Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Deindustrialization can be occasioned by a number of reasons. Common among them are the outsourcing of jobs, off shoring and introduction of new methods of production.

Other causes may be related to the improvement in technology, which may lead to workers being redundant and the privatization of industries. The effects of both deindustrialization and downsizing that are evidenced due to changing demographics and changing geographic locations of industries depending on the costs to be incurred have very many negative consequences on both the economy and the society.

The major losses to the economy are evidenced in lost revenue due to the relocation or close down of industries, which results in unemployment. If the regime is seen as being incapable of availing jobs to people, then, the resultant unrest due to instability occasioned by desperate citizens may be very detrimental. Additionally, deindustrialization and downsizing cause inequality in the society with some people earning more than others, which is unhealthy to the economic success of any country.

Perhaps the greatest effects of deindustrialization and downsizing are felt in the society as unemployment rates soar causing some members of the society to be dependant on others. The result is long-term financial difficulties for families and in the United States in particular, some economic experts assert that the unemployment rate affects only a small percentage of the population. However, when comparing statistics, it is obvious that there is an increase in the number of people who have been unemployed for over six months.

This is the time that people exhaust government assistance and their savings as well. After prolonged unemployment, people plunge into more credit card debt, which may result in the reduction in their retirement savings even to the extent of being forced to incur other relocation related expenses. Unemployment therefore contributes to an increased number of Americans living below the poverty line.

People who have been unemployed for a long time may be forced to sell their houses since they cannot afford to pay mortgages. Just like finding employment, it is very difficult to find a person wiling to buy a house as increased unemployment causes the housing sector to be glutted. Therefore, people abandon their houses in search of employment elsewhere. When unemployment occurs on a large scale, then, many people abandon their homes bringing the value of the neighborhood down.

The loss of jobs does not only lead to the loss of wages. In most cases, people lose access to healthcare. A survey conducted by Urban Institute shows that each time the unemployment rate goes up by 1%, there is an increase in the uninsured by 1.1 million (Sack pp2). Even those who have been laid off cannot afford copays and other deductions hence avoid paying them leading to the avoidance of healthcare altogether.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The fact that able-bodied people lack employment opportunities causes many problems in the family setup. Many neighborhoods in the US have been affected by decay. This means that abandoned homes become bases for drug dealers to operate from. Some homes have further been broken into with property being looted and vandalized.

Desperate people take anything that is worth selling from these homes, which means that the properties eventually become derelict and the only option is to demolish them leading to massive losses to their owners and causing further anguish.

In conclusion, it is possible to say that unemployment which is a direct result of industries downsizing and deindustrialization has very many negative consequences on any economy including that of the US as well as on the family setup. It does not only increase poverty levels but also brings with it negative reactions like drug dealing, crime and a recipe for a dysfunctional society.

Works Cited Sack, Kevin. “Study Warns Job Losses Will Strain Government Health Programs,” New York Times, 29 April 2008. Web.


Improving Ashford Student Services: A Research Proposal best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction: The Service Efficiency

The Issues to Be Covered

Offering Solutions: I See the Light

The Research Methods

Conclusions: The Probable Suggestions

Reference List

Introduction: The Service Efficiency Studying at the college involves a number of issues that require considerable care of the college administration and provide an efficient work of the entire system.

One of such is the issue of returning phone calls to the college students, which has grown quite essential, since, even with the advent of a high-tech era, people still might fail to receive a phone call and need a certain feedback from the institution which they applied to, e.g., the university or college.

Once failing to return a call, a student is likely to miss certain essential information, which will hinder his/her progress. Hence, it seems that the issue of returning phone calls to the college students remains the problem that has to be dealt with.

The Issues to Be Covered It is essential to outline the major issues that one is most likely to encounter when solving the given issue. It is necessary to admit that the college administration has to face certain limitations when trying to get in touch with the students. Among the most widespread ones, there is fact that there is actually no person responsible for solely delivering the information to the students.

According to what Moore (2009) says, “midway through the semester faculty, counselors, or advisors contact students who show signs of academic difficulty” (p. 31), yet the author clearly shows that there is no medium for transmitting messages from a student to the college or vice versa.

Offering Solutions: I See the Light Among the most obvious ones, the necessity to hire a receptionist who is going to answer the phone calls of the students is obvious. With the assistance of a professional, one is likely to obtain the required results In quite short time. Moreover, it can be suggested that with a specific person assigned for the given job, the process of receiving back calls is going to be more orderly. The second solution presupposes that the students should offer several phone numbers of theirs, including the mobile phone numbers.

The Research Methods Obviously, one of the most fruitful methods for the given research is collecting the data on the lack of college administration efficiency based on the questionnaires for students. In addition, it is required to offer a statistic data on a number of calls that have not been returned to the administration (McCellan


Internet Tools for Dirt Bikes Problem Solution Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Intranet

Internet Tools for Dirt Bikes

Wireless Network



Introduction In the contemporary business world, technology is imperative for business operations. With the alarming speed of globalization, a business has to advance its technology for survival in the market. Other than infrastructure, the internet is a key component of technology.

The level of the technology that a company has impacts the profitability and the going concern of the business. In most business, spending on technology (both capital and operating expenses) takes a large proportion of the expenses reported in the statement of income and expenditure.

Therefore, this necessitates a company to do a cost-benefit analysis of such expenses. Conventionally, the benefits should surpass costs. Besides, a company should ensure that it fully utilizes the resources available in order to improve efficiency. Expenses related to the internal and external communication of the organization should be reviewed from time to time in order to establish if benefits outweigh the costs incurred, or if the technology is not obsolete at the end of payback period of such investment.

Management of Dirt Bikes, a company trading in motorcycles of different types, is concerned with the amount of money that has been spent on communication. This paper explores various internet tools that can be utilized by employees of Dirt Bikes to communicate and obtain information efficiently.

The Intranet The Intranet is a secured internal or private network of an organization that connects all computers to ingress that access the internet. Development of intranet is based on the internet technology such as use of htp protocols.

The intranet is restricted to an organization and its associates (customers, employees, members and suppliers among others), and is protected from unauthorized access with security systems and firewalls. Such security encryption puts a stop to abuses of the system like social networking, inapt use of web, among others. A major benefit that arises from use of the intranet is reduction in costs as a result of paperless environment.

For instance, Dirt Bikes can put out most of the company’s documents such as policies, procedure manuals for the shops, and new rules through the intranet Web pages. This saves the company costs relating to printing, maintaining and circulating such documents. Also, the intranet makes it easy for communication across departments, for instance, manufacturing and production departments can rely on increased level of outputs to sales and marketing department so that they can clear stock items in anticipation of new products.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Intranet can aid in improving coordination, conveying information relating to maintenance and giving information relating to production schedules by production department. Sales and marketing departments can get reports on sales and market surveys from the intranet.

In human resources department, use of forms is made easy as they can be done paper free and transmitted quickly. Furthermore, information such as payroll documents, expense report requests, vacancies, staff benefits, employees’ handbooks among others can be posted for easy access by all employees (Laudon and Laudon, 2007).

The intranet allows saving much time in Dirt Bikes because manual procedure of processing information is limited. Besides, it enhances collaboration across all departments as it ensures sharing corporate knowledge and support in the entire company.

Finally, there is an overall improvement in productivity and effectiveness through faster, easier, more flexible and offers an open communication through rapid transmission and feedback and one-to-one, many-to-many dialogs. Productivity increase results in better learning and knowledge management facilities the intranet provides (Laudon and Laudon, 2007).

Internet Tools for Dirt Bikes The Internet comes with numerous tools, applications and utilities which company can utilize in a day-to-day operations for communication, information exchange and interaction. Internet tools enable users who have client software to access storage of information on servers for a range of purposes which are more complex than just utility tasks.

Some of the tools include; Server watch (avail information about the internet servers includes news, downloads, mail among others), FTP RFC, Telnet RFC, FTP planet, FTP Clients, World Wide Web, HTML Station, Usenet, RSS, VoIP, Groupware and VPN among others (Laudon and Laudon, 2007). The table below summarizes the internet tools that can be utilized in various departments of an organization.

Table 1.0 Internet tool by department

We will write a custom Essay on Internet Tools for Dirt Bikes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Department Tool Benefit Sales and marketing Groupware, WWW, HTML Station, VoIP, RSS, LISTSERV App. and VPN Cooperation, savings in cost, easy access to remote accounts, Human resources Groupware, WWW, HTML Station and VoIP Cooperation and savings in cost Manufacturing and Production Groupware, WWW, HTML Station, VoIP and VPN Cooperation, savings in cost, easy access to remote accounts, ability to access information on current technology among others. From the table presented above, we can deduce that the entire company will benefit from VoIP and Groupware. First, everybody uses e-mail. Besides, there can be savings in time and money when using electronic conferencing across departments.

Sales teams can stay in touch with each other easily and cheaply using the instant messaging or chats. Also, production department will benefit from the wiki as designers or service department could collaborate by sharing new maintenance directives. Therefore, VoIP and Groupware make it easy and cost effective to communicate in and out of the business.

The business can also consider using LISTSERV application which is mailing list management software. It allows users to create and maintain e-mail on their intranet or internet, including newsletter, discussion groups and direct marketing campaigns. This tool can be very important for marketing as the employees would have an easy access to the contacts of the customers (Laudon and Laudon, 2007).

Wireless Network Wireless network allows for access to the internet without using net cable. Since security is a threat to this type of connection, passwords and firewalls are normally used. This connection is convenient as an employee do not need a cable connection.

In the modern world, “there are numerous portable and pocketable devises used for voice and data processing or data transfer via wireless transmission media can connect to each other and communicate directly without the need for a cable” (Sikora, 2002). The wireless network is important in this aspect as it connects all these devices. Further, it leads to reduction in cost of cabling and efficient utilization of the office space (Sikora, 2002)

Conclusion Technology is paramount in the current global business world. The Internet is a major platform for conducting businesses. Businesses are compelled to adjust their operations to match with the changing technologies due to fear they face. Generally, use of the internet and intranet is beneficial to business as it leads to reduction in cost of operation that arises from manual operation. Besides, it leads to time saving.

The end results are improved efficiency and productivity of the employees of an organization. An organization should look for best internet tool which would best suite its organization. Dirt Bikes should consider using VoIP and Groupware as they would lead to a reduction in cost of communication both internal and external. In future, businesses will be bound to use wireless network which is convenient and uses office space economically.

References Laudon, K. C. and Laudon, J. P. (2007). Using internet tools to increase efficiency and productivity. Essentials of Management Information System, (8), 300-410.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Internet Tools for Dirt Bikes by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Sikora A. (2002). Definition and restrictions. Wireless Personal and Local Area Networks, 2-3.


Challenges of NCLB Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents NCLB local implementation in Bay Area

Discussions of NCLB

Proficiency in California

Works Cited

Ravitch notes that it is clear that NCLB remedies are not effective and not working. For instance, students had the offers to attend other schools, but rejected them. They had free tutoring but more than 80 per cent turned it down. Students signed up for tutoring companies, but the systems rarely monitored the quality of their services.

Some tutoring companies just came up to exploit opportunities that NCLB created. Such tutoring companies were recruiting students by offering money and gifts to principals and parents. Some of the companies’ employees even had criminal records (Ravitch 103).

According to Ravitch, the most technical challenge in NCLB is the legislative command. It requires that all children in all schools must be proficient in reading and mathematics by the year 2014.

The legislative states that all must be proficient by then with no regard to other factors, such as students with special needs, students whose first language is not English, students who lack social advantages or are homeless, or those who have the social advantages, but have no interest in school works. All are suppose to achieve proficiency by 2014 or else their teachers will suffer the consequences.

The Congress goal of 100 per cent proficiency by 2014 seems to be an aspiration. Ravitch argues that the goal is unrealistic, and no one believes that all students will achieve proficiency by 2014. She shows that no state or nation as ever achieved such goals. Finn and Hess note that only politicians can give such hollow promises.

Critics see such targets as impossible to achieve, and their consequences are laughable. Educationists believe that such goals are undermining states working hard to improve their education systems. Therefore, there is no need to enforce remedies which are never effective and to assume that they will work is utterly unworkable.

Ravitch suggests that politicians should leave the running of school to educators and teachers who understand what the students require. She believes that incentives and sanctions can only work in private sectors where profit is the highest priority. However, these approaches are not the best for schools. The central ideas of NCLB such as choice and accountability cannot bring effective changes in schools.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In contrary to Ravitch, Guggenheim examines the problem of public schools in the US through the movie, Waiting for Superman. The movie gives precise account from the point of view of students, parents, educators and reformers who are struggling to find genuine and lasting solutions to dying system.

He acknowledges that progress of NCLB has not been successful and federal government has failed fully to fund some of its mandate. However, he points out that NCLB has provided hard information on which schools’ successes and failures can be seen.

Guggenheim believes that NCLB is a reform towards the US public education system. The system has created exemplary public schools which are competing with lottery for admittance. However, only few children will get admission, and in the other neighborhood, some families do not even have a lottery to pin their hopes on for better education.

Guggenheim believes that the noble vision of America’s public school is attainable. Waiting for Superman stresses that all students can learn, and all neighborhoods can have better school. The problem is that parents do not have the truth in order to change the noble vision of America’s public schools. Guggenheim says that every kid can have a chance, and it is possible to fix the problem in public education system (Chilcott).

Another challenge to NCLB is the definition of a highly qualified teacher. The term refers to a bachelor holder, fully licensed/certified to teach, and have demonstrated sufficient subject matter competency. However, the requirements differ with regard to new teachers and to some extent, by the grade level of teaching. Further, this term applies only to teachers teaching in core academic subjects.

The problem arises because there is no standard definition of a highly qualified teacher. NCLB leaves it for states to decide what to include under the core subjects, and special education is not a core academic subject. The requirements of a highly qualified teacher are standard to all states. However, how states determine a highly qualified teacher does vary from state to state.

NCLB local implementation in Bay Area Bay Area has had strong district accountability features with regard to implementation of NCLB. Bay Area holds districts directly answerable for any poor performance. Bay Area system imposes sanctions and warnings in cases of incessant underperformances.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Challenges of NCLB specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Since the inception of NCLB, Bay Area has recorded a few cases of low performances in some schools. The trend emanates from early 1996 when the districts identified low performing schools and recommend ways of improvements. Consequently, Bay Area has had a low number of low performing schools standing at about 2 per cent by the year 2002.

Bay Area support system is intensive and elaborate. The state departments maintain a low profile in NCLB implementations. Bay Area relies on grants from locals, local districts and the schools wise spending of the money. These have made Bay Area ahead of other states in regard to NCLB processes (Mintrop and Rosie 1).

However, the structure of management supporting the implementation of NCLB is weak. Early studies demonstrated that the schools’ reactions and responses to NCLB varied depending on the varying methods and quality of the evaluator. Low performing schools lack sustainable quality interventions and support structures. In response to this, Bay Area has put measures in place to handle problems associated with intervention burdens.

Responses among students to NCLB in Bay Area are promising. Students in low performing schools that did not transfer to other schools tend to score high after a period of more than four years. KIPP schools in Bay Area have strict rules to govern their performance. More often, they perform better than public schools. However, parents and students cannot keep up with KIPP schools demands leading to a high rate of attritions.

During the 2008, 60 per cent of students enrolled in KIPP schools quit between fifth and eighth grade in San Francisco. Besides, long working hours led to teachers’ attritions. Therefore, application of KIPP schools’ model to regular schools might not work.

Bay Area does not allocate additional funding to low-performing public schools. However, the schools receive support and oversight on improvements. Bay Area has designed a system of assigning external assistances to such schools. External team works with schools for a period of one academic year and report on the schools’ progresses to local boards or the Bay Area state departments.

Discussions of NCLB Educators believe that if public schools are given the money and power as in charters schools, then public schools will perform better and stay. They argue that if the federal government continues to invest heavily in charter schools, then charter schools will enroll motivated students and public schools will be the last option for students who never qualified or applied but rejected. The system will force public schools to enroll disadvantaged students, which will ensure poor performance is perpetual in relations to charter schools.

Educators assert that NCLB accountability system is not helping schools. This is because its remedies are too narrow and precise with severe consequences. The problem is that NCLB bases its accountability solely on students’ tests scores to reform public education in America.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Challenges of NCLB by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More They believe that a good accountability system relies on professional judgment rather than tests score. Still, measures of grades, evaluation of teachers, graduation rates, school attendances and students work should rely on professional and scientific measurement systems (Popham 147).

NCLB accountability system should also focus on what districts and schools give in relations to class sizes, learning resources, type of curriculum, and highly qualified teachers. For the credibility of the NCLB, the accountability should have external evaluators to observe quality developments on a regular basis.

Educators say that stakeholders should not see inspection process as a prelude to closing schools or imposing severe punishments but as a way to help them improve. Educators insist that they know what works and what does not work. The solution to NCLB accountability system is to apply the right accountability standards in order to get best results.

Guggenheim shows political forces that conspire to stop educators from replicating successful education reforms in America’s public schools. Consequently, there are no adequate good public schools in America for children who want to attend them. At the same time, the movie shows that the lottery system is a mockery of America’s belief in democracy.

Some parents have had problems with the NCLB testing and accountability systems in America public schools. Parents who did not find favor in the system opposed tests, protested and filed lawsuits but to no avail. Courts rejected such lawsuits and politicians called them anti-testing fanatics.

Parents need good neighborhood schools where they can meet and share factors influencing their children’s education. Public schools create a sense of community among strange students and their parents. Privatization of public schools means losing institutions where parents meet and discuss problems related to solving local problems. They feel that the consequence of privatizing public schools is a peril to neighborhood.

Guggenheim shows that every parent aspires for better education for their kids. Parents see participation in public schools lottery process is a chance for families’ hope and opportunities for a better life. Parents believe that the lottery system denies their children chances to acquire quality education because a relatively small number eventually join the best public schools while the rest wait, or do with poorly performing neighborhood schools.

Parents believe that consequences of NCLB to the education system in America are severe. In 1990s, low performing schools could encounter a mild form of public stigma, suggestions on improvements, administrative focus and scrutiny of a review process. For instance, in California, the state authority threatens teachers and principals with sacking or reassignments. Sometimes, the district can take over the school.

The state does reorganized, close, or assigns schools to management of other educational institutions, or some non-profit based organizations. Parents have opportunities to apply for charter school status or apply for different public schools. They fill that this process disrupts children’s progress. In a state like Maryland, state take-over is the most severe form of sanction to public schools.

Commentators believe that America’s public schools are failure factories where children have virtually no chances of learning. In spite of this, parents send off their children to schools with the high hopes of better education and opportunities in life.

Commentators show concerns that there are well-intended reform programs involving spending of large sums of money and resources, no tangible results have come out since 1970s. They see the NCLB system as a good program but with severe consequences on low-performing schools. For instance, more inner city schools will experience sanctions than schools in rural areas. Difficulties in NCLB lie in the testing, reporting the results and definition of a highly qualified teacher.

Commentators commend the accountability process as a means to unmask schools with traditionally low performances. It will also uncovers the follies in provisions and supports the states and schools give to students with low proficiency in core subjects, students with disabilities, and minority students.

Proficiency in California From the point of view of the American law, the term proficiency depicts a very high level of academic achievement. Federal testing program has used it since 1990s where they test students’ achievements. NCLB 100 per cent proficiency achievement is by the year 2014. Different states define their own proficiency.

All states face dilemma in relation to definition of proficiency. Some states decided to pursue modest goals, but with close attention to accountability, since NCLB is not flexible in its performance standards. Conversely, other states refrained from rigor in their testing system and pursued cognitively complex assessments.

Studies outcomes show that it may be difficult to achieve proficiency within the short time frame NCLB prescribes. Therefore, achieving proficiency require policies and strategies that go beyond tests outcome-based accountability. Ravitch notes that proficiency should be redefined to reflect minimal or functional literacy with designated low passing marks.

California situation regarding low-performing schools is low. Proficiency development in California is still in its nascent stage of development together with support and intervention structures. However, studies show that the first group that enrolled in the program only a quarter met California’s proficiency standards.

In this regard, California based its decisions on the idea that the NCLB law will ease with time, so educations officials decided to increase the number of student they expected to attain their standard proficiency of 2.2 per cent between the year 2002 and 2007 (Hess and Chester 6).

From 2007, California gave an estimated increase of 11 per cent growth per year in order to achieve full proficiency by the year 2014. This was over ambitious and unattainable goal.

However, in the year 2008, researchers from the National Science Foundation demonstrated that almost 100 per cent of California public schools would fail to achieve proficiency by the year 2014 based on their yearly progress. These researchers concluded that due to disaggregation of the scores by students, the lowest performing students will finally determine the proficiency of schools, districts and even states. This is in line with Ravitch proposal to redefine proficiency.

Works Cited Hess, Frederick M. and Chester E. Finn. No Remedy Left Behind: Lessons from a Half-Decade of NCLB. Washington, DC: The AEI Press, 2007. Print.

Mintrop, Heinrich and Rosie Papazian. “Lessons from First-Generation Accountability Systems.” Systemic Strategies to Improve Low-Performing Schools. Vol. 45 (2003): 3-37. Print.

Popham, James. America’s “Failing” Schools: How Parents and Teachers Can Cope With No Child Left Behind. New York: Routledge Falmer, 2004. Print.

Ravitch, Diane. The Death and Life of Great American School System: How Testing and Choices Are Undermining Education. New York: Basic Books, 2011. Print.

Waiting for “Superman”. Dir. Davis Guggenheim. Perf. Lesley Chilcott. Electric Kinney Films, 2010. DVD.


Social Media in Enhancing Social Relationships and Happiness Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Technology Enhancing Relationships

Negative Impacts on Relationships


Works Cited

Introduction A defining characteristic of the 21st century has been the invention of many novel technologies which have changed the way in which human beings operate.

One aspects of human life which has been profoundly impacted by technological advancement is communication. Communication has been transformed by technology and by social networking tools which have become very popular attracting millions of users all over the world.

Arguments have been advanced that social media and technology have a negative impact on relationships since they decrease intimacy. This paper will argue that social media and technology play a crucial role in enhancing social relationships and happiness. The paper will demonstrate that social media helps people to maintain their primary relationships and hence has a positive impact on happiness.

Technology Enhancing Relationships Technology and social media have assisted people to communicate more efficiently and frequently than was possible in the past. This is a good attribute since Communication is the cornerstone on which all successful relationships are built. Social media and technology assist to foster and maintain relationships where the people live in different geographical regions. Through these tools, people from different countries are able to interact and socialize with relative ease.

Mukherjee reveals that technology such as the phone enables her to stay in touch with her sister who lives far away. This contact is very important since it enables them to enhance their deep relationship (413). Without technology and social media, communication between people who live far away would be rare. It would therefore be harder to foster intimacy and the relationships would therefore suffer.

Social media and technology enables people to communicate better by helping them overcome setbacks that are inherent in traditional means of communication. Research indicates that the anonymity which is afforded by online communication gives confidence to people with low self-confidence in real life (Griffiths and Hussain 564).

As such, people who are unlikely to create relationships in the real world can do that through social media tools. Wright suggests that the distance associated with online communication creates a feeling of safety that enables people to make connections that they would not on a face-to-face scenario (433). Social media assists individuals to experiment with positive communication styles such as assertiveness.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Social media may result in the enhancement of social lives by giving people who would never have met an opportunity to do so. While it is true that friendships in social networks may appear shallow, the tools enable people to socialize and keep in touch with friends whom they would really interact with in real life.

People are therefore given the opportunity to maintain friendships which would otherwise wither away without these tools. Social media also enables people to widen their circles of friends since it is easy to meet and befriend new people online. In the online environment, relationships can be strong since they are based on interests and personal attributes rather than physical attributes or even social standings (Albrechtslund 25). These relationships can then grow to become strong primary relationships.

Negative Impacts on Relationships Social media assists in the forging of social bonds. Even so, the bonds forged online are not as strong as those made through face-to-face contact. Wright reveals that the internet results in people declaring friendships on the basis of very flimsy connections (433).

This is true since sites like Facebook enable people to be friends with people whom they do not communicate with or even share any interests with. In addition to this, social media results in the creation of many shallow relationships as opposed to having a few meaningful relationships in the real world. The intimacy that is present in the primary relationships is therefore lost because of social media.

There is a major concern that social media and technology poses a threat to the traditional fabric of effective communication. This threat is manifest in a number of ways. To begin with, social media reduces the time that would be spent on face-to-face communication. Wright asserts that the more time people spend engaged in their online relationship the less time they spend in their real relationships (433).

The real relationships therefore suffer as people use time and effort on the many online relationships which are mostly shallow. Another way in which social media negatively affects traditional communication is because online communication makes excessive usage of shorthand and informal speech patterns. Wright states that such a trend may affect how we relate to each other in the offline world with negative effects (433).

Conclusion Social networking tools have gained great relevance in contemporary society, and are today an integral part of communication for many people. Without social media and technology, interactions between people would be limited and this would result in less happiness.

We will write a custom Essay on Social Media in Enhancing Social Relationships and Happiness specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From the arguments presented in this paper, it is clear that technology has had a great impact on human communication. From this paper, it can be authoritatively stated that social media and technology have had a positive impact on communication and by extension the relationships between individuals.

Works Cited Albrechtslund, Anders. “Online social networking as participatory surveillance”. First Monday, 13.3 (2008): 23-27.

Griffiths, Mark and Hussain Zaheer. “Use of Massively Multi-Player Online Role-Playing Games: A Pilot Study”. Int J Ment Health Addiction 7.5 (2009): 563–571.

Mukherjee, Bharati. “Two ways to belong in America.” Patterns for college writing. Ed. Kirzner, Laurie and Mandell Stephhen. Boston: Bedford/St. Marin Press, 2001. Print.

Wright, Alex. “Friending, Ancient or Otherwise.” Patterns for college writing. Ed. Kirzner, Laurie and Mandell Stephhen. Boston: Bedford/St. Marin Press, 2001. Print.


Underlying Issues in IT Security Report college essay help

Table of Contents Business Continuity Plan

Disaster Recovery Plan

Acceptable Use Policy

Reference List

Business Continuity Plan Simply put, a business continuity plan (BCP) entails a set of proactive activities that assists an organization to restore normal business operations under challenging or extreme circumstances (Upper Mohawk, Inc., n.d.).

An effective BCP is mainly used to identify a firm’s exposure to internal and external challenges, and to comprehensively synthesize all organizational assets with a view to provide effective prevention and recovery for the enterprise, while sustaining competitiveness and value system integrity.

Consequently, the major purpose of BCP is to enable organizations to continue with their operations under adverse or challenging situations such as fire outbreaks, theft, vandalism and other damages to critical infrastructure (Hewitt Packard, n.d).

Available literature demonstrates that the foremost step in the creation of BCP is to obtain management commitment not only because the plan forms a critical component of the strategic business plan, but also because it requires appropriate budgetary allocation.

The next step/process revolves around the identification of critical business functions and other ancillary business functions that may require protection. After this functions are identified, “…a risk assessment and a business impact analysis should be performed for each of the business functions and then, if appropriate, for the infrastructure supporting them” (Hewitt Packard, n.d., p. 3).

The next step involves communicating the information generated to senior management to give them the opportunity to confirm and then categorize the criticality of each business function and, afterwards, contact the people charged with the responsibility of writing the plan that will ensure the critical functions continue or are recovered when disaster strikes (Hewitt Packard, n.d.).These people form the business process core teams.

Disaster Recovery Plan According to Hewitt Packard (n.d.), a disaster recovery plan (DRP) “…is reactive and usually focuses on recovering the computing environment” (p. 1). This implies that although an effective DRP may contain some components which may be used to harden or reinforce the information technology infrastructure, the plan’s foremost purpose is to assist organizations recover from damage to critical IT infrastructure.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Available literature demonstrates that although most DRPs are focused on addressing data processing related activities, they could also be used to address other areas of operation that are outside the scope of data processing but which may affect the enterprise at any given time (Wold, 1997).

As is the case with the business continuity plan, the creation of a successful DRP involves a number of steps. However, as observed by Bahan (2003), any effective process of creating a workable DRP must revolve around the definition of “…rules, processes, and disciplines to ensure that the critical business processes will continue to function if there is a failure of one or more of the information processing or telecommunications resources upon which their operations depends” (p. 3).

Consequently, the first step in the creation of DRP should be to establish a planning group composed of key individuals from each business unit. The next step should be to perform risk assessments and audits, and afterwards establish priorities for the various core applications and networks.

The next step involves the development of recovery strategies, which should then be stored in a well prepared, easily understandable inventory or any other documentation process. Afterwards, the team should develop verification criteria and procedures in readiness to implement the plan (Bahan, 2003).

Acceptable Use Policy An acceptable use policy (AUP) is a set of regulations applied by the management of an information network, website or computer system to limit the ways in which those who are allowed to access the sites can use them (Ruighaver et al, 2010).

An AUP is an important document for the reason that it sets the regulatory standards through which people can engage the use of the huge amounts of data and information found in the computer networks and websites without trumping on the rights and privileges of the owners of these sources of information, the organizations they work for, or the people they work with (Ruighaver et al, 2010).

In other words, the AUP specifically sets out the rules of acceptable uses, rules of acceptable behavior while accessing the various databases, and important access privileges.

We will write a custom Report on Underlying Issues in IT Security specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Organizations must reign in on their employees to adhere to rules set out in various AUPs to avoid being sucked into legal challenges and hefty penalties that are associated with noncompliance to the rules. These rules are also critical in securing critical information is not lost to hackers. For instance, some organizations include a rule that prohibits their employees from revealing their passwords to other people in an attempt to protect critical information from being stolen by hackers.

Additionally, these policies are critical in ensuring that the organization’s IT infrastructure is not attacked by malicious programs (e.g., viruses, worms and Trojan horses) by prohibiting employees from entering suspected sites or exporting suspected software into the organization’s computer systems. Above all, the policies ensure the employees do what they are supposed to do during working hours – working for the firm (Ruighaver et al, 2010).

Reference List Bahan, C. (2003). The disaster recovery plan. SANS Institute. Web.

Hewitt Packard. (n.d.). Developing a business continuity plan. Web.

Ruighaver, A.B., Maynard, S.B.,


Collective Action and the Development of Interest Groups Essay best essay help: best essay help

Interest groups face many obstacles – including both barriers to their formation and threats to their survival – yet they have proliferated during certain periods in American politics. Interest groups exist to cater to various social, economic and political needs and their size and influence depends on their ability to impact society.

Groups are different and might be formed to pursue individual interest or corporate interests. Largely, the main drive is to influence governmental actions if they feel that the government is either neglecting them or acting in a manner likely to be detrimental to their wall being. Recent times have seen a continued growth in interest groups especially lobby groups which exert considerable influence on legislation and the conduct of the executive.

Interest groups have developed over a long period of time and have faced several obstacles in their progression and acceptance as vital components of our society. One form of interest group, unions, have faced several hurdles due to resistance by companies to have their members unionized based on the fear that it will drive up their costs. This resistance still exists even in the 21st century as evidenced by practices from retail giants like Wal-Mart to frustrate efforts from their staff to unionize.

Other interest groups especially lobby groups use political advocacy to attain their objectives and rely on certain freedoms guaranteed to individuals and entities to do so. The 20th century and 21st century has seen increased governmental regulation on contributions made to political parties and the relation of interest groups with government officials. This has limited the effectiveness of interest groups to pursue their collective interests and this trend is likely to continue.

The Development of Congress The United States Congress is one of the three arms of the federal government charged with enacting laws and executive oversight. Provided for in the constitution, the bicameral chamber has undergone tremendous changes to become what it is today. The founding fathers created an institution with the lower House of Representative having directly elected members and the upper Senate drawing its members from State Assembly nominated senators.

Increased bipartisanship led to a dreadlock in formulation of polices and this occasioned the need to amend the constitution and have senators elected through popular vote by the populace. One thing is clear, the current congress as it is constituted is very different with the one envisioned by the founding fathers in the original constitution.

Representatives were traditionally elected to represent populations of around 30,000 but the current ones represent over 500,000 in some congressional districts. Congress have created and continued to enforce a ceiling on the number of representatives despite the continued growth in population.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This shows that Congress lacks the ability to approach the issue of representation without partisanship. In addition, most people agree that partisanship have increased in the 21st century and threatens to derail the enactment and implementation of necessary reforms.

Representatives and senators vote largely along party lines as they fear breaking rank and potentially loosing their reelection bids. A partisan Congress has continued to exert itself over the executive and this poses a danger for our society since disharmony among government branches is bad for growth. Congress must rise above partisanship and put the welfare of their people first and the interests of their parties a distant second.

The Constitution and Modern Presidencies Although the constitution has always exercised a powerful influence on the American presidency, the office has also developed in ways the framers could not anticipate and might not applaud. The provisions of Article II of the US constitution grant several powers to the President of the United States as head of the Executive and the leader of the nation.

These include the right to command the military, nominate and appoint officials among the cabinet members, ambassadors and judges, make treaties and be involved in enacting legislations necessary for the carrying out of his mandate.

Nonetheless, there are other inherent powers that presidents derive from the constitution which are not directly articulated by the constitution. This means that a president exercises power as directly granted by the constitution or assuming powers implied by the constitution in accordance to emerging needs of the nation.

This raises the question whether the presidency today operate in a manner that the framers would support? The answer is both negative and positive and depends on the circumstance a sitting president invokes certain powers beyond those clearly stipulated by the constitution. Congress has oversight over the Executive but president’s have used situations like terror attacks to override this oversight and take drastic and costly actions.

While the president has a responsibility to protect the nation, some have called into question some of the wars which president’s continue to drag America into. When the cost is bigger than the reward, it is time to restrict presidential power to what the constitution spells out and increase oversight over the presidency. Where such is not applicable, the president should seek Congressional approval first to safeguard the interest of the nation.

We will write a custom Essay on Collective Action and the Development of Interest Groups specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Animal Experimentation/ Testing on a Utilitarianism View Essay (Critical Writing) scholarship essay help

Animal experimentation is the process by which live animals are put through various tests. They are introduced to certain conditions that cannot be exposed to human beings for fear of the complications that are unknown and may result to death in the end. The experiments are run on various animals such as guinea pigs, rats and even monkeys.

They are used in the place of human beings because they display genomes almost similar to that of the human beings. There is still another reason why animal experiment is carried out and this is to find out about various characteristics of the animals themselves and how they may react to various circumstances (Smart


Water Pollution: Causes, Effects and Possible Solutions Expository Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

Causes and effects of Water Pollution

Possible Solutions for Water Pollution


Introduction Water pollution is any form of activity that may lead to contamination or addition of pollutants into water body. It is an important issue to the world to put into consideration because human beings need clean water. Other living creatures need good water as well.

Therefore, water is a very important requirement in the daily activities of people, and it is a very useful resource in industries, hospitals, schools and even in food manufacturing companies. This is why clean water is required in all the places to make sure the people and all the living creatures in the planet live a good and healthy life.

Water pollution cases have been increasing in the contemporary world, despite all the efforts to reduce it. Despite all these efforts, the question remains as to what steps the world should take to end this problem of water pollution.

Causes and effects of Water Pollution Harmful and toxic pollutants cause most cases of water pollution. The pollutants may cause the water to change both its physical or chemical nature by causing mixed reactions with its contents. One of the major pollutants is waste chemicals from manufacturing industries or factories.

Most of these institutions are careless with this matter of water pollution. This is actually a very serious matter because most of the people concerned know the effects of this activity but they end up ignoring it. Moreover, these wastes contain very harmful and toxic chemicals that may cause health problems to human beings and other living creatures in the water body.

Another major pollutant is sewage. Sewage dumped to various water bodies such as rivers, lakes or sea is a direct harm to the nearby occupants, given that it is there main source of water. This will mean that these people will lack clean water and will have one option of drinking the dirty water. The toxic contents of the sewage may also harm or kill aquatic animals present in that particular water body. Indeed, this is a government concern, though it seems that it is being neglected all the time.

Oil spillage to water bodies is another cause of water pollution, as it leads to more harmful effects to the living creatures and human beings around. Oil spillage will definitely affect the health of aquatic organisms, as well as other living things dependent on the water body being polluted. Garbage and other toxic substances are also the other causes of water pollution. All these directly affect human health and the natural environment in the surrounding areas. It is therefore up to the government to put more efforts to reduce these problems.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Possible Solutions for Water Pollution One of the best solutions to water pollution is the enactment and implementation of rules against those industries and institutions that carelessly dump waste chemicals, garbage, and other toxic pollutants to the water bodies without considering human life and the natural habitat around. The government would need to be very strict on this matter.

People should also avoid dumping litter, household waste, or garbage to water bodies. Individuals should also avoid throwing dirty and harmful substances to their water lines that drain to sewage. Individual farmers must try to use the right amount of fertilizer when applying chemicals, as excess amount of fertilizer may drain to the nearby water body.

Conclusion Water pollution issues are currently increasing in the world because of neglect of the governments and ignorance of the people. Water pollution issue should not only be issue to the government, but also all the people in the society. Therefore, people should join hands together with the government to reduce this world’s major problem. Nevertheless, water is a very important resource in the world, and it should therefore be kept clean and safe.


Understanding addiction Expository Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

It is difficult to understand the complexities that lead people to addiction to drugs and alcohol. Many people assume that individuals who are addicted lack moral principles or the intention to leave drugs.

Ideally, a person who is addicted has a complex disease and a lot of effort has to be made to change that person. Due to the fact that drugs make the brain adapt to it’s routinely use, it makes it difficult for the user to quit drugs. Despite the difficulty in leaving drugs, some scientific advances have been made to make it possible for drug users to quit drug abuse.

Abuse of drugs and addiction pose as a big danger to the stability of individuals in the society. In fact, in the United States alone, the cumulative substance abuse and related damages to the economy is approximately six hundred billion yearly. As much as this statistics show the extend of the damages caused by drug addiction, they do not represent the actual damages caused to the family such as separation in the family, school dropping, family conflicts and child mistreatment.

Addiction is a persistent urge which makes a person’s brain to always want to use and look for specific compulsive drug without any consideration to the consequences to the individual or people around them. The first intention of using psychoactive drugs is voluntary and as time goes by, the brain gets used to it and an individual lacks self control and the will to resist its usage.

Modern scientific approaches have been made available to enable drugs users leave this trend. The proponents of this medication propose that routine medications that go along with behavior changes need to be administered to ensure successful recovery of the people affected. Just like other chronic diseases for example diabetes and asthma, addiction can be treated successfully.

Drugs have chemical components that disrupt the communication channels of the brain to an extent that it affects the way the brain processes and disseminates information. The chemicals present in the drugs disrupt the functioning of the brain in two ways mainly through imitating the natural functioning of the brain and overworking the circuit of the brain. Drugs like bhang and heroin have chemical components similar to those produced by the brain.

This resemblance enables the components of the drugs to deceive the receptors of the brain by sending wrong messages. Drugs like cocaine release these chemicals in large amounts disrupting the normal circulation of the brain chemicals needed for normal functioning. The effect of this on the system by the drugs is adaptations to the drugs which make people repeat the behaviors induced by the drugs. Prolonged use of the drugs cause harmful effects to other parts of the brain functioning.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some people become addicted while others do not. The explanations given by researchers for this difference are varied. They argue that it depends on the individual’s biological functioning, environment they socialize in and the age of an individual. For instance, factors that determine the extent of addiction of an individual are greatly determined by the genes he or she was born with and environmental influences.

In addition, gender and ethnicity plays a critical role. Apart from biological influences, a person’s immediate environment and social economic status count towards the vulnerability of the individuals. Addiction to drugs can be prevented despite the difficulty that can be encountered. As long as the young people are adequately educated on the negative effects of the drugs, they can strive to leave the habit.


Causes and Effects of Smoking Research Paper scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Cultural Influences

Social Influences

Psychological causes

Effects of Smoking

Works Cited

Smoking is the habit where burned tobacco or cannabis is inhaled. Smoking is mostly practiced for recreation purposes. Smoking mainly involves smoking of cigarettes. Other methods that are employed for smoking tobacco include use of pipes as well as cigars. Smoking is considered as the most common method of recreation drug use.

Tobacco smoking is considered as the leading method of smoking. Other forms of drugs that are also smoked include cannabis and opium. The habit of smoking is approximated to have started as early as 5000BC and was practiced by different societies across the world. Smoking in early generations was usually being done for religious ceremonies, cleansing rituals as well as offerings to deities.

Nowadays, people smoke mainly for recreation reasons. There are many reasons why people smoke nowadays. However, these reasons can be divided into three main categories; psychological social, physical and cultural reasons. The physical causes that trigger smoking concern the human body. Since nicotine that is contained in cigarette is an addictive substance, the bodies of those who smoke feel the urge to take it in as it has a calming effect. In many cases, such people smoke whenever they feel jaded lonesome or anxious.

Just a little amount of nicotine is known to make the body of the smoker get energized and improve attentiveness when absorbed by the lungs or intestines. The calming as well as the stimulating effect that accompanies smoking tobacco is linked to the nicotine present in tobacco that stimulates the brain and some nerves that increase the heart rate, blood pressure subsequently, increasing respiration.

Cultural Influences In many cases, the media which includes the newspapers, television and radio stations has associated smoking to glamour pleasure and adventure. As a matter of fact, most classic movies present smoking as positive and strong cultural images. Moreover, we are all subject to advertising that intentionally upholds the habit of smoking and makes positive relations with brands. Unfortunately, these images do not show the negative effects of smoking (Psychological Effects of Smoking 3).

Social Influences On the other hand, social influences are highly attributed with peer pressure which is a social ill that is hard to defy. When one has a friend who smokes, he/she is likely to be influenced into the habit if not careful. Consequently, it becomes very hard to quit the habit as it may seem awkward as it may be seen as condemnation of their routine. As a matter of fact, smoking strengthens the friendship between smokers.

Psychological causes There are various psychological reasons that can lead to smoking. For instance, the universal desire for expression is a major reason why some people smoke. Smokers claim that smoking of cigarettes helps in enhancing one’s mood.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some studies indicate that it is true that smoking of cigarettes causes some calming effects in additional to stimulating effects. The effects of cigarettes smoking varies with the amount of nicotine present in the blood stream. Most smokers have realized that the effects of smoking cigarettes depends on the quantity of nicotine present in the blood stream.

Subsequently, smokers either take shorter or longer puffs in order to realize the desired effects. Smoking is associated with a feeling of euphoria, calmness as well as a perception of performance enhancement. Studies show that smoking really causes improvements in performance. The enhancement in reaction and processing time after smoking cigarettes results because of nicotine that is present in a cigarette which is a psychomotor stimulant.

Unfortunately, the enhancement effects of cigarette smoking is known to last only for a short time, although smokers continue to smoke believing that they will continue receiving the enhancement effects from cigarettes. Some people continue smoking as a result of the psychological addiction that is associated with nicotine that is present in cigarettes. Those people that have smoked for a long period continue their smoking practice as a means of relieving their stressful situations.

When smokers are tired, they opt to smoke in order to receive the stimulating effects from cigarettes. The psychological effects that are associated with smoking are the one that makes smokers to experience a lot of challenge while stopping the smoking habit. Although the physical effects disappears fourteen days after stopping smoking, the psychological smoking effects are known to last for years after quitting smoking (Psychological Effects of Smoking 5).

Effects of Smoking Despite the high rate of smoking that is witnessed in the contemporary world. Smoking is associated with various adverse effects. For instance, smoking of tobacco is known to cause gum diseases, yellowing of teeth as well as teeth decay. Similarly, the tar that is contained in tobacco is very dangerous.

The tar is known to cause discoursing of teeth as well as triggering throat cancer. Smoking is highly attributed with narrowing of the blood-vessels which subsequently trigger high blood pressure and stroke. Nicotine that is present in tobacco increases the pulse rate of the heart that overworks the heart. Similarly, tobacco smoking is associated with carbon monoxide that results to accumulation of cholesterol deposits in the artery blood vessels that cause blood pressure and eventually stroke.

Equally, lack of blood circulation in limbs as a result of accumulation of cholesterol in the blood vessels can lead to amputation. Smoking of tobacco triggers bronchitis. This is because smoke from tobacco possesses hydrogen cyanide and other dangerous chemicals that attack the lining of the bronchi; consequently, inflaming it’s lining that increase the probability of someone contracting bronchitis (Harmful Effects of Smoking par. 2-4).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Causes and Effects of Smoking specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Apart from health related issues, smoking is also linked to some negative social effects. Smoking is known to strain social interaction between the smokers and non-smokers. The bad smell that is associated with smoking puts off many non-smokers from establishing close relations with smokers. Similarly, the health effects that are associated with secondary smoking also put off non-smokers.

Nevertheless, the contemporary generation has adapted appropriate smoking habits, nowadays, smokers do not smoke in public areas, but smoke in isolated places in order to prevent exposing non-smokers to the dangerous effects that are associated with secondary smoking.

Moreover, smoking has been noted to make some people to steal. Stealing in order to get money to buy cigarettes happens to those smokers that are already addicted to smoking and are not earning to afford money to buy cigarettes (Harmful Effects of Smoking par.6).

People smoke due to various reasons that range from social; cultural as well as psychological. Smoking is known to have very detrimental health consequences. For instance, smokers are more vulnerable to suffer from cancer, blood pressure, stroke as well as bronchitis. Thus, people ought to be well informed about the dangers of smoking and those that are smoking, but willing to stop smoking being assisted according.

Works Cited ”Harmful Effects of Smoking.” .n.p., 15 December, 2011. Web.

“Psychological Effects of Smoking.” n.p.,12 February, 2004. Web.


Psychological Effects of Technology Use in Teens Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Abstract



Works Cited

Abstract In recent years, electronic games, home computers, and the internet have taken up an important place in our lives. This paper gives a review of the research on the impact of home computer use on the development of teens. Time use data is presented along with a brief discussion of factors, which influence the time spent on computers as well as the activities engaged in it.

Research on the influence of computer use on cognitive skill and academic development, social development and associations, and perceptions of reality and violent behavior will also be presented. The critical role in the lives of adolescents is brought out using data obtained from various academic sources. The paper concludes with observations and recommendations for future study in order to better understand the rising impact of computers on teens.

Introduction The time is now ideal to review the effects of technology use on teen development. Over the past few years, a growing number of U.S. households have added electronic games, home computers, and the Internet to existing technologies-the telephone, radio TV, and the stereo system-that take up much of children’s time. Indeed, estimates show that 60% of U.S. households with teen children have home computers and 61% of the households with computers have access to Internet services (Cole 30).

Surveys of parents suggest that they acquire home computers and subscribe to Internet access to provide learning opportunities for their children, and to equip them for the ‘information-age.’ It is obvious that many parents are increasingly concerned about the impact of the Internet on their children and express disappointment over their children using the computer for activities like playing games and surfing the Internet to download lyrics of popular songs and pictures of rock stars.

However, parents usually consider time wasted on the computer preferable to time spent before the TV, and even regard children without computers to be at a disadvantage (Cole 31).

While the research on whether computers are a positive influence in teen’s lives is mostly vague and indefinite, some initial findings are beginning to emerge. Understanding the effect of computer use requires good estimates of both the time children spend on computers and the time taken away from other useful activities.

It is estimated that teen’s spend approximately two hours a day on computers, including video games (Dworetzky 12). The same estimates show that among the teens who had access to the Internet at home, usage averaged about 3h/week during weeks when they used it, and over 10% used it more than 16 h/week (Dworetzky 13). This shows that teens are heavier users of the internet and all its services compared to their parents.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Many computer applications, mostly computer games, have design features that shift the balance of required information processing, from verbal to visual. The much admired action games, which are spatial, iconic, and energetic, have things going on at various locations.

The suite of proficiency that children acquire by playing such games can equip them with the guidance wheels for computer literacy, and can help prepare them for science and technology, where majority of the activity depends on manipulating images on a screen. Another skill that is brought to life in computer games is what is popularly referred to as iconic or analog representation or simply the ability to read images such as pictures and diagrams. Indeed, images are often more important than words in many computer games.

In one study conducted in the U.S. (Roberts 50), it was established that playing a computer game shifts representational styles from verbal to iconic. Iconic representation is crucial to scientific and technical thinking and one can therefore confidently say that technology has assisted teens in the area of scientific learning.

Another impact of technology on the psychological development of teens is in the area of visual attention. One skill that is involved in playing computer and video games is divided visual attention, or rather the skill of keeping track of numerous things at the same time.

Over the years, there have been studies carried out to gauge the effect of video game expertise on strategies for divided visual attention among teens.

In one of these studies (Roberts 51), divided attention was measured by measuring participants’ response time to two events of varying probabilities at two locations on a computer screen. In the study, it was established that participants who were expert computer game players had quicker response times than learners. Playing an action game was also found to improve strategies for keeping track of events at multiple locations.

Overall, the study established that more skilled video game players had enhanced attentional skills than less skilled players. From the results of this study, it is therefore adequate to conclude that computer and video games can help in developing the skills for occupations that require expertise in divided visual attention such as instrument flying, military activities and air traffic control (Roberts 52).

We will write a custom Essay on Psychological Effects of Technology Use in Teens specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Communication with peers has an impact on a teen’s interpersonal skills, their poise, and social competence. By the time children are approaching adolescence, they tend to spend as much time with their peers as they do with adults.

Because of the solitary nature of most computer activities, concerns have been raised that children might develop ‘electronic friendships’ with the machine, instead of relationships with their peers thus hindering the development of interpersonal skills. The fact that one-fifth of teens are believed to have a computer in their bedroom (Roberts 53) indicates that the computer may in most cases be used in isolation.

Indeed, Roberts (54) found that, among junior high and high school students, over 60% of all computer time is spend alone. However, some of this time is spent in developing electronic friendships through email and social sites such as Facebook and Twitter. From this analysis, it is therefore clear that computers have aided in fostering interpersonal skills among teens.

Research indicates that in families with access to the internet, use of the computer to stay in touch with others (via e-mail, chat rooms, etc.) is an increasingly popular activity, especially among teens. In a study conducted in 1997, (Griffiths 37) teens said that after completing their homework, use of email and participating in chat rooms was their most frequent activities on the internet.

Actually, the study established that teens were more interested in interpersonal communications via electronic mail than information acquisition via the internet.

Majority of the keep-in-touch communications described by teens in this study involved small talk-gossip and news of the day, with a here and now flavor. These communications exist for the pleasure they bring other than for their instrumental benefits. In the study, one of the teenage girl who was keeping in touch with a pen pal she met online, described the small-talk nature of her conversation with him as “stupid stuff-what’s happening in his life; what’s happening in my life.”

In the same study, it was also established that increased communication through e-mailing, chatting in chartrooms, and IM was associated with decreased depression among teens. The study recommended an increase of the use of e-mailing to enhance teens social support and ultimately their mental health (Griffiths 38).

Although most of the psychological effects of technology on teens are positive, it would be an illusion to claim that there are no negative effects associated with technology. One of the negative effects is on the perceptions of reality. In most cases, the replicated worlds created by electronic games, computers and more recently, the internet is widening the extent of teen’s experiences to simulation (Wiegman 367).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Psychological Effects of Technology Use in Teens by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Through electronic games, teens interact with simulated characters and creatures. In order to effectively accomplish this, the teens assume multiple identities to interact with strangers (and even robots) in the virtual worlds of MUDs and chat rooms. At an extreme, real life is now reduced to two letters, ‘rl,’ and real world experiences are simply a window on the computer screen.

One impact of this ‘blurring’ of reality and virtual reality may be that teens will have more difficulty in differentiating between what is real and what is virtual. Additionally, the teens may become desensitized to behaviors perpetrated in artificial and simulated worlds, such as aggression, violence and killing. Although the research on the effects of playing violent computer games is limited, preliminary evidence proves that playing such games may lead to increased aggressiveness and hostility in teens (Wiegman 369).

Conclusions Teenagers use the computer more than young children or parents. Although playing specific computer games has immediate positive effects on iconic and attentional skills used by the game, there is still need for more research to determine if long-term computer and internet use (both game and nongame) can lead to long-term improvements in cognitive skills and academic achievement. While much of the time on computers is spent alone, regulated computer use does not have negative effects on teen’s social skills and activities.

On the contrary, e-mail and the internet may actually help maintain interpersonal communication and sustain social relationships. It has been proved beyond doubt that there is a relation between violent games and teen’s aggression. Although further research is still needed, preliminary surveys indicate that the increasing dominance of simulated worlds (vs. real world experiences) in teen’s daily experiences has an impact on their developing identities and sense of reality.

Works Cited Cole, Michael. Cultural Psychology: A Once and Future Discipline. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press, 1996. 30-41. Print.

Dworetzky, John. Child Development. Saint Paul: West Publishing Company, 1996. 12-16. Print.

Griffiths, Michael. “Friendship and Social Development in Children and Adolescents: The impact of electronic Technology.” Educational and Child Psychology 14.25 (1997): 37-41. Print.

Roberts, Donald. Kids and Media at the New Millennium: A Comprehensive National Analysis of Children’s Media Use. Menlo Park: Kaiser Family Foundation. 50-61. Print.


Poems Copmarison Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Analysis of Do not go gentle into that good night

Analysis of Let Evening Come

Analysis of the Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock

Analysis of Disillusionment of Ten O’clock

Analysis of Design

Works Cited

Analysis of Do not go gentle into that good night The main theme in the poem “Do not go gentle into that good night” by Dylan Thomas, is an argument to fight against the encroaching arms of death. While the word “fight” is never actually utilized despite its similarity to the meter of the poem, words such as rage, burn and rave are all utilized in such a way that it portrays a fight against death itself.

In order to better understanding the overall context of the poem, it is important to examine the last stanza which states “and you, my father, there on the sad height, Curse, bless me now with your fierce tears, I pray, Do not go gentle into that good night” (Thomas, 1).

From this, the entire context of the poem becomes clear wherein it appears that the author wrote the poem as an appeal to his father who is near the death in that he wanted his father to continue to live and to fight.

The author phrases his arguments to fight by mentioning various types of praiseworthy behavior by “wise mean”, “good men”, “grave men” and wild men” (Thomas, 1). This is one of the symbolisms of the poem wherein the author attempts to parallel the traits of such individuals and attributes them to his father in order to convince him to live on.

This is seen in the use of the phrase “Do not go gentle into that good night” and “Rage, rage against the dying of the light” after each description of each type of man as if to imply that men of such character and distinction would not allow themselves to die so easily (Thomas, 1). This is a particularly interesting motif that the author is using since it shows that he is not ready to let his father go just yet.

This may be due to unresolved issues, the love of a son for his father or an assortment of other factors that are not evident within the poem itself. Other interesting symbols utilized throughout the poem are references to day and night as well as lightning and meteors. This is particularly interesting to take a note of since such methods of symbolism imply that the author acknowledges that all life must end yet before it does it must do so in a spectacular fashion.

For example, a day does not transit into night without a bright sunset; lightning is a brief yet brilliant flash of light while a meteor is a blazing trail of fire that lights of the night sky. This seems to imply that the author wants to have one last talk with this father, that he wants him to go out blazing like the sun, like a meteor or like lightning.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The poem seemingly emphasizes that his father should go down blazing and fighting and not apparently bed stricken as derived from the phrase “there on the sad height” which seemingly implies being placed on a hospital bed (Thomas, 1). Overall, the poem is an excellent piece of literature that portrays a son’s love for this father and how he wanted to have more time with him.

Analysis of Let Evening Come When reading the poem “Let Evening Come” by Jane Kenyon, at first glance, it seems to be a poem emphasizing her desire for night to come however after several readings it becomes apparent that the term “evening” is symbolic of the coming of death. This interpretation becomes apparent after examining the line “let the cricket take up chafing as a woman takes up her needles and her yarn” due to the fact that a woman taking up yarn is symbolic of a person entering old age and taking up knitting as a hobby (Kenyon, 1).

Not only that, the term “crickets take up chafing” can also be interpreted as the time in which crickets stop making noises with their legs which either happens at night or when they are dead (Kenyon, 1). Throughout the poem, it becomes apparent that the author is not afraid of death and the reason for this is based on the last stanza which states “God does not leave us comfortless” (Kenyon, 1).

When taking this particular phrase and combining it with references to “a bottle in a ditch, a scoop of oats or air in the lung”, these seemingly inconsequential aspects can actually be combined and interpreted as being symbolic of God’s all encompassing love (Kenyon, 1). In that, there is no person that God does not love and as such even if death should come we should not be afraid for God is with us.

This I believe is the main theme of the poem and the message that the author is trying to impart to readers. It must also be noted that unlike other poems which speak of the coming of death this poem does not have the same haunting feel of regret or dismay rather when reading it what becomes apparent is a feeling of acceptance of the coming of death that the author imparts in each stanza and phrase and as such shows how her belief in the love of God keeps the fear of death away.

Analysis of the Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock When examining this particular work by T.S. Elliot, one cannot help but think that the author wrote it while he was drunk or not in his right state of mind. It is riddled with random musings, thoughts and ideas that apparently turn and tumble upon each other until they seemingly coalesce into a stanza that barely makes logical sense.

It is hard to determine whether the author is being literal in some aspects or symbolic in others with thoughts and ideas seemingly implying one thing in one interpretation yet meaning another in yet another interpretation. What is evident though is that the “voice” of the poem, J. Alfred Prufrock, is apparently trying to tell a woman that he has a distinct romantic interest in her yet it is hard to determine whether he is talking to her already or to himself and reveling in his own imaginary world.

We will write a custom Essay on Poems Copmarison specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One line in the poem “the taking of toast and tea” and the stanza it is in seemingly implies that the character of Prufrock is on his way to tea and is going to “talk” to the woman so to speak informing her of his interest (Eliot, 1).

Taking this particular method of interpretation into consideration, it can be assumed that the jumbled and at times chaotic method of writing throughout the poem may in fact be the author’s way of imitating the jumble of thoughts and words that goes through a man’s head as he is about to tell the woman he likes that he likes her.

If this is so, then the author has fully captured the chaos that would normally be in a man’s mind and as such the lucidity and sheer randomness of the way in which ideas are formed and stated starts to make sense. In fact, it might just be that the inspiration for this particular poem is derived from the author’s own experiences in telling the woman he loves that he likes her.

Analysis of Disillusionment of Ten O’clock The poem “Disillusionment of Ten O’clock” by Wallace Stevens is actually full of various metaphors and symbolic interpretations that speak volumes more than what is apparent in the poem. The main message that the author is trying to convey in the poem is that many people live hollowed out lives that lack color and make them seem like the walking dead.

For example, the phrase “the houses are haunted by white night-gowns, none are green, or purple with green rings, or green with yellow rings, or yellow with blue rings” is meant to symbolize the fact that the people who live within the house are like the walking dead “cold, lifeless and utter devoid of life” (Stevens, 1).

This comparison is further emphasized by the statement that says that the white night gowns are totally devoid of color. In this case, the color white symbolizes the bleak empty existences that such people live while the colors (green, blue, or purple) represent what is missing in their life such as joy, happiness and adventure.

The author does end on a hopeful note in the end though when he mentions the sailor who dreams of baboons, periwinkles and catching tigers in red weather (Stevens, 1). This is emphasize that not all individuals in world today are bleak, empty and devoid of imagination but rather there still exists hope for those with imagination and a sense of adventure.

Analysis of Design In the poem “Design” by Robert Frost, readers are treated to the musings of the author regarding the grand design of all things and an implied question as to whether or not a grand entity shapes our destiny or if we ourselves shape our future. This evident by the first lines of the poem “found a dimpled spider, fat and white, on a white heal-all, holding up a moth, like a white piece of rigid satin cloth” (Frost, 1).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Poems Copmarison by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From this, it can be seen that the author has created a scene where there is a white spider, on a white flower holding a white moth and spends the rest of the poem inquiring whether even in something so small there is a grand design that placed the spider in the right position to catch the right kind of prey.

From this, Frost implies that all of us may be part of some greater design with coincidences appearing that may not be coincidences at all but rather are part of a plan for our lives. In this, Frost questions whether we have any free will at all and in fact are nothing more than moving parts in some great machine, being moved at the whim of some all powerful entity.

Works Cited Eliot, Thomas. “The Love song of J. Alfred Prufrock.” Bartleby. N.p., 1920. Web.

Frost, Robert. “Design.” Poem Hunter. N.p., 2003. Web.

Kenyon, Jane. “Let evening come.” American Poems. N.p., 2005. Web.

Stevens, Wallace. ” Disillusionment of Ten O’clock.” Poem Hunter. N.p., 2003. Web.

Thomas, Dylan. “Do not go gentle into that good night.” New Directions, N.I.. Web.


The Historical Development of Fine Arts in Korea from 1950 to Present Research Paper essay help

Introduction Korean fine art entails different forms of art that originate from Korea such as pottery, calligraphy, literature, painting, music among other genres, which are characteristically identified by their bold colors, surface decorations, and natural forms. The history of Korean art spans back to the Stone Age period with the introduction of votive sculptures and petro glyphs, which can be dated back to the Neolithic art, Bronze Age art, and the Iron Age art eras (Cavendish 961; Armstrong 92).

Subsequently, different styles of art were introduced during the reign of different kingdoms and dynasties (Goguryeo, Baekje, Silla, Gaya, Unified Silla, Goryeo Dynasty, and the Joseon Dynasty) whereby the Chinese culture is credited for influencing the development of different styles of art that displayed elegance and spontaneity (Mayo, Rimer, and Kerkham 134).

However, contemporary art scholars note that the Korean culture, both traditional and modern, consists of a unique style of art that transmits the Chinese culture while assimilating its own unique art culture.

Therefore, it is apparent that Korea particularly South Korea offers vibrant art scenes characterized by creativity and innovation in different art genres (Cavendish 961). This paper explores the development of different genres of fine art such as traditional and contemporary dance, music, paintings, sculpture, and drama in Korea from 1950 to present.

The History of Fine Arts in Korea Visual Arts

The fall of different Korean kingdoms and dynasties coincided with the development of Korean art from the ancient Chinese-influenced forms of art to more distinctive and unique styles of Korean art. During the 20th century, Korean calligraphy, painting, animation, comics, wood-blocks, and printing were influenced by the transition from Korean Shamanist art through Buddhist art, and finally, to Confucian art.

During this period, brush-strokes were used to communicate the artist’s personality through calligraphy, which also enriched the subject matter of the painted works.

Moreover, fabric arts as captured through Choe Eun-sun’s work involved embroidery in screen-work, wall decorations, weaving, and designing costumes. Fabric art was also represented through the works of carpet and rug weavers who produced different saddle blankets, imperial dragon carpets, saddle covers, and tiger rugs for different occasions and personalities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, paper artistry included the use of hand-made paper-works in designing window screens, floor covers, paper fans, paper figures, and for printing. In fact, the use of paper derived from mulberry roots dates back to thousands of years according to studies conducted in 1960, which revealed that the paper could last about 1000 years (Cavendish 961-963; Connor 265).

Painting is another form of visual art, which has been used to celebrate nature and religious themes over the years. However, beginning the 18th century to the present, many artists use painting to depict daily life and different landscapes.

For example, the Japanese occupation (1910-1945) is credited for the introduction of western oil-painting, which has since influenced the contemporary South Korean paintings most of which are housed in the National Museum of Contemporary Art (Mayo, Rimer, and Kerkham 135). Through these 20th century art paintings, it is evident that the South Korean artists have continued to employ the western oil-painting styles with a redefined mixture of classical Korean themes, which demonstrate their originality.

Moreover, the contemporary painting styles used in Korea demand that the artist understands the Korean ceramics, pottery, and textures considering that brush-strokes weigh more in judging the Korean artist’s work. Notable Korean artists who combine the contemporary western and distinctive Korean painting styles include Suh Yongsun, Tschoon Su Kim, and Junggeun Oh among others (Cavendish 963).

As opposed to South Korea, which still embraces the socialistic art styles, North Korean artists have introduced completely different forms of visual arts exemplified through the production of patriotic films that have dominated the North Korean culture from 1949-1994.

These patriotic films have revived the use of architecture, neo-traditional painting, and fabric art to communicate political statements and represent various dramatic landscapes. This revolution has seen the emergence of politically-charged revolutionary posters, documentary films, visual crafts, realistic paintings, and exportable needlework by renowned North Korean painters such as the Fwhang sisters whose painting style is a mixture of western and Far East techniques (Armstrong 92; Cavendish 900).

Ceramics, Sculpture and Metal Crafts

The production of different forms of ceramics spans six centuries since the introduction of the celadon vases (blue-green in color) production techniques by the Chinese. Since then, the Korean people have owned the techniques with a few changes such as the introduction of the inlaid designs, which represent different natural motifs.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Historical Development of Fine Arts in Korea from 1950 to Present specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Currently, pottery that combines the traditional and modern techniques is the most famous activity taking place in Inchon whereby artisans are involved in producing quality ceramics. On the other hand, the introduction of sculpture dates back to the Buddhism era whereby stone, bronze, and wood were the main raw materials used to carve images of Buddha and pagodas as exemplified by the Buddhist sculpture at the Sokkuram Gotto Shrine (Kyongju).

Despite the decline of Buddhist sculpture with the emergence of Confucianism, modern sculpture has been widely practiced since the 1960s in different places including plazas, streets, and parks across South Korea (Cavendish 961-969). Metal craft is another form of ancient art exemplified by the ancient decorated bronze structures that can be found all over South Korea.

Furthermore, history has it that the ancient Shilla artisans are well known for the use of gold and jade in cramming tombs and producing bronze bells such as the Divine Bell of King Songdok. Many other ancient handicrafts such as gilt crowns, ornaments, and pots have been excavated and are now available at the National Museum of Korea in Seoul.

Currently, handicrafts are uniquely designed for specific purposes as opposed to their aesthetic value. Furthermore, there has been a sporadic change from the traditional techniques of using metal, fabric, and wood to the modern techniques employing glass, paper, and leather (Cavendish 970).

Korean architecture and interior design has a long history, which can be seen through the traditional Korean gardens and palaces. In these gardens and palaces, ancient ideographs can be seen. The ideographs display various geometric, animal, plant, and nature patterns (motifs), which offer an aesthetic value to different architectural structures. Some of the most famous geometric designs and patterns, which have stood the test of time, include squares, triangles, concentric circles, and diamonds among others.

Conversely, some rock carvings were designed to represent animal patterns, and in most cases they coincided with the food-gathering seasons. However, the current use of different architectural and interior design patterns involves the decoration of doors, temples, shrines, spoons, furniture, and other objects to add an aesthetic value (Cavendish 965-970; Connor 265).

Performing Arts

Performing arts in Korea encompass the art of story-telling/comedy, tea ceremonies, musical arts and theatre, dance, literature, and poetry. The tea ceremony is usually held in a specific house characterized by its own unique architecture within the garden. In the tea house, ritualized conversations, pottery, traditional costumes, and poetry are important aspects of art that offer an artistic and cultural experience for the attendees.

On the other hand, musical arts and theatre have had a long history in South Korea with a few changes, which have led to the emergence of different categories of music in Korea including traditional, western, and a mixture of Western and Eastern styles. Traditionally, music was categorized into folk music and p’ansori (a musical narrative involving folktales and novels).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Historical Development of Fine Arts in Korea from 1950 to Present by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These categories of traditional music have been preserved and classically developed into new music since the establishment of the Korean Traditional Performing Arts Center in 1951 (Cavendish 961-980). Contemporary music in Korea has the same test of audiences as other forms of western music despite that most Korean artists perform using various stringed instruments while some are well known for their prowess as symphony directors.

World music has also influenced Korean music despite efforts made to differentiate it from other Western and Eastern forms, and currently, the Korean musicals is a representative of various innovations and revivals of Korean music in the 21st century. Conversely, post 1945, the Korean masks have found extensive use in folk-art dramas and as tourist artifacts (Cavendish 976-981).

Dance and Theatre are other important forms of performing arts, which have been rediscovered in South Korea as early as the 1980s with the declaration by the government that the few remaining dances should be preserved and protected by the Intellectual Property protection laws.

Furthermore, the establishment of the Korean Culture and Arts Foundation has also accelerated the development of performing arts and the preservation of traditional dramas. Currently, contemporary dance and ballet thrives in the presence of many companies and ballet troops housed in the National Theatre in Seoul, which is basically dedicated to promoting traditional music, drama, and dance.

Moreover, the Sejong Cultural Center in Seoul is also dedicated to the development of orchestras, choirs, and dance. Despite narrative storytelling based on dramatic songs or physical comedians thriving over the years, it is still dominated by male performers (Connor 265-270; Cavendish 990). Moreover, South Korea and Korea in general has not seen the emergence of Stand-up Comedy due to the underlying cultural considerations, and thus, more needs to be done to promote performing arts from this perspective.

Works Cited Armstrong, Charles, A. The North Korean revolution, 1945-1950. New York: Cornell University Press, 2004. Print.

Cavendish, Marshall. World and its Peoples: eastern and Southern Asia. Tarrytown, NY: Marshall Cavendish Corporation. Print.

Connor, Mary, E. The Koreas. Santa Barbara, CA: ABC-CLIO Publishers, 2009. Print.

Mayo, Marlene J., Rimer, Thomas J., and Kerkham, Eleanor, H. War, occupation, and creativity: Japan and East Asia, 1920-1960. United States of America: University of Hawaii Press. Print.


Across the Sands: African Refugees in the Eyes of the World Essay (Critical Writing) college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Introduction: Where Compassion Starts In the modern world, despite the globalization and the cosmopolitan air in the relationships between various countries, the numerous problems arising because of certain political and cultural issues are inevitable. Among the most notorious issues of the present-day political affairs, the one concerning the problem of the African refugees remains on the agenda of the modern politics and culture.

Caused by a number of factors including the high rates of unemployment in the corresponding African countries, vague job prospects and the unsatisfactory life standards in the African countries in question, the emigration to Israel is one of the most stable tendencies in such countries as Sudan, Oman, etc.

Hence, the necessity to consider the given issue from the viewpoint of ethics, politics and culture arises. It is also worth mentioning that the given issue should be considered incorporating the ideas of Derrida, Said and Sontag, who offer rather peculiar considerations on the issue of ethics, politics and culture.

African Refugees: The Chase for a Better Life Because of the unbearable conditions in their native land and the chance to improve the life standards in Israel, a number of people immigrate illegally to Israel. Which is even more important, according to the Israeli standards, the immigrants from Sudan, Oman, and several other countries are supposed to obtain humanitarian aid.

Hence, the immigration to Israel is one of the tendencies in poorer African countries, as Ogazi explains. However, the latter marks that the process of illegal immigration is often deadly: “There are reports of many being killed. Many sentenced to death for false charges and for being in the country illegally” (Ogazi 75). Therefore, the issue should be considered thoroughly.

Personal Suffer and Political Agony: Drawing the Line Among the most notorious issues concerning the illegal immigration from African countries to Israel, the way in which a personal tragedy is intertwined with the political issues must be the key complexity. On the one hand, the people immigrating from Sudan, Eritrea, Ethiopia and the rest of the countries to Israel have to face intense suffer and the fear of being killed on their way to the promised Land.

However, it is important to mark that the personal suffers of the immigrants address the political issues as well. In most cases, the interrelation between the political and the personal concern can be related to as the manifestation of what Sontag defined as the “Camp” phenomenon. Since a human being is an integral part of the society, (s)he cannot exist separated from the society; hence, the personal mixes with the political, which culminates in the Israeli immigration conflict.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ethical Dilemma: An Aesthetic Viewpoint Another peculiar issue, the correlation of the ethical and the aesthetical can also be traced in the given problem. Since the people immigrating to another country to seek for help, even though illegally, require rather assistance than the penalty that the Israeli armed force brings on them, it is required to reconsider the way in which immigrants are treated in Israeli. Obviously, even those who cross the boundaries of the state illegally need help and should be offered certain support.

On the other hand, illegal immigrants are criminals that must be punished. Hence the ethical concern arises. However, taking into account the ideas of society that Derrida conveys: “Nature has expelled man […], society persists in oppressing him” (115), it is obvious that the Israeli society is unlikely to reconsider their vision of illegal immigration.

Politics and Poetry, Intertwined: When the Impossible Is Just Around the Corner It would also be reasonable to consider the problem of immigration from the viewpoint of politics and poetry. Incorporating such strikingly different spheres, one is likely to obtain the most objective result.

However, when it comes to speaking of the African immigrants in Israel, one should mark that the political complexities are obvious even for the legal immigrants, who find it quite had to get used to the Israeli policies and the system of justice (Said 11).

However, it cannot be denied that there is certain poetry in the way the Africans are trying to integrate into the Israeli environment and at the same time keep their integrity, the famous “poetry of the Palestinians during their struggle” (240).

In the Eye of a Stranger: African Suffering Considering the problem of the African immigration, one must mark that the situation is rather controversial. On the one hand, the illegal immigration has to be dealt with; leading to overpopulation of Israel, the religious concern and the political stain, the unceasing flood of immigrants presupposes considerable problems. Yet on the other hand, it is clear that the Africans do have the right for a better life and deserve the opportunity to live in the country of their forefathers.

Therefore, from a viewpoint of a passer-by, both opponents are quite reasonable and should, therefore consider the option of a peaceful coexistence. According to the reasonable suggestion of Ogazi, “what Africa needs is a sound immigration policy that allows Africans to migrate and live in other African countries without being branded as ‘settlers,’ and abused” (77).

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Across the Sands: African Refugees in the Eyes of the World specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion: When Humankind Needs Humanity Hence, it is obvious that the given issue concerning the constant flood of refugees from African countries into Israel presupposes a number of issues to deal with.

Considering the problem from various viewpoints, one should mark that, no matter whether the issue of viewed from the position of ethics or politics, it becomes obvious that the unceasing flood of immigration does have reasonable grounds to base on. Among the most essential ones, the desire to obtain help is quite understandable, as well as the suffering that the immigrants have to take.

Nevertheless, it is also evident that the given situation needs to be tackled with, since the immigration presupposes not only the major cultural issues, but also the political concern for both the country of emigration and Israel. While in the former, the state of affairs is deteriorating due to the lack of the workforce and the inefficiency of economics, in the latter, the increasing number of citizens presupposes dealing with the increase in unemployment rates and tough competition in the job market.

Moreover, the religious issues also arise due to the different beliefs of the immigrants and the native Israeli. Therefore, it cannot be denied that, considering the problem from both the viewpoint of the refugees and a passer-by point of view, one should emphasize the necessity to find the compromise between the Israeli native citizens and the numerous immigrants.

Works Cited Derrida, Jaques. Of Grammatology. Baltimore, MD: JHU Press, 1998. Print.

Ogazi, Emeka L. African Development and the Influence of Western Media. Bloomington, IN: Xlibris, 2010. Print.

Said, Edward W. The Question of Palestine. New York, NY: Taylor


Poems by Iconic Authors: Keats, Shakespeare, Hughes Essay writing essay help

“Ode on Grecian Urn” by John Keats This poem is majorly based on paradoxical stylistic device. It entails the appreciation of artwork that has found its description in a poem. The poem describes art work versus life occurrences. There is a world of creation of full fantasy by the “urn” people in the poem. These art works of the Greece people are quite thrilling. Though they are immovable, they bring a sense of turbulent action and a live passion. The poem does not combine the issue of pain and joy.

Title of the Poem

The title of the poem “ode on Grecian urn” shows the challenges between the existing dynamic life and frozen images among the “urn” people. It tries to describe the permanent


The Inca Empire as a Great Civilization of the Pre-Columbian America Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Until 1492, the whole continents of North and South America were not known in Europe. After the Columbus expedition, a small kingdom of Spain got control over two continents and became the most powerful Empire. Nevertheless, before the Spanish conquest, there were several advanced civilizations on the continent.

One of the Andean civilizations, the Inca Empire was the largest country in the pre-Columbian America. The Empire covered 3000 miles of the west coast of South America and included parts of modern Peru, Ecuador, Chile, Bolivia and Argentina. This civilization was very advanced. For instance, the Incas built a network of roads connecting the different towns of the Empire.

The tax system was one of the statements of the Inca’s economy. There was no difference between the class and prosperity. Everyone had to pay the gold or, at least, corn and potatoes. Indeed, the agriculture was the main activity of this civilization. They lived in mountainous terrain that was completely bad for farming.

However, the Incas found a solution of this problem in a cut of terraces looked like the stairs. Thereby, they could produce maize, potatoes, tomatoes, peanuts, melons and cotton. The method of irrigation allowed getting water to the plantations.

The administrative and political center of the Empire was located in Cusco in modern Peru. Nearby Cusco, the Incas created an important geometric ensemble of Machu Picchu built of stone. The significance of this town lies in the ancient beliefs of an existence of the place where they can get the spiritual connection with gods. The stones were cut very careful and fitting perfectly to each other. All the levels of this town were connected with the stairways.

Obviously, the cultural inheritance of the Inca Empire was rich. However, due to the historical events, almost all the cultural valuables were lost. Nowadays, there are no written records left by the Incas. The knowledge of their history and culture are known from the oral narrations which were preserved until the Spanish conquest. The scientists know about the unique calendar of the Incas which consists 12 months of 30 days. It means that even in the 15th century the Incas people had a deep knowledge of math and astronomy.

Within the several centuries the Incas built a great empire which was destroyed by the few hundred Spanish soldiers. In 1532, Francisco Pizarro and his soldiers conquered the Empire. It happened due to the political collapse and disorder within the Empire.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, the Incas people fell quickly into the Spanish with their weapons and horses. Besides, some of the European diseases were deadly dangerous for the native people of the American continent. Pizarro easily captured the Incas emperor Atahualpa and took control over the whole Empire.

The consequences of this event were horrible. The Inca Empire was in ruin. The Spanish army took the gold and other riches and killed thousands of people. They forced the Incas to convert to Christianity and in case of rejection tortured and killed. It is an interesting example of killing and destroying in order to increase the number of Christians.

Obviously, the main reason of an occupation was the Incas gold. The Spanish conquests led to the expansion of this European. Thus, the Spanish expeditions to South and North America destroyed the great advanced and origin civilization of the Incas.

The Inca Empire as a Great Civilization of the Pre-Columbian America Until 1492, the whole continents of North and South America were not known in Europe. After the Columbus expedition, a small kingdom of Spain got control over two continents and became the most powerful Empire. Nevertheless, before the Spanish conquest, there were several advanced civilizations on the continent.

One of the Andean civilizations, the Inca Empire was the largest country in the pre-Columbian America. The Empire covered 3000 miles of the west coast of South America and included parts of modern Peru, Ecuador, Chile, Bolivia and Argentina. This civilization was very advanced. For instance, the Incas built a network of roads connecting the different towns of the Empire.

The tax system was one of the statements of the Inca’s economy. There was no difference between the class and prosperity. Everyone had to pay the gold or, at least, corn and potatoes. Indeed, the agriculture was the main activity of this civilization. They lived in mountainous terrain that was completely bad for farming.

However, the Incas found a solution of this problem in a cut of terraces looked like the stairs. Thereby, they could produce maize, potatoes, tomatoes, peanuts, melons and cotton. The method of irrigation allowed getting water to the plantations.

We will write a custom Essay on The Inca Empire as a Great Civilization of the Pre-Columbian America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The administrative and political center of the Empire was located in Cusco in modern Peru. Nearby Cusco, the Incas created an important geometric ensemble of Machu Picchu built of stone. The significance of this town lies in the ancient beliefs of an existence of the place where they can get the spiritual connection with gods. The stones were cut very careful and fitting perfectly to each other. All the levels of this town were connected with the stairways.

Obviously, the cultural inheritance of the Inca Empire was rich. However, due to the historical events, almost all the cultural valuables were lost. Nowadays, there are no written records left by the Incas. The knowledge of their history and culture are known from the oral narrations which were preserved until the Spanish conquest. The scientists know about the unique calendar of the Incas which consists 12 months of 30 days. It means that even in the 15th century the Incas people had a deep knowledge of math and astronomy.

Within the several centuries the Incas built a great empire which was destroyed by the few hundred Spanish soldiers. In 1532, Francisco Pizarro and his soldiers conquered the Empire. It happened due to the political collapse and disorder within the Empire.

Therefore, the Incas people fell quickly into the Spanish with their weapons and horses. Besides, some of the European diseases were deadly dangerous for the native people of the American continent. Pizarro easily captured the Incas emperor Atahualpa and took control over the whole Empire.

The consequences of this event were horrible. The Inca Empire was in ruin. The Spanish army took the gold and other riches and killed thousands of people. They forced the Incas to convert to Christianity and in case of rejection tortured and killed. It is an interesting example of killing and destroying in order to increase the number of Christians.

Obviously, the main reason of an occupation was the Incas gold. The Spanish conquests led to the expansion of this European. Thus, the Spanish expeditions to South and North America destroyed the great advanced and origin civilization of the Incas.


Burmese Pythons Term Paper essay help online free: essay help online free

The Impact Of Burmese Pythons On Florida’s Native Biodiversity Python molurus is among the world’s six largest snakes and it is capable of growing to a length of more than 9.15 meters. By the time it is approximately 2.6 meters, the species will normally have attained maturity. It belongs to the family Boiidae and the subfamily pythonidae and is distributed across South East Asia from Pakistan to Indonesia to South China.

It is subdivided into two subspecies namely, P.m. molurus and P.m. bivittatus. P.m.molurus is the Indian python found in Pakistan, India, Bangladesh, Nepal , and Sri Lanka while P.m. bivittatus, which is also known as the Burmese python, lives in Burma, Laos, Vietnam, Thailand, Peninsula Malaysia, Cambodia, Indonesia, and South China (Evans 2003).

The Burmese python is of particular interest to scientists and everyone living in South Florida. In 2010, the Burmese python was identified as one of the top ten invasive species.

The Burmese python is a highly sought after species on account of its physical beauty. Consequently, it finds use in the making leather items and as a pet. Unlike other snake species, the Burmese python is docile but like the other snakes in its family, it kills by constriction and suffocation. This python seizes the prey with its teeth, wraps itself around the prey, and tightens itself every time the prey breaths out.

This leads to suffocation of the prey. Its skull is highly ossified with dense bones and complex sutures and this allows it to swallow a prey that is 4-5 times the diameter of its own head (Evans 2003). Its preferred habitat is the forests near water bodies, swamps, marshes, and grasslands. It moves easily among trees and is also an excellent swimmer. Although large constricting snakes usually live in the tropical climate, the Burmese python is known to survive in temperate regions like Southern Florida.

The presence of the Burmese python in South Florida is a recent development. Since the mid 1990s, the Burmese python has established itself in southern Florida and at the moment, it inhabits over 5,180 square kilometers of largely inaccessible habitat (Snow et al. 2007).

Its appearance in Florida came about due to the desire to have snake pets in the 90s. Each year, the United States breeds thousands of pythons in captivity and thereafter, they are sold as pets. In earlier times when these pets became too big for the owners to handle, they would release them into the wild.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Unlike other pets that die when released into the wild, the Burmese python thrived in South Florida. Before its release, it was simply classified as an exotic species but thereafter, it also turned into an invasive species. This paper covers the impact of the Burmese python on Florida’s native diversity, the factors that have led to its rapid increase and why it poses a great danger to the natural habitat of South Florida.

The Burmese python has had a big impact on Florida’s native diversity. Its presence is a threat to the ecological balance in South Florida. It feeds on a great variety of animals. Burmese pythons have been documented in the Everglades National Park, South Florida. They consume American Alligators and a wide variety of avian and mammalian prey, including wading birds, bobcats, and white tailed deer (Snow et al 2007).

The extent of their destruction is not very clear and as a result, studies have been done to quantify the impact of this python on the native diversity and to give authorities a tangible figure. According to a study by Sementelli et al, a single successful python feeding results in a cost of 3,495.50 dollars.

This translates to $ 83, 892 per year for a single Burmese python (2007). Records of the type of animals that these pythons used as prey were obtained from the animals’ stomach contents. From these contents, they were able to calculate the cost per animal (Harvey et al 2008).

There are social and economic impacts felt due to introduction of exotic amphibians and reptiles in any given environment. Numerous costs are incurred through trapping, removal and predation of other common pets as these pythons invade urban areas (Sementelli et al. 2007).

There is a danger posed to tourists and tourism itself if these snakes continue to reduce the numbers of other species. The reason why tourists visit the Everglades is to see the different species that inhabit it. The presence of Burmese pythons can also affect the operations of state and local government through emergency calls, service interruptions and encroachment in recreation parks.

The Burmese pythons were first spotted in south Florida in the early 90s and since then, the region has seen a sharp increase in this invasive species. There are many factors that have led to the rapid increase of the Burmese python in South Florida.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Burmese Pythons specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More These include diverse habitat use, the species’ broad dietary preferences, a long lifespan, its high reproductive output, and its ability to move tirelessly for long distances. (Harvey et al 2008). Burmese pythons are very high on the food chain and therefore animals that prey on Burmese pythons are also very few. These factors are feared to be responsible for the eventual reduction in biodiversity in south Florida due to the increase in the Burmese python population.

Rapid reproduction and long lifespan has kept the number of the Burmese python relatively high. A Burmese python is known to lay lots of eggs in one season. On May 17, 2006, scientist in South Florida discovered the first python nest and this acted as a confirmation to them that indeed, the Burmese pythons were breeding wildly.

Mating in the Everglades usually occurs between the months of December and April. During the mating season, females usually secrete pheromones and this enables the males to locate them. Between May and June, the females will have laid their eggs but they remain they have to be coiled around the clutch in readiness for hutching. The hutching of the eggs occurs between July and August.

Some eight samples that were discovered in South Florida showed that on average, a clutch is made up of 36 eggs (Harvey et al, 2008). Their high reproductive rate, coupled with the fact that they live for between15 and 25 years, is a major factor in their rapid increase in population.

The climate of Southern Florida is also another factor in favor of the rapid increase in the number of Burmese pythons in the region. The weather in Florida is warm almost all year round. The python has managed to increase in population thanks to the availability of a vast and undisturbed habitat, as well as the presence of subtropical climate in the Everglades (Harvey et al 2008).

Many studies show that colder temperatures adversely affect these pythons. In a study conducted by Dorcas and colleagues, it was discovered that Burmese pythons that had been exposed to cold temperatures died due to poor thermoregulatory conditions, such as failing to take shelter or basking in the cold environments (Dorcas, Willson


Managing Change, Balanced Scorecard Report college application essay help

What Is Bsc? The balance scorecard which is also known as (BSC) is a tool that is used by organizations to measure the numerous outcomes that may result from the activities they carry out. It helps in evaluating the financial performance of an organization, the level of customer satisfaction, the excellence with which the internal processes are run and the ways by which the employees learn and various ways in which they can grow. The outcomes from the organization can then be connected to the vision of the organization and also their strategies (Gupta 114)

Perspectives in a BSC Financial perspective

The outcome of a particular organization can be considered from the point of view of the finances. From this angle, various aspects of the finances can be considered such as the profitability of the organization. The scorecard technique should take into consideration that for most organizations, the profit making perspective is one of its major objectives and hence cannot be ignored. This is the returns that an organization makes after they have included all their deductions from their income and what they remain with is the profit.

The growth of an organization is also to be considered in the scorecard because this is crucial for any organization if it aims at being competitive over a long period of time.

The growth can be calculated in form of percentages, where the gradual increment of profits is considered, the increase of shares that are made available in the market stock exchange and also the worth of the organization at that particular time. This requires documents from previous financial years to come up with a steady and reliable feedback of the financial increment or decrement (Gupta 115).

The value of the shares is also included in the scorecard as a way of valuing the organization against the many more in the market. The value also determines the amount of capital the organization may be having in circulation from the shareholders.

The share that the organization has in the market is also necessary, such as the size or the volume of customers, the resources among their competitors and this is important is setting goals for the next financial years. The operating expenses have to be considered especially the ones that have been reduced as a clear indication of growth with minimal expenses and this may also lead to a higher profit. The assets are also recorded to show the turnover they can bring forth is they are disposed.

Customer Perspective

Customer satisfaction should also be highly regarded in the scorecard since without the customers the organization cannot run. The time that it takes for an organization to respond to a customer is necessary because the faster it is the better feedback and loyalty the organization gets. The time that it takes to cover a particular issue for a customer is also necessary as it determines if an organization gets to keep its customers or not (Gupta 116).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The quality of customer service is also necessary as it sets the standards of the organization and also helps in its evaluation. The quality on the part of the customer translated to the effectiveness of the organization to meet their needs. Performance and the service delivered by the personnel is also considered on the score card. The cost that is incurred by the organization to meet various activities is necessary, if a customer is required to give an extra fee so that they can get special services that are not offered free of charge.

Internal Perspective

The business may have internal processes and that perspective is considered in the scorecard. The processes that are found within the business or the organization are; cycle time, quality, employee skills and productivity. The cycle time is recorded from when a new product is introduced to the market and the time it takes to reach the maturity stage.

The maturity stage is when product begins to get popular with the clients and it goes to a peak and the time it gets to the plateau stage of growth. The time it takes in this cycle is recorded and used in the evaluation in connection to the vision of the organization.

The quality of products or services offered by an organization or business should be considered in order to assess the value of the organization in the current market. The skills possessed by the employees also matter because they dictate the output of the organization and also the quality to be delivered by that particular business.

The productivity has to be put in context because this is what makes a business relevant and the managers must ensure that all activities are geared to increase the productivity and at the same time maintaining their quality.

Decisions that are made within the business will manifest in the kind of results that come out of this. These decisions have to be recorded to create accountability of every result to a previous action or decision.

Actions in the business are also to be in the scorecard from whatever level they may have been made from. Every action has a reaction and some may be working together with the vision of the organization and others may be the reason why most of the objectives have not been meet in the business.

We will write a custom Report on Managing Change, Balanced Scorecard specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The coordination of activities is very crucial, as this is what gives the over-view of the strategies laid out by a business. The better the processes work out together the better the outcome that comes with it. The resources that are within the business have to be considered too.

The resources can be in form of money or even assets and all these have to be looked at in a way that they can be used to enhance the production or continuity of the organization. The capabilities also have to be recorded so that they can easily forecast the ease with which the organization can adapt to future changes in the market.

Innovation and Learning Perspective

The employees are of great value to an organization and their skills determine the productivity of the organization. The employees have to be trained through a learning process on the various ways of meeting the standards and quality of the organization.

For instance, when a business introduces new services or products to the market, it is important for management to equip the employees with the necessary information on the new release so that they can comfortably market the new products to the customers and they will answer all questions with ease.

The employees have to be shown that the customers are of great value, and this may come about through training that will help them see that every single customer, may they be loyal customers or potential customers should be treated in the same esteem so that they can feel they belong to that business. The efficiency with which the employees operate should also be considered, which can be seen through the time it takes them to attend to clients (Gupta 120).

Case Study: Al-Kindi Pharmaceuticals Al-Kindi Pharmaceutical Industries PLC is a medium sized biopharmaceutical company that has been one of the many organizations across the globe that has successfully implemented the business scorecard as a tool in management. This can be clearly seen at the corporation level and it has carefully trickled down to the employee levels at each individual level.

It can be seen that the organization has to work hand in hand with everyone in the company to achieve outcomes that have a great connection to the vision of the organization and to work with their strategies.

The strategies that are put in place by the organization so that they can work for all the stakeholders have been in the context of the four perspectives in the business scorecard. The four perspectives are; financial performance, internal business processes, learning and growth and the reputation with customers. The pharmaceutical company has a matrix form of organization and this can be seen where there are different directors in various branches.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Managing Change, Balanced Scorecard by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This form of structure helps in increasing the profit as the various stations ensure that the company covers a greater area of market. The internal business processes such as the decisions to be made or actions have to be presented to the managing director before they are passed to be applied to all areas, hence reducing the level of risks or mistakes and promotes orderliness.

The geographical distribution ensures that there is customer satisfaction as they are reached individually to their grassroots. The growth and learning process of the employees can be seen from the development of the various directors in each station who can keenly work with each employee to give a higher outcome for the company in overall production.

Al-Kindi Pharmaceuticals have been in operation for thirty years in Bahrain. They have sought with time to have minimum cost and at the same time maintain the quality of their products. This led them to having the business scorecard, which would outline the vision, mission, objectives and even the strategies to ensure that they remained in the market for a long time.

Al-Kindi is a research driven company, which looks into the global healthcare with great values in the biopharmaceutical chain, and they endeavor to form a strong matrix of capabilities. The company focuses on the medical need in the field of cancer, inflammatory diseases and diabetes. The company ensures that they provide therapies that are based on affordable innovation.

The company ensures that the stakeholders are taken care of in the four perspectives of the business scorecard. The finances of the company are recorded and it may appear to the employees that the services or therapies are affordable through their vision. The company also seeks to show customer’s satisfaction in the range of diseases in which they offer research in therapies. The owners of the company are reassured that they will get the profits they aim at attaining and the customers are guaranteed of the proper healthcare.

The internal processes of the pharmaceuticals business have been featured in the quality of the healthcare they aim to achieve. They point out that the matrix organization they use is of paramount benefit by collectively using different capabilities or skills of the employees in various fields and the diverse station all around the world.

Al-Kindi has a strategy in place that ensures its operations are legal through the licensing partnerships. This is guaranteed to provide them with a wider access to the people across the globe and to add on to this it will help them to penetrate a larger market hence raking in more profits for the company.

The company also assures its customers through the strategies that they will deliver great breakthroughs in various fields of research. This reassurance is the best thing to the loyal customers and it helps in attracting as well as retaining the potential customers. (Melendez-Ortiz and Vincente 200)

Conclusion A strategy is very necessary for a company as it also outlines the way in which the employees will be trained and how they will learn in the same way. For example, Al-Kindi will require including in their strategy how they will be equipping the employees with the information on the new products or even the new services they may be delivering to the market. This will be important to them in the effort to win more customers to their side. This also helps in maintaining the quality standards of the company, which is viewed by many as being reliable.

In conclusion, the business scorecard is essential in growing companies that hope to establish themselves in a rapidly growing market. It is used by almost seventy percent of the organizations all over the world. It can be deduced that any business that fails to implement a BSC is destined for a decline in the outcome.

Works Cited Gupta, Praveen. Six Sigma Business Record. New York: The McGraw-Hill Companies, 2007. Print

Melendez-Ortiz, Ricardo and Vincente, Sanchez. Trading in Genes. Chicago: Earthscan, 2005. Print


Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

What is Philo’s position concerning natural and revealed religion? Philo was a Jewish philosopher who lived in 20BC and died in 50D.He was born in Alexandria and through his works he tried to create harmony between the Jewish philosophy and the Greek Philosophy. He had a staunch connection to the Greeks Stoic Philosophers. He was keen to point out that the Hebrew Bible if not carefully interpreted would blur the mankind’s way of viewing God. He contended that through the explanation of his exegesis to the Sophists they opened their eyes to a new outlook of the Judaism.

Though strongly linked with Judaism, his philosophy is said to be of paramount importance to the Christian Founding fathers. Christology is said to owe a debt to Philo since he formed the basis to some of the Christian founding principles. There are valid arguments developed in the course of 19th century which aver that Philo was one of the founders of Christianity.

His ideologies are said to have formed the basis in which the Jews found religious comfort and justifications. It is contended that he only paid attention to the philosophy which was in conformity with Jewish religion. His source of philosophy was the Jewish Bible which he held in high regard and considered it the root of truth not only in Judaism but other religions (Hume, p.24).

Philo has provided a comprehensive opinion on the natural and revealing religion. He was categorical on his response to the arguments supporting the existence of God based on the apparent created universe. The ideology commonly referred as the teleological design whereby the role of God and the human intelligence is based on the universe.

Philo stated that it was unreasonable to attribute a perfect creator by the virtue of the creation. In his words nature may have had the perfect order by itself and the requirement of a designer was a myth. The possibility of an imperfect creator was also a probability. According to him the probability of a poorly designed earth in the initial stages of creation is a factor that many teological philosophers have ignored.

Philo also held the view that the argument that one God designed nature is misleading since they is a possibility that many gods joined together to frame the Earth. He vehemently rejected the notion that there only existed one Deity who not only made the Universe but owns and controls life (Hume, p.44).

According to Philo the ideology that the Earth was created by an omnipotent, Omniscient, benevolent Deity, is base on ignorance. He seemed to suggest that the world could perfectly exist without religion. However, his opinion is to be taken with caution since in his dialogue with Cleanthes he seems to contradict himself when he makes an opinion to imply that the design ideology is true hence losing the debate.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Philos change of position is of great philosophical significance but it still remains certain that to him religion and morality were creations of the mind which human being could perfectly exist without. Philo asserts that organized religion is the source of all evils and it promotes selfishness by advocating on the salvation of ones soul.

The presence of wars persecutions and oppression is occasioned by the existence of religion. Religion also results to grief upon its followers.Philo contends that the religious people try to overstep their limits by trying to suggest what God is like. He states that the way the universe is has some relation to human intelligence and anything bigger cannot be revealed (Hume, p.13).

What is the ontological argument for God’s existence? The argument was first advocated for by Anselm of Canterbury, who was a monk and lived in the eleventh century. The argument was mainly to support the existence of God. In the words of Anselm God was the greatest being that normal human beings can conceive.

The highest being which is perfect in existence. The above statements are simply referred to as ontological argument. The Deity is held to be more perfect and supreme than human being. The concept of the existence of a God was said should not only exist in mind but also in reality (Hume, p.78).

The ontological argument has its proponents who share the same school of thought with Anselm.The most notable of these philosophers is French thinker Descartes.

He held the view that the existence of God could be grounded on the appearance of nature just the same way the mathematical theories could be inferred from the appearance of geometric shapes. In what he proudly named in his book the Fifth Meditation, he illustrated his opinion by citing the example of a triangle. He strongly concurred with Anselm that God is perfect and supreme.

The argument is not grounded on any evidence or any form of backing but on the proposition that the nature stands to explain everything. The ontological school of thought is grounded on the proposition that no bigger being than God can be imagined. The school of thought further states that the existence of God is an idea (Hume, p.36).

We will write a custom Essay on Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Alvin Plantinga is one of the most celebrated proponents of the ontological arguments. He supported his existence of ideology using mathematical theories known as modal logic. He based his averments on the reasoning that if a thing is true then the probability of its necessity could not be ignored.

He agreed with Descartes arguments of the shapes being a proof of geometric ideas while nature was the symbol of the existence of God. In addition, he stated that an omniscient, omnipotent and a perfect being. The supreme existence and the supreme excellence are the main attributes associated with presence of God (Hume, p.40).

One of the profound Islamic Philosopher Mulla Sandra has been said to be a staunch supporter of the ontological argument. He labored to assemble his supporting arguments about the existence of God by using the empirical test. He majorly directed his attention to antecedent eternal necessity .He stated that the existence of something supersedes its essence. In his analysis he stated that the existence of God is derived from the reality of existence.

Where mans intellectual power has limited powers then there must be a greater power which exists to supplement that. He was keen to point out that many of the anti ontological philosophers concentrated on the definition of the God instead of the existence. Substantial critique has been leveled against this school of thought. Some of the criticism has been counteracted and subsequently rendered invalid. However, some of the critique has remained unanswered and hanging at large.

The most standing criticism was by Gottfried Leibniz who stated that if there could not sufficient demonstration of the existence of a perfect supreme being then the ontological argument could not hold water. The most celebrated of all natural believers found it had to agree with the ontological argument. Though Thomas Aquinas believed in the existence of God, he disagreed with Anselm’s proposal. He stated that the ontological view was helpful to those who completely knew the importance of God (Hume, p.75).

What is the problem of evil? How does it relate to belief in God? The problem of evil has substantially been a very contentious point between who believe in the existence of God and those who object such believe. The main basis of theodicy is traced from the need to define and answer the presence of evil and a perfect Deity.

It has been unconceivable to have a perfect God and another antagonistic evil force which is mainly concerned in doing the opposite of the God. The foregoing arguments have been hatched an engineered by Epicurus. He stated that it was impossible to imagine evil and good existence. He further argued that one of the forces can exist but both can not exist in the same setting.

In his several inferences, he stated that if there is a supreme powerful God on earth then evil could not exist. In the contrary he concluded that if there was a possibility that evil existed then the existence of God was not possible. It is either the God existing or the evil (Hume, p.66).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Renowned philosophers have advanced the argument of Epicurus by stating that the existence of an all powerful God and evil is a creation of a logical contradiction and cannot in any way be considered correct. They state that if the all powerful God was the controller and all knowing then he would prevent the evil from existing.

According to Plantinga in his defense to the existence of God, he states that God is a free God who desires every individual to exercise free will. His contention is that God allows evil in order to portray his character of the supreme good God. Many philosophers seem to buy Plantingas ideology but still the question of incompatibility remains unanswered (Hume, p.19).

It is worth noting that theodicies are defenses put forward to defend the contention about the evil and God incompatibility. The problem posed by evil is more clearly seen in instances when the hell suffering said to be a punishment to the evil doers. It has been held by the ontological philosophers that God can not defeat evil without the three main characteristics.

Some philosophers have criticized this statement and stated that there is a possibility that if God existed then he is not entirely good. Ontological philosophers have been put at task to explain the natural evils. According to their argument evil exists to give mankind a chance to make choices based on free will.

The main difficult has been to explain how natural evils such as earthquakes occur while it is not within the powers of man to decide. It has been contended that due to consequences of sin the supreme God has deserted the believers hence suffering from natural uncontrollable evils. A rather valid point has been put across to show how incompatible the free choice argument and the presence of heaven.

The problem caused by such contradiction is cured by the argument that the hell suffering is a problem created by believers due the abuse of the accorded free will. Questions such has the God would have created a man in the sense that he is immunity to sinning remain unanswered (Hume, p.72).

Works Cited Hume, David. Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion. Raleigh, N.C: Alex Catalogue, 1990.


Unilineal kinship units Essay essay help

Introduction As the basic unit of life, a family forms the basis of all societal relationships. Many anthropologists believe that a family allows the advancing of other relationships through strengthening of social bonds and associations.

The concept of kinship has been studied by anthropologists who have arguably noted it as the principle element of social bonding. Despite the fact that kingships are rooted in economic systems, their establishment usually plays a core role in influencing individuals’ behavior. In tracing human descent, kinship narrows down to specific segments, which define societal relationships[1].

One of these is the unilineal kinship whose membership is mainly determined at the time of birth. Of importance also is the fact that membership of outsiders to this kingship can be established through other set rules and guidelines by a given kinship. This essay discusses unilineal kinship units with reference to structure attributes, their interdiction, arrangements of personnel and potions of authority and the different terms anthropologist use to refer to them.

Kinship As mentioned above, kinship forms the foundation of any group or relationship that is to be governed by kinship norms and ethics. Additionally, these groups get allied to others and assimilate them in their existing relationship as a way of expanding their relational domain.

In other words, kinship is centered at advancing the responsibilities and rights of most of its members unlike the western world in which other factors like citizenship, politics, economics and work play a major role[2]. Nevertheless, this does not nullify the role of kinships in the Western world since nuclear families have a vital social institutional role especially when it comes to property inheritance along kinship identities.

Besides property inheritance, relatives are quite significant in ritual occasions and ceremonies. For instance, most people who celebrate thanksgiving functions believe that that it is more of a family affair than the involvement of other people from outside. It therefore suffices to mention that family relationships have more weight than kin relationship as the former focuses on blood relationships and issues of descent.

Blood and marriage relationships Consanguineal and affinal are two common terms used to refer to different types of kinship relationships. Consanguineal refers to a kinship relationship that is principally defined by blood association among members whereas affinal relationships recognize marriage as a source of kinship bonding among group members. Of significance is the fact that formation and regulation of conduct is determined by the manner in which the group is tied to the kinship.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From a general perspective, a kinship system encompasses all relationships that could be founded on marriage or blood, linking different people in a social web of rights and obligations and involved kinship terminologies[3]. Anthropologists therefore refer to a kinship as a system based on the fact that it has relationships, development of ideologies, includes people with varying behavior and recognition of the kinship terminology.

Despite the fact that kinship systems have biological relationships, they are solely considered as cultural phenomena. In explaining this, most societies base their classification of a kin on a cultural ground as opposed to the inclusion of biological or scientific ties linking members of the society.

It is also worth noting that there exists differences in social groups that are normally established by kinships and these variations dictate the behavior of kin towards each other[4]. Moreover, kinship bonds that are culturally defined have two major functions, which are seen as fundamental in the continuation of any given society.

Many anthropologists believe that the first and most important function of kinships revolves around their ability to guarantee continuation of various generations. Caring and educating of children is essential in every society in order to make them functioning members of the society in future. This is considered to be a key significance of the kinship unit based on the usefulness of such members in any given society.

Another function of kinship is to allow for organized transmission of material wealth and social power from one generation to another. As such, inheritance and succession are commonly done within the kinship setup. Another important function of kinships is the fact that they define a domain for other people upon which one can receive aid from[5].

However, this domain varies broadly from one society to another. According to the Western societies, this domain could be smaller compared to others from different societies. This is common in cases where a wide range of relationships for kin groups are included with beneficial obligations and rights. Notably most human societies have expanded kin groups, a condition which has been augmented by ability to adopt social groups that are bigger than nuclear families.

Formation of descent groups What is descent? From an anthropological point of view, descent is used to refer to an affiliation that has been culturally established with single or both parents. Many societies consider descent as a crucial basis for the formation of any social group. For instance, the nuclear family can be referred to as a descent group especially when descent group is used to imply groups with consanguineal kin that are recognized to be lineal descendants belonging to the same ancestor, who are beyond two generations[6].

We will write a custom Essay on Unilineal kinship units specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In cases where these descent groups are present, they play an irreplaceable role in the organization of domestic life, culture propagation among children, inheritance and succession, performance of religious rituals, solving of disputes, warfare and political organization.

In understanding kinship units, it is important to note that there are two types of basic rules, also known as kinship ideology. These rules are very important especially for the operation of kinships in the society.

Cultural systems which follow the unilineal descent rule acknowledge group membership emanating from either maternal or paternal line, but not both links. Under this descent, two rules exist: patrilineal and matrilineal descent[7]. To be precise, societies with patrilineal descent argue that the descent group of an individual resembles that of his father. On the other hand, societies with matrilineal rule believe that a person’s mother is the one who determines the descent group.

Furthermore, bilateral descent reckons that, parents, mother and father are to be considered in determining the descent group of an individual and for the establishment of kinship rights and obligations.

A side from these differences, the absence of nonoverlapping kinship groups in bilateral descent systems is regarded as a major defining characteristic for the two systems initially differentiated by parents[8]. In general, bilateral kinships are not common in most societies around the world despite the fact that they form the foundation of Western culture.

Unilineal kinship What causes the occurrence of unilineal cultures? Anthropologists pose that unilineal systems are mainly caused by two factors, which are considered to be principal merits of the system[9]. The first advantage is the formation of nonoverlapping descent groups that allow their continuity over a given period of time even though there could be membership changes.

Furthermore, corporate descent groups are permanent and their existence is not determined by the presence of individual members at any given time in life. Through birth, corporations admit new members to replace old and dead ones for this continuity to be realistic.

Nevertheless, these changes do not hinder the upholding of the corporation’s integrity. In such cases, the established groups can go ahead and own property around the world, equivalent to how current corporations operate today. Additionally, these rules provide membership that is unambiguous to every person in the society.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Unilineal kinship units by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In other words, it is easy to trace and define group membership in cases where descent is based on one line[10]. Knowledge of one’s descent and that for others helps in comprehending social roles, duties and ownership. It also permits a person to increase the number of those people a person relates or identifies with in the society, including known and unknown persons.

An important factor in the understanding of unilineal kinship units is the fact these systems operate differently in every society around the world despite the fact that they share a host of similar properties. Additionally, the actual behavior of members may not necessarily correspond to known rules as outlined in the system ideology[11].

It can therefore be argued that systems of descent and kinship define means through which a society is able to interact with circumstances in the environment. In other words, kinship rules are likely to be bent and altered in order to suit changing times, a phenomenon common to several cultural ideas. Consequently, acceptable deviations from what the society recognizes as norms breeds flexibility for unilineal systems, which they would otherwise miss. This flexibility is extremely important for the purpose of human adaptation.

Throughout human history, there are several explanations that have been given by anthropologists concerning the evolution of unilineal kinship units. Moreover, there are diverse reasons, which give people shared interests that allow them to merge and be justified by kin relations.

The reasons may be economic in nature, defined by land or farm animals. They could also be religious, political, religious or warfare. These varied interests play a pivotal role in determining kinship ideologies even as they take their own life. As mentioned above, there is a possibility for the manipulation of kinship ideologies due to ever-changing historic and economic circumstances.

Unilineal descent groups In analyzing unilineal kinship units, it is essential to understand the linearity of human relationships. Firstly, a lineage refers to a collection of kin, with members who have a common ancestor and can evidently display genealogical connections. Male-related lineages are called patrilineages while female-related are known as matrilineages[12].

Furthermore, lineages do not have same sizes but may vary with three generations being the lowest number for upward increment. In corporate groups, lineages own property like land and all members remain responsible for the behavior of colleagues. In cases where related lineages exist, they may be considered for the formation of clans, though they may not have a specific common ancestor. On the other hand, clans whose members may feel closely related normally come together to form a pharatry.

Similarly, the functions of clans and lineages vary broadly in the world. For instance, lineages are considered local or domestic groups, which allow individual members to embrace the spirit of cooperation among themselves. Contrary, clans lack the domestic nature of lineages as they spread, covering several villages. As a result, clans are closely associated with religious and political functions compared to domestic ones observed among lineages.

Another significant function of clans is the regulation of marriage[13]. While most clans are exogamous and do not allow inter-marriages among clan members, this ensures that their unilineal character remains intact and strong. This allows children who are born to identify their maternal and paternal relatives with a lot of ease. Lastly, clan exogamy promotes peaceful social coexistence within a given society as clans get bound together through marriage relationships.

Patrilineal descent groups As mentioned above, these types of lineages emphasize the dominance of fathers as they represent the adopted descent group. It involves closely related members including fathers’ children and sons’ too. Based on this arrangement, succession and inheritance are quite easy as leadership power allows.

Membership for this descent group is considered as the most important fact of life as fathers, brothers and their children are recognized as the closest kin[14]. According to the rules of this group, its members have a right towards land, participation in ceremonies and have political and legal obligations especially during warfare.

Matrilineal descent group In understanding this group of unilineal kinship, it is worth noting that societies around the world recognize two major ties within a family. These ties include the bond between a woman and her children and that which exists between siblings in the family. Whereas patrilineal societies put a lot of weight on male authority as the controller of the system, matrilineal system recognizes a woman’s brother than her husband.

Although a man gains certain rights above his wife after marriage, this does not extend to the children[15]. Additionally, there are several responsibilities that do not belong to the husband but to the brothers of the woman. Since children within this system belong to the mother’s descent group, membership consists of the following: woman, her siblings, her children, her sisters’ children and her daughters’ children.

This system has a close correlation with the matrilocal rule, which acknowledges the fact that men ought to live near the wife’s kin after marriage. This is to say that the man can be viewed as a stranger especially within the domestic group as the woman is being surrounded by her kin.

Conclusion From the above analysis, it is evident that unilineal kinship units have a significant and irreplaceable role in the society. It is fundamental in tracing of somebody’s descent group through patrilineal or matrilineal. Additionally, a unilineal group is seen as a collective group that survives lifetime situations and changes.

While membership to unilineal group is determined at birth, there are rules have been designed to address the issue of outsiders who would wish to join the system. Above all, solidarity among members is highly emphasized as they see other as relatives. Among key functions of unilineal kinships include mutual aid, security and regulation of marriage. Age sets, interdependently, and marriage links are essential in uniting unilineal kinship units.

Bibliography Chapter Nine. “Kinship.” Fasnafan. Web.

Haviland et al. The Essence of Anthropology. Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009.

Peoples, James, and Garrick Bailey. Humanity: An Introduction to Cultural Anthropology. Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2011.

Footnotes Chapter Nine, “Kinship,” Fasnafan.

Haviland et al., The Essence of Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009), 250-268.

James Peoples and Garrick Bailey, Humanity: An Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2011), 104-200.

Haviland et al., The Essence of Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009), 250-268.

Chapter Nine, “Kinship,” Fasnafan.

Haviland et al., The Essence of Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009), 250-268.

Chapter Nine, “Kinship,” Fasnafan.

Haviland et al., The Essence of Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009), 250-268.

James Peoples and Garrick Bailey, Humanity: An Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2011), 104-200.

Chapter Nine, “Kinship,” Fasnafan.

James Peoples and Garrick Bailey, Humanity: An Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2011), 104-200

Haviland et al., The Essence of Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009), 250-268.

Chapter Nine, “Kinship,” Fasnafan.


Haviland et al., The Essence of Anthropology (Stamford, Connecticut, U.S: Cengage Learning, 2009), 250-268.


The Rise of Airbus Case Study college admissions essay help

Airbus is a joint venture in Europe, involving EADS and BAE organizations. Its centre is in France. Since 1970’s, Airbus has become an aircraft producer for massive civil jetliners and, currently, it is struggling for the market headship with Boeing, in a duopoly. The corporation offers an array of aisles and broad, body aircrafts, which ferry from 110 to 555 travelers, a mark of sturdy diversification.

Airbus has the mark of the innovation leader, through using fresh technologies for lessening operating fuel burn, overheads, noise, emanations, and, concurrently, the escalating range. Since 2002, the corporation has been experiencing regular revenues boost. In 2006, the company recorded €25.2 billion, a raise of 13.2% from the previous year (Airbus, 2006).

Therefore, Airbus is the cash cow of EADS, with almost 64 % of the sum revenue at EAD. Airbus believes piously in the well-built air traffic connecting main hub airports in the world, from a strategic standpoint. Hence Airbus considers its mega-jumbo A380 like the airline’s preeminent solution in prospect (Norris, 2010).

This paper first analyzes the mission, objectives, and strategies of Airbus, before discussing the key internal strengths and weaknesses, as well as, the key external opportunities and threats facing the industry. Recommendations and conclusions appear at the last sections of the paper.

Mission, Objectives, and Strategies of Airbus The long-term strategic purpose of Airbus is in its strategic group vision of “creating the best and safest aircraft” (Airbus, 2006). The mission statement, which pursues the standard “to meet the wants of operators and airlines through producing the most recent and comprehensive aircraft family on the market, complemented by the highest standard of product support”(Airbus, 2006), substantiates the long term strategic purpose of the company.

To specify this mission, Airbus planned in its goal that the corporation desires to deliver strong products in a sustained way, while dominating almost half of commercial aircraft market, in the globe, eventually. This will thrive by objectives such as extra internationalization, centering on chief geographic markets, intensifying its client services offering, as well as, reinstating its competitive frame through focusing on competence and flexibility.

Key Internal Strengths

A chief reason for the triumph of Airbus is diversity. At present, the global presence of airbus is growing internationally. Airbus has advantage due to the diversity of its workers. For instance, among its 55,000 workers, are employees from diverse nationalities. The industry values the knowledge and skills that persons from diverse environments bring.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A corporation cannot help but flourish when it embraces the blend of vision, knowledge, ideas and such a mixture of cultures generates. This initiative assists Airbus to flourish in its endeavors. The industry has become an international player, since 1970, beating Boeing in 2005, a firm that has been in function for an exceedingly long phase. The incessant declaration to freeze the costs of spare parts is a key success of Airbus, regarding customer support. This has been the case for three consecutive years.


The impediment of the A380 is a key weakness, presently, facing Airbus. On October 2006, it caused the European Aeronautic Defense and Space Company (EADS), the parent corporation, to alter its administration. Breiger, the earlier head of Eurocopter, is the principal operating officer and Hans Peter Ring, a former EADS chief financial officer is the CFO at Airbus (Norris, 2010).

On top of the modifications in upper administration, Airbus, as well, plans to lessen the amount of suppliers it utilizes. Airbus approximates that the strategy, which would cut the corporation’s supplier revolution, would lessen material prices by $2 billion over the subsequent three years.

The aircraft monster declares that the supplier consolidation will, as well, reduce administrative overheads by almost $446.5 million. At first, Airbus surprised clients and investors, in June, by increasing the A380’s construction impediment to a whole year, blaming wiring issues. However, in the beginning October, it doubled the delay, once more, to a sum of two years and alleged the delay would wash $6 billion off the proceeds of the parent group EADS in four years (Norris, 2010).

In the year 2006, additional ramifications from the impediment of the A380 harmed Airbus when the biggest, global express transportation corporation, FedEx, turned, into the earliest of Airbus’ clients, to withdraw ten double-decker orders, in preference of fifteen Boeing freighters.

Key External Opportunities An ongoing achievement for Airbus is their dedication to environmental conservation. This is a win/win condition for any corporation that desires to be at the vanguard of the next upheaval of clean technology, and obtain its benefits.

Building new technologies, which decrease an aircrafts existence carbon footprint, is an attractive aspect that every airline would desire to have. The view of the public regarding the Earth and the impacts of global warming is changing, and the meeting, which Airbus and other corporations attended in 2006, is confirmation that they are ready for transformation.

We will write a custom Case Study on The Rise of Airbus specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Airbus takes pleasure, since it is one of the business leaders that are sensitive to the environment. In the current world, it is vital for a large company to be environmentally clean as clients like to do business with corporations that conserve resources for future use.

As a business leader, Airbus dedicates to achieving environmental distinction, both for its products and in its production sites. Thus, the corporation dedicates its effort to enhancing environmental responsiveness incessantly, by ensuring that all its production sites conform to the latest values for environmental friendliness.

Nine other Airbus developing sites obtained the ISO 14001 certification in 2005. This is an ingredient of a companywide strategy to execute an Environmental Management System, so as, to enhance its environmental performance (Norris, 2010).

As a business leader, however, Airbus devotes to moving towards ecological excellence and the Ecological Management System will be the key provision to demonstrate how its methodically participating improved ecological practices into all areas of its commerce.

With the ISO 14001 warranty of Toulouse and Hamburg sites beleaguered for use in 2006, Airbus will, in that case, convert all these distinct sites certification into a general business certification, including spots and produces, by the end of 2006” (Airbus, 2006).

Airbus has also setup a business to reprocess planes that may undergo withdrawal in the prospect. Airbus guesses that extra 4,000 airplanes may undergo superannuation in the subsequent twenty years, roughly 2000 per year. EADS works with associates, such as, SITA (a waste management company) to aid with the reprocessing of the mothballing of the aircrafts (Airbus, 2006).

The projects technical manager of Airbus, proclaimed this regarding functioning with SITA, “We concentrate, in procedures, to reprocess and recuperate used materials like, tires, plastics and batteries” (Norris, 2010) However, Airbus attempts to delight the clients with being conserving the environment. It is extremely bracing to see that Airbus takes egotism in being harmless and clean to the environs.


Lawsuit is a threat to Airbus industry. Just of late, Airbus pleaded guilty, alongside with Air France, for indemnities that stemmed close to the town of Strasbourg in the 1992 crash, whereby almost ninety individuals died.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Rise of Airbus by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Although the substantiation is unsuccessful to point to one individual intention that caused the plane to bang in to the mounts, it does appear that a mass of factors ranging from an inexpert crew to a possible broken down guidance system may have been at mistake. To date, Air France has now paid$27 million to many families of the victims (Airbus, 2006). It can request the corporation to pay their share of the dents.

Since Airbus is a worldwide corporation, which has clients and providers from all over the sphere, a main economic risk they face is how money exchange rates affect profits. Parent institutions of EADS’ chief revenues are in U.S. dollars although a hefty portion of its incurred outlays is in the shape of Sterling Pounds, the legal tender of the United Kingdom, and Euro, that of the European Union.

The disparity of exchange rates may cause an adverse change in Airbus and, consequently, EADS income. So as, to tackle this hitch, EADS runs a long-term equivocation portfolio that attempts to guard itself against noteworthy changes in the exchange rate, in addition to, irregular losses of revenue as a result of deferment, as in the situation of the A380, and order terminations, like in the circumstance of FedEx.

Airbus has lots of peripheral risks out of their mechanism as the terrorist assaults in New York and Madrid, and the extent of the SARS (Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome) virus has validated. Terrorism and epidemics can adversely affect public opinion of air travel security and ease, which can affect the mandate for air travel and manufacture of new profit-making aircraft (Norris, 2010).

Moreover, significant airplane bangs may have a destructive effect on the public views, on the wellbeing, of an aircraft. As of endemics, terrorism and other tragic occasions, an airline may be confronted, with declined demand for air voyage, and be forced to take expensive security and safety techniques. Another peril inherent in the airline industry is rivalry. Most of EADS’ companies are subject to significant rivalry. Airbus, in particular, has suffered from the descending price pressure subsequent from the rivalry.

EADS believe that the current falling of some of the essential causes of such price rivalry instigates the current failing of ultimatum which has led to superior control for certain clients to encourage rivalry in reverence of a variety of issues, most outstandingly price and imbursement terms (Norris, 2010). Airbus and its most direct opponent Boeing have both blamed each other of unlawful government backing. In previous years, Airbus and its main rivals have benefited from government funding for product investigation and expansion.

However, no declarations can be given that backing will last to be made accessible for future developments. In 1992, the European Union and the United States arrived into a consensual “Agreement on Trade in Large Civil Aircraft”, whose main impartial was to legalize the height of regime provision to both airliner industries.

The autarchic departure from the 1992 pact by the US government in late 2004 finally led to denunciations back and out by the EU and the US, through the World Trade Organization (Norris, 2010). The US and the EU have, as well, arrived into deliberations, to seek steadfastness to the issues being doubtful in the official WTO process, with the goal of approving on a new structure that provides for a level on stage field when backing future airliner developments.

In 2005, the EU and the US settled on terms for dialogues on grants affecting the civil airliner sector. The objective of these discussions was to eradicate dissimilar types of sponsorships and fair market-based rivalry among Boeing and Airbus.

Peter Mandelson, the current Trade Commissioner for the European Union, expressed content because he was able to settle on a way onward, together with the previous US Deputy Secretary of State. He hoped that their talks in the subsequent three months would tip to an agreement ending endowments to development and production of large civil airplane.

Airbus can arguably be delighted of the brilliant range of airliner it is manufacturing and is obviously capable of challenging in the worldwide market place. In the year and a half since repudiations first initiated, the two are no closer to deciding the disputes. In November 2006, America took the initiative of building the first suggestions to a WTO panel concerning government backings for Airbus.

EU Trade spokesperson Peter Power said that EU has continuously sought to resolve the aircraft disagreement through arbitration rather than a court case, but, unfortunately, the exasperation from US and Boeing is vast. The EU will powerfully protect this case and follow its own case against the WTO illegal sponsorships agreed by the US administration to Boeing (Norris, 2010).

Indirect rivals to the Airbus Corporation would comprise trains, ships and vehicles. For expanses above 1,500 miles, there exists no realistic substitute to flying.

However, shorter distances increase rivalry. Besides, airplane crashes give the foremost edge to rivalry. Although an individual is far more prone to die in a car mishap, disastrous events in the carrier commerce underline and broadcast on a sophisticated level.

Airbus Flight 587 collapsed to the earth, after leaving the airport, exterminating the 260 on board and 6 people on the ground, in 2001. The plane breakdown initiates the mishap. Catastrophes such as this give a false representation of flying, and are the springs of untrusting passengers, who then opt to move by other ways.

Airbus also façades much rivalry right within the aircraft engineering industry. The “strength” of Airbus is their A320 kinfolk, which comprises the A318, A319, A320 and the A321. Direct rivals to these aircrafts are a sequence of the Embraer E-Jets and Boeing aircrafts. Embraer, is position four in the world manufacture of civil airliners, and second in local airliners (Airbus, 2006).

Their chief focus is on jets and turboprops with area for 21-116 travelers. They also harvest transport, light attack, and observation airplane in which the Brazilian Air Force is their chief buyer. Bombardier, traced in Quebec, is the numeral three producers of national airliners.

It leads Embraer in the manufacture of regional airliners and the number one. Bombardier’s conveyance division includes Daimler Chrysler’s Adtranz rail system, which is the chief railway gear maker in the world. They also preserved a reformation vehicle industry at one time, which they vended.

Embraer and Bombardier are negligible rivalry to Airbus when related to Boeing. Boeing is the world’s biggest space corporation globally, while Airbus is the strongest opponent in the commercial airliner industry. The competing corporations are far from a welcoming connection. In 1992, a contract between the corporations quantified the limit of sponsorships endorsed from their governments, but the contract has been unworkable.

Each firm has blamed the other for not following the instructions in the contract, and, in 2004, Boeing filed an official protest. In reply, Airbus also filed an objection based on partial launch aid by the US administration. The court case is in the process, at present, and the ending will have a massive impact on the prospect of the aircraft business. Potential projects, for instance, Airbus’s A350 will rely on subsidy, through the administration, to assist with development and research overheads.

For the present projects, the A380 airliner should go directly with the Boeing 747 (Sascha, 2007). Although 2005 was the fifth year in a ruckus, whereby Airbus obtained beyond fifty percent of the market share, problems with the A380 are likely to bring this line to a halt this year. The interruptions in the engineering and delivering of the A380 are proving to be extremely destructive.

In June of this year, Airbus had stated a second delay in the conveyance of expected airliners, which is leading to a decline in orders and shares. In its place, the companies will acquire fifteen freighters from Boeing, each worth $235 million each (Airbus, 2006). Airbus still has 166 orders registered, but further deferrals and prevention can easily cause Airbus to drop more transactions to Boeing. The year 2006 is the crucial time yet in the conflict among Boeing and Airbus for market fragment.

Analysis of Airbus Strategies Organization of Philosophy, Culture and Leadership

The philosophy of the corporation is, at all times, to listen to its clients, which has positioned Airbus at the vanguard of the business. The value of excellence and innovation normally links with a tradition of partnership by management, as well as, amid the workers and the administrative levels- like towards clients and suppliers. The notion of leadership at Airbus is about sharing tasks and ideas amid all nationalities and levels, so as to obtain the best outcome.

Strategic Levels

Functional-region strategies inside the division of Airbus signify the strong relation with the parent group EADS. Besides, it is expanding internationally with an inclusive strategy of improving the supply chain and market existence. EADS corporate strategy applies on Airbus since Airbus is a whole subsidiary of EADS and acts as its segment.

The key management aims to emphasize EADS’ place as a leader in main international defense and aerospace economies. Airbus, in its business approach, in the division, follows diversification strategy as the finest cost source in each market division for outstanding jetliners, which are civil and commercial.

Differentiation Strategy of Airbus

The Airbus A380 is Airbus’ key to the increasing traffic linking main hubs, as well as, scarce resources and slot faculties at these centers. Therefore, Airbus upholds the notion of the hub strategy, which requires the volume of travelers at central airports be increased by added mass transportation and feeder traffic on extensive haul flights with extremely vast airplanes.

Improvement of Quality, Efficiency, Customer Responsiveness and Innovation

In an endeavor to re-establish its competitive frame, Airbus aims at improving its customer receptiveness, value, efficiency and innovation. So as, to streamline the business and productions procedures and to form a system of international business partners, the company launched the Power 8 program (Sascha, 2007).

To reinforce the partnership with main suppliers everywhere in the world, EADS established a supplier and procurement system. Data streams collectively in the EADS Global Innovation Networks so as, to improve cooperation, sharing practices and competence of the supply chain. Airbus, also, stress on the expansion of goods in reaction to customer desires.

Recommendations/ Implementation Issues Airbus does need to advance something on its new airliner the A380. Airbus needs to discourse the public complaint of the excessive deal of sound the A380 makes close to the airfields. Also, Airbus should think through changing/reconsidering its goals under its mission declaration about conveying on time, with high worth, done the first time, if, in fact, it cannot meet these typical it has set for itself.

In the long-standing, Airbus may form a few modifications and enhancements reach its clients and even get in new ones. For the long -term, we feel that Airbus needs to try to defeat the overseas emerging markets. These markets would comprise nations like India and China, which are presently experiencing defeat by Boeing.

Airbus also needs to certify that there is a vast deal of miscellany within the firm. We feel that people do notice when a global enterprise such as Airbus is willing to hire personnel of diverse nationalities. We feel that multiplicity is notable for a worldwide corporation because they hear diverse aspects from all over the sphere.

In the long-standing Airbus should remain to make security number one. Airbus uses a lot of money on drill and security, and they should remain to do so for everybody who flies on a plane with subsidy. The very last item we would propose for Airbus is to uphold its endeavors to preserve the environment.

Airbus, as well, needs to collaborate with airfields and airport stylists of new airfields, since there is a limited volume of airfields that the new A380 can use. Most airfield airstrips are diminutive, not wide plenty, and they cannot handle the massive load of the A380. Airbus has earlier done a marvelous job, by being ecologically clean, and they should endure to improve these efforts, as fresh skills allow them to do so.

In conclusion, the mission, objectives and strategies of Airbus are all connected to the long-term strategic vision. The chief strength of Airbus is the diversity of its workers. On the other hand, Airbus faces a key weakness due to the impediment of the A380. A key external strength for Airbus is their dedication to environmental conservation.

Building new technologies, which decrease an aircrafts existence carbon footprint, is an attractive aspect, since the view of the public regarding the Earth and the impacts of global warming is changing. Lawsuit, exchange rates, terrorists and rivalry are some of the threats facing Airbus.

The value of excellence and innovation normally links with a tradition of partnership by management, as well as, amid the workers and the administrative levels- like towards clients and suppliers. Also, the Airbus A380 is Airbus’ key to the increasing traffic linking main hubs, as well as, scarce resources and slot faculties at these centers.

References Airbus (2006). Airbus, a leading aircraft manufacture. Retrieved from

Norris, G. (2010). Airbus A380: superjumbo of the 21st century. Minneapolis, MN: Zenith.

Sascha, M. (2007). Airbus versus Boeing: strategic management report. Munich: G RIN Publishing GmbH


Grass Fed Animals vs. Grain/Corn Fed Animals Research Paper best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Shift from Grass to Corn Feeding

The Significance of Corn Feeding

Grass Finishing Compared to Grain Finishing

Solution: Match Corn and Grass Feed

The Essence of Abuse-to-Animals Regulation by FDA


Reference List

Introduction Over the last 100 years, beef farming has experienced gradual but tremendous advancement. Prior to World War II, livestock farming was largely reliant on grass-feeding. Beef farmers fed their cattle from large pastures, with minimal addition of non-grass supplements.

After the war, improvements in agriculture have seen beef production largely shifted from the reliance on grass as the primary source of feeds to corn. This shift, though gradual, has had more reputable results- as well as impacts on beef farming. Corn-fed cows are fatter, they mature faster and they have better aggregate weight as compared to the ones that are fed with grass- all other conditions been equal.

Although, Corn-fed cows are fatter and are potentially more marketable, they are of poor nutritional value since corn contains more energy supplements which add fats. Energy supplements that add fats raise cholesterol value in beef. Corn based diet is also deficient in Omega-3 and certain essential proteins. This paper seeks to address the value of feeds to grazers- specifically cattle, as an effort to proffer a solution or improve on both the appearance and products content of the animals.

The Shift from Grass to Corn Feeding Several reasons amount to why a number of farmers prefer feeding their cattle off of grass. Even though corn-fed cows are fatter and are potentially more marketable in terms of body size, the most certain reason why farmers are increasingly adopting grain-feeding is dependent on the ease with which feeds are made available to the animals using feedlots.

In the United States, corn is extremely affordable- this leaves most farmers with the one option of sourcing for corn as animal feeds. Feeding cattle exclusively on grass requires more demand for land and labour, as grazing animals would always rum to feed. The argument has however been; feedlots rely on corn as the primary fodder for beef cattle, and this has resulted in decreased vitamins, proteins and essential fats. Figure 1 shows deterioration in Omega- 3s, as cows are grain-fed.

Figure 1: Deterioration in Omega-3s, as cows are grain-fed (Tashin, 2011)

With decrease in nutritive content, consumers of corn-bred beef take meat that is diminished in animal health and low taste and quality beef products. As an alternative, other than matching the quantity of corn fed to the animals with the amount of grass and other normal feed by beef farmers, the FDA may be required to regulate the use of corn feeds in order to mammies the abuse of animals. Figure 2 presents data on the naturalness of grass-fed beef as compared to corn-fed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Figure 2: Grass-fed beef is similar to wild game in total fat

The Significance of Corn Feeding Like any other industry, the beef industry has experienced dramatic changes over the past 100 years. These changes have been necessitated by an increase in demand for beef for human consumption and as well as for usage as raw materials for factories and industries.

Beef farmers have had to develop new methods of beef production to boost yields and meet the increasing market demand for beef. Before the 1950s, beef farmers reared beef cows on pastures, which constituted a mixture of grasses or silage as well as other useful greens such as legumes. The implication is that grass was the main source of cattle feed.

While grass-fed cows take about two to three more years to mature, and they obviously have an added advantage over corn-fed cows; grass-fed cows are reared on natural methods with minimal intake of synthetic fodder and other artificial supplements as shown in figure 2 above. Such cows are naturally developed and thus more nutritious, healthy and more tasty.

To boost cows’ nutritional value, beef farmers added grain, but only as a supplement. However, the increasing demand for beef meant that farmers had to rely on other methods of beef production. Consequently, farmers have gradually turned to corn as the primary feed for beef cattle (King Corn, 2008). Overtime, beef farmers have turned to corn as primary source of cattle feed (American grassfed, n.d.).

The use of corn as the primary fodder has both merits and disadvantages. Primarily, as a merit, it enables farmers to increase beef yields. Corn based diets constitutes soy, barley, wheat, hormones, antibiotics and artificial supplements. Corn feeding is widely practiced in North America- in counties such as Canada and the United States of America, this forms professional organizations that promote and market corn-feeding as the primary livestock rearing method.

In these countries, grass-fed livestock farming methods have increasingly diminished and where practiced, livestock takes more time to mature. This constitutes significant cost implications on beef farming as corn-fed cows produce low quality beef. Moreover, Cows fed on corn have high level of animal fats, thus reducing the amounts of consumable proteins (American grassfed, n.d.).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Grass Fed Animals vs. Grain/Corn Fed Animals specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Corn fed cows also rely on growth hormones and antibiotics and the combination of these hormones and antibiotics are meant to accelerate the growth-rate and the aggregate weight ratio of the animals.

Grass Finishing Compared to Grain Finishing Two concepts standout prominently: grass-fed beef and grass-finished beef. Through grass-feeding, the cows are fed strictly on forage all their lives. Grass-finishing entails that the animals are feed with grains, but between 90- 160 to when they are killed, they are returned to grass-feeding. This helps the animals to regain their nutritive content. Inducing the hormonal content of cows may also be necessary to promote their market value.

In the consideration of the term grass-fed beef, it is certain to take into account the fact that a majority of cows classified under this category may have at a certain point been fed with grain and grass. however, it is important to note that the finishing or fattening was done basically by relying grass-feeding instead of complete dependence on grains- at least for a period of between 90 to 160 days prior to when the animals are slaughtered.

During the period when the animals are grain-finished, there is usually a significant decrease in the nutritive value of the animals as such nutrients like omega-3 and CLA reduce in the animal body system alarmingly. It is therefore very imperative to ensure that in adapting grass-finishing, the animal is properly given enough grass at least for a period of two weeks before they are slaughtered.

Grass-feeding comes with such names as pastured beef; which implies that the animals are completely pasture-fed without any confinement. There is the possibility that a farmer may keep his or her animals in a confined situation but prevail on hay feeding- and regard the feeding process as grass-finished- this definition is currently standing a test of debate.

There is also the association of the terms ‘organic’ and ‘natural’ beef with grain-finished beef; this includes commercial beefs as well. One standing difference between natural and organic beef has to do with that fact that the feed-grain is confirmed to either be natural or organic. But whether the grains are natural or organic, it all amounts to having cattle that have been fed with grains, hence the tendency that the animals will have very low vitality is supposed.

Based on the read availability of grains, grain-feeding animals in present society is fast becoming an industrial standard since it is making it possible for producing cows that are fat and which attain level of maturity sooner. This offers cost effectiveness as well, as feeding with grains is cheaper.

Solution: Match Corn and Grass Feed To bridge the gap between corn and grass-fed disadvantages in cows, match of the feeds is supposed a better option. It is certain that the use of hormones results to faster growth of corn fed cows and increased profits for livestock farmers, there are health concerns amongst nutritionists, who claim that these hormones affect the health of beef consumers; these hormones are largely artificial and therefore not fully metabolized.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Grass Fed Animals vs. Grain/Corn Fed Animals by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thus, their residue is found to occur in beef. The concern of scientists happens to be that these hormones are likely to decrease sperm count in males as well as result to early maturation in girls. Additionally, the use of antibiotics increases the growth rates as well as protects cows from bacterial infections. However, such antibiotics lead to a rise of drug resistant strains of bacteria that not only poses other health risks to cows but also to consumers of beef (Canadian Cattlemen’s Association and Beef Information Centre, 2003).

Beef from grass fed cows has more nutritional value; it is less rich in animal fats but added volumes of nutritionally good fats such as omega-3, oxidation agents, and vitamins A and E (American grassfed, n.d.; Cross, 2011). This implies that feeding cows on corn reduces the amount of good fats. In additional, as indicated earlier, grass-less cattle diet constitutes a mixture of corn, soy, legumes and other grains (Pollan, 2006). Corn based diet is also supplemented with hormones and antibiotics (King Corn, 2008).

It is imperative to note that corn based cattle diet lacks in one of the most essential non-grass animal fodder, and which is a vital source of Omega-3 and other good fats such as conjugated linoleic acid. Health experts in animal nutrition have found out that linseed, or flax as it is popularly known, is one of the richest sources of Omega-3, essential proteins and other good fats.

It evident that linseed conspicuously misses from corn based cattle diet, popularly used by farmers. It is also revealed that since linseed contains essential proteins, Omega-3 and other good fats, it is a valuable substitute for corn based fodder. As such, when fed to animals, linseed not only makes a healthy diet but also result to better quality beef (Maddock, Bauer, Koch, Anderson, Maddock, Barceló-Coblijn, Murphy and Lardy, 2006).

Since linseed is conspicuously absent from corn based diet, corn-bred cows are less healthy and have poor quality beef compared to grass raised beef. Additionally, majority of the modern consumers are concerned with three vital qualities of beef. These are the price of beef, the taste and the nutritional value. Despite the fact that grass raised beef is costlier than corn raised beef (Aubrey, 2010), grass raised beef has richer taste and added nutritional benefits for consumers.

Studies conducted by Colorado State University reveals that corn-bred cows have well marbled fats and thus have better taste than grass bred cows. The experts further found out that improved fat marbling resulted from meticulous grass feeding. Beef from meticulously grass-fed animals were thus found to have better taste than corn-bred cows (Umberger, Thilmany and Ziehl, 2003). In addition to this, the combination of superior grass breeding habits and good breed selection produces superior tasting beef.

Superior beef breeds such as Hereford or Angus, when carefully bred using grass-feeding methods, produce a beefier taste as compared to corn bred cows (Maddock et al., 2006). Raising cows on corn-based diet reduces the nutritional value thus destroying the taste as well as the food content of the beef.

The Essence of Abuse-to-Animals Regulation by FDA The quality of food supplied to consumers is vital. As such, there is need to regulate rearing of beef cows. Raising cattle on corn produces fatter and heavier animals at a faster rate than raising cows on grass alone. However, as indicated earlier, raising cattle on grass produces learner animals, which takes a longer time to mature. It is more expensive to feed cows on grass that on corn. Grass-fed cows are also healthier than corn-fed cows (American grassfed, n.d.; King Corn, 2008).

To maximize on gains of both corn and grass feeding, it is imperative to equalize the amount of corn and grass fed to cattle through out their growth period. This will ensure that both the farmer and the consumer gains added benefits. A study conducted by the FDA concluded that corn has significant levels of mycotoxins such as fumonisin (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2001).

Fumonisins are considered to be vital elements that enhance both human and animals health. Fumonisins are caused by many types of molds especially Fusarium moniliforme, either during storage or during manufacturing of grains.

There are various types of fumonisins which occur in both processed and raw animal products. These include fumonisin B1, B2 and fumonisin B3. Of the three mostly occurring fumonisins, fumonisin B1 is the most toxic. While Fumonisins are vital for good health, exceeding their standard limit exposes both humans and animals to certain health risks. It is imperative to state that most of these fumonisins, including fumonisin B1 occur in grain especially corn, especially those produces using flooding.

Around some point of thought, Americans dietary habits have been put into sharp focus since more than a quarter of their diet items contain corn (Pollan, 2006). Studies reveal that human intake of fumonisin is mainly via infected corn or minimally through beef.

There is also the progression to authenticate the fact that beef from cows which consumed fumonisin infected corn causes diseases amongst consumers. As a result of consuming fumonisin infected products, human beings risk contracting such health conditions as esophageal cancer (Turner, Nikiema and Wild, 1999).

Feeding cows on corn exposes them to health hazards such as toxic liver and kidney, leukoencephalomalacia as well as pulmonary edema. This exposes such cows and the consumers of resultant beef to these health risks. Additionally, feeding cows on corn alone denies them the opportunity to acquire vital fats such as Omega-3 found in grasses. This is possibly the reason why Cross (2011) argues that feeding cows on corn in inhumane. As a result, it is vital for the FDA to regulate such abuse through FDA’s legal framework.

The FDA can also achieve the regulation through attending as many international conventions organized by accredited bodies such as World Health Organization, and the UN, among others, to sensitize them on the health risk posed by fumonisins. Additionally, the FDA will seek corporation from these bodies in regulating the use of corn as a method of raising beef cows (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2001).

While these are long term measures, there are other immediate measures that FDA, in collaboration with other authorities, there is need to take to ensure that the level of fumonisin remains at the required level.

Most of the fumonisin affected corn occurs as a result of flooding during the production process. FDA also need to either educate farmers on how to ensure that flood water does not come into contact with the edible parts of the corn crop to avoid contamination. FDA could also educate farmers on how to adhere to safety standards during production of corn, and thus minimize microbial hazards (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2011).

Conclusion It is imperative to note the benefits of raising cattle on corn; faster growth, affordability, more weight and thus more profits. However, the use of corn as cattle feed needs to be strictly regulated due to associated consumer health risks. As more people consume beef from corn bred cattle, the overall food quality is compromised. This calls for regulations because if the use of corn is not regulated, people will largely remain uneducated on healthy consumption habits.

Reference List American grassfed. Frequently Asked Questions. Web.

Aubrey , A. (2008). Npr. Web.

Canadian Cattlemen’s Association and Beef Information Centre. (2003), Understanding Use of Antibiotic and Hormonal Substances in Beef Cattle. Web.

Cross, K. (2011). The grass-fed vs. grain-fed beef debate. Web.

Gafa, D. (2011). Animal production for engineers. Ibadan: University Press.

Maddock, T, Bauer, M, Koch, M, Anderson, V, Maddock, R, Barceló-Coblijn, G, Murphy, G


The Atlantic Slave Trade Research Paper best essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

The Atlantic Slave Trade



Abstract This paper seeks to highlight on the issue of The Atlantic Slave Trade in relation to factors that led to the Atlantic Slave trade, how the Atlantic slave trade operated, effects of the Atlantic slave trade and finally end of the Atlantic slave trade.

The Atlantic Slave Trade The Atlantic Slave Trade was one of the most inhumane forms of slavery. It should, however, be noted that it was neither the first nor the only slave trade[1]. By The eighteenth century, a large percentage of the European population was descendants of slaves. Slavery was not only about the Africans who endured the Atlantic Slave Trade. The most common slavery worldwide was domestic slavery. The rich in the society owned slaves in their homes. In some societies, the more the slaves one had, the higher his or her social status became.

Africans had been undergone slave trade for many centuries, reaching Europe through trans-Saharan and Islamic-run trade routes[2]. Slavery was a tradition in many African societies. Various kingdoms took part in debt bondage, serfdom and chattel slavery. The most severe forms of the slave trade existed in West Africa. An example is the Atlantic Slave Trade, which reduced human beings to commodities.

The trade began in the mid-fifteenth century, and was at its peak by the eighteenth century. [3]Europeans had become involved in the extensive gold and salt trade across the Sahara Desert. This was extremely cumbersome since they depended on African merchants to act as middle-men. The Africans would bring them gold from the West African Kingdoms via the Sahara Desert. The Europeans wanted to seek direct access to the gold trade in West Africa and to the spice islands of south-east Asia[4].

European Empires were expanding at an extremely fast rate. However, they lacked a vital resource to match their fast-growing economy. They did not have a work force. In many cases, the natives were unreliable since most of them succumbed to illnesses brought over from Europe. The Europeans, on the other hand, did not adjust well to the climate.

Tropical diseases affected many of them. Africans, however, proved to be excellent workers. They had vast experience in farming, tropical diseases did not affect them, and they could be forced to work on plantations and mines. Many crops could not be grown in Europe. Exporting them to Europe from the New World was more economical. The plantations required a vast amount of labor in order for any profits to be realized[5].

Free Europeans easily owned land since cheap land was available. This led to increased labor shortage since not many Europeans were available to work in the farms. What began as a harmless gold and spice trade ended up giving rise to the slave trade.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More [6]The Atlantic Slave Trade operated like a triangle which involved Africa, Europe and the Americas. All the three stages of the Triangular Trade proved to be economically beneficial to the merchants.

The first stage was from Europe to Africa. Transportation of manufactured goods was from Europe to Africa. These included tobacco, cowry shells, guns, cloth and metal goods. Kings used guns to expand their kingdoms and acquire more slaves. In exchange for the goods, the European merchants obtained African slaves. Some of the slaves were captives or prisoners of war.

The community did not regard these slaves as part of them. The kings could, therefore, not defend them. [7]The community sold criminals as slaves to prevent them from committing more crimes. Others were victims of kidnappings and raids. The merchants matched the slaves to the West African coast for sale, and kept them in large forts known as factories. Here, they waited to be shipped to the Americas.

The living conditions in the factories were pathetic. The rooms were dark and dirty. Food and drinks were scarce. Most of them died while in these factories. The European merchants used to wait for the slaves at the coast. This is because they feared contracting tropical diseases. They also feared resistance from the native communities.

The second stage of the Triangular Trade, also called the middle passage, was from Africa to the Americas. Slave ships transported them to the Americas. Chains bound the slaves to each other, and they were stacked in spaces with no space for standing. They lay on their backs with their heads between their neighbor’s legs. In such situations, epidemics broke out. Infected slaves were thrown overboard in an attempt to control the spread of diseases.

On arrival, the slaves worked on plantations and mines. They were not only sent to North America but also to the east coast of South America and the Caribbean islands. Those shipped to South America and the Caribbean islands lived in seasoning camps where they were tortured to prepare them for their new life. In these camps, many died due to dysentery. The most famous of these camps was in Jamaica[8].

The third stage was from the Americas back to Europe. The merchants carried with them produce from the plantations. These included rum, sugar, cotton and tobacco. [9]Africa, as well as Europe, felt the effects of the slave trade. The demand for slaves increased due to the continued European colonization of the New World.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Atlantic Slave Trade specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This, in turn, increased the inter-ethnic war in West Africa. Some African kingdoms even resorted to selling their own people so as to obtain the goods from the Europeans. Slave trade led to the birth of a number of powerful kingdoms. They used advanced iron technology to capture more slaves and sell them at a profit to the European merchants. The population in the raided areas significantly declined.

The shortage of men led to reversal of roles in these societies. Women performed duties initially reserved for their brothers and husbands[10]. Some scholars believe that the constant violence and inhumanity experienced in this era contributed immensely to the present beliefs in witchcraft. In many West African cultures, witches kidnap individuals so as to enslave them. The goods brought from Europe enabled the African states to develop artistic traditions using expensive material.

The Europeans, on the other hand, benefited greatly from the trade. The agricultural profits funded the industrial revolution. The population also grew tremendously. It also gave rise to the present day racism.

The Atlantic Slave Trade finally came to an end after four hundred years of existence. There were several factors that contributed to this. There was an increasingly growing public revulsion against slavery. A major contributor to this was Olaudah Equiano, born in present-day Nigeria and sold as a slave to the Americas.

He managed to buy his freedom and published a book on his experience as a slave. This had an enormous impact on the world’s opinion on the slave trade. There had also been a successful revolt in Haiti which made people in the Americas realize that slavery could be challenged.

The Industrial Revolution in North America and Europe also contributed. Many advocated for free rather than forced labor since slavery was an economic liability. Britain became the first European country to ban the slave trade[11]. Other European countries quickly followed suit. In addition, Britain dispatched war ships to the Atlantic Ocean so as to counter the slave ships from West Africa. The freed slaves settled in Liberia and Sierra Leone in West Africa. In the United States, however, slavery still existed until the year eighteen sixty four.

The Atlantic Slave Trade is, therefore, of significant importance to the history of Africa and the world at large. It had a marked impact on the social, economic and political growth of many countries in the world[12].

References Anstey, Roger. The Atlantic Slave Trade and British abolition, 1760-1810. London: Macmillan, 1975.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Atlantic Slave Trade by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Bortolot, Alexander Ives. “The Transatlantic Slave Trade.” In Heilbrunn Timeline of Art History. New York: The Metropolitan Museum of Art, 2000-October 2003. Web.

Hogendorn, Jan, and Marion Johnson. The Shell Money of the Slave Trade. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press. 1986.

Keith, Bradley, and Cartledge Paul. The Cambridge World History of Slavery. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011.

Klein, Herbert S. The Atlantic Slave Trade. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 1999.

Footnotes Anstey, Roger. The Atlantic Slave Trade and British abolition, 1760-1810. London: Macmillan, 1975.

Klein, Herbert S. The Atlantic Slave Trade. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 1999.

Anstey, Roger. The Atlantic Slave Trade and British abolition, 1760-1810. London: Macmillan, 1975.

Keith, Bradley, and Cartledge Paul. The Cambridge World History of Slavery. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011.

Hogendorn, Jan, and Marion Johnson. The Shell Money of the Slave Trade. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press. 1986.

Bortolot, Alexander Ives. “The Transatlantic Slave Trade.” In Heilbrunn Timeline of Art History. New York: The Metropolitan Museum of Art, 2000-October 2003.

Hogendorn, Jan, and Marion Johnson. The Shell Money of the Slave Trade. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press. 1986.

Hogendorn, Jan, and Marion Johnson. The Shell Money of the Slave Trade. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press. 1986.

Klein, Herbert S. The Atlantic Slave Trade. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 1999.

Hogendorn, Jan, and Marion Johnson. The Shell Money of the Slave Trade. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press. 1986.

Klein, Herbert S. The Atlantic Slave Trade. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 1999.

Bortolot, Alexander Ives. “The Transatlantic Slave Trade.” In Heilbrunn Timeline of Art History. New York: The Metropolitan Museum of Art, 2000-October 2003.


Domestic Terrorism in the Post 9/11 Era Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Domestic terrorism in the post 9/11 era



Introduction Terrorism has being a threat worldwide, yielding to negative results on the targeted areas and causing loss of lives and property. The 9/11 attacks were a revelation to the United States government that more efforts were needed in the fight against terrorism.

The September 11th 2001 attacks involved the crashing of two planes by terrorist jets into the Twin Towers, which led to the collapse of the towers two hours later. The third plane hit pentagon, and the fourth crashed in Pennsylvania (BBC News 2001). This act of terrorism was conducted by the Al-Qaeda, costing over 3,000 lives and leaving many Americans widows, widowers, and orphans.

Despite the heightened security in America after the 9/11 attacks, today, domestic terror threats are still evident; however, the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI), as the leading agency in detecting and preventing any terrorism acts, is working tirelessly to make sure that America is safe. This paper critically discusses domestic terrorism in the post 9/11 era.

Domestic terrorism in the post 9/11 era Despite the FBI being on the forefront towards curbing terrorism acts, the United States still remains prone to terrorism, even after the 9/11 attacks. However, according to the FBI news (2009), no act of terrorism can be compared to the terrorism attacks of 9/11, which cost thousands of lives and a negative impact on the United States economy.

Schneider (2011), in his discussion on Terrorism in the United States since the 9/11 attacks, explains that over 33 cases have been analyzed of attempted terrorism, which have yielded to deaths. Most of these cases involve a lone gunman who shot at citizens. Such attacks include the United States Holocaust memorial museum shooting in 2009 whereby, a gunman opened fire and a security guard, Stephen Tyrone, was shot and later died from injuries (Fox news, 2009).

Nevertheless, in 2009, the United States authority obscured six terrorist plots against America; since the 9/11 attacks, over 30 plots have been prevented. This indicates the determination of the FBI in making the United States a safer place.

The Zazi plot in September 2009 was a wake-up call for the United States national security. Najibullah Zazi purchased large quantities of chemical from beauty stores, with an aim of detonating bombs along the New York subway (McNeil, Carafano


Compare and contrast Mordecai Kaplan’s Judaism as a Civilization and Abraham Joshua Heschel’s the Sabbath Essay best essay help: best essay help

Modern civilization Mordecai Kaplan and Abraham Joshua Heschel are Jewish theologians who are the authors of several books that have been read and are still read by many people including the Jewish.

Among the books they have written, there are the Mordecai Kaplan’s Judaism as a Civilization and Abraham Joshua Heschel’s The Sabbath. Mordecai Kaplan’s Judaism as a Civilization focuses on the reconstruction of the American-Jewish life that would help the Jewish to change their traditional way of life through incorporations of the modern way of life, philosophy, religion and science as it develops in the U.S.

On the other hand, Abraham Joshua Heschel’s The Sabbath mainly focuses on the traditional way of life of the Jewish and Judaism and puts more emphasis on the Sabbath. Abraham Joshua views Judaism as a religion of time, which makes him focus on the past rather than the future.

Kaplan in Judaism as a Civilization views Judaism as a religion that is evolved from the traditional world to the modern world. He refers to the Judaism as a religion that has been undergoing cultural differences depending on the times that we are living. He believed in Judaism but felt that it was necessary for the Judaism to unite with other religions to form a common religion that was civilized. On the other hand, Abraham Joshua laid more emphasis on the traditional mode of life for the Jewish.

He claimed that the traditional mode of life in Judaism made the religion more spiritual and right with their God. In addition, he dealt with the traditional problems that were faced by the Judaism that he sought to find solutions. Abraham Joshua in his efforts to find solutions to the problems associated the problems faced by the Judaism with the modern life. This is a clear evidence that Abraham Joshua was against modernization.

Further, Kaplan rejected various traditions that the Jewish practiced. He found that the practices that the Jewish had were outdated. He concentrated more on the issues that would help the Jewish realize their religion and the status of life in which they were living. He further believed that some of the aspects that were inherent in Judaism were wrong and needed to be changed. In his writing, Kaplan disagreed with the Jewish category of Closeness that made them feel more superior to other religions.

In addition, Kaplan called for democracy in the synagogue, highly recommended membership to be voluntary, reconstruction of procedure of electing leaders and the individuals’ religion options respect. Kaplan believed in the time when individuals joined religion depending on their race and ancestral religion’s belief by force. On the contrary, Abraham Joshua having conservatism of the tradition, believed that the Judaism religion and culture was to remain.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He embraced and emphasized on the Jewish to maintain their status quo. Abraham Joshua believed that religion was an answer to human ultimate questions and thus religion had to be fully respected. He found that the alienation of modern man to religion was putting man into more threats. He therefore emphasized that the Jewish should leave modernity and embrace traditions that would make them more religious.

Although they had differences, there were a few similarities. They both encouraged the unity of the Jewish and encouraged them to embrace each other as brothers and sisters. They further encouraged the Jewish to have Judaism as their religion and to have faith in God. In addition, the two emphasized on prayer, as they believed that it connects man to God.

Views on Modern Society Kaplan’s concept of civilization was optimistic about the modern society. He believed that modern society including the Jewish had a future if only they would embrace civilization. He encouraged the Jewish to be patient and work towards meeting their goals as the Americans used to do.

This gave the Jewish who read his books the ideology of the Americans who believed in hard work. Kaplan believed that with the improvement in science and technology, philosophy and culture, man had a chance to grow depending on the level of civilization he embraces.

On the other hand, Heschel’s views on civilization were pessimistic. He viewed civilization, as a way to alienate modern man from religion that he believed was the answer to all human ultimate questions. He believed civilization of man would make him more venerable to threats that made him to oppose civilization in religion.

Conclusion Judaism is a religion associated with the Jewish’s who have origin in Israel. Their belief in God is strong and its what makes them more concrete with Him. Judaism as a religion embraces unity and peace but there are splits in relation to modernity.

These kinds of differences have caused splits in other religions. The views between the two theologians negate each other and none can be used to complement the other as they have several differences based on civilization. However, on their reference to God the two views can supplement each other.

We will write a custom Essay on Compare and contrast Mordecai Kaplan’s Judaism as a Civilization and Abraham Joshua Heschel’s the Sabbath specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


The Era of Liberal Consensus Essay college essay help near me

Liberalism in the United States was founded in the political ideals of the Enlightment with no monarchy, no hereditary aristocracy and no established religion (Googleberg 204). American classical liberalism promotes free market economy. In this sense the government should not interfere with trade transactions. According to the classical liberalists, wealth occurs when the market is left to the natural state of supply and demand, liberated from government interventions.

However modern liberalism opposes this concept and promoted the need of federal government involvement to improve the economy. During the Great Depression after 1933, President Franklin D. Roosevelt used the New Deal, a series of economic programs to provide relief to the unemployed and poor, recover the US economy to its normal state and reform financial systems and prevent them to repeat another depression (Sitkoff).

Among the most notable policies FDR implemented during his time were the Social Security act from his relief program group which provided benefits to retirees and the unemployed, the Reconstruction Finance Corporation from recovery which aided state and local governments in making loans to banks, railroads, and other businesses and Securities Exchange Act from the reform program group which regulated the Wall Street. In 1945, Harry Truman succeeded to the presidency when FDR died. He advocated the Fair Deal which is used to describe President Truman’s domestic reform agenda (

Successful programs of the Truman’s Fair Deal include the improvement of the social welfare system extending the Social security coverage to 10 million Americans (Donovan) and war veterans benefits such as the Veterans’ Emergency Housing Act 1946 which encouraged the construction of housing for returning soldiers (Beyer).

When republican Dwight Eisenhower succeeded the presidency, he continued the New Deal policies, enlarging the scope of the Social Security and promoted the Federal-Aid Highway Act of 1956 which authorized the construction of the Interstate Highway System which was designed to evacuate civilians and allow the military to move in if ever cities were attacked during the Cold War (

The landslide victory of Lyndon Johnsons illustrated the dominance of liberalism in the 1950s. Johnson had been a New Deal Democrat and had designed the Great Society which upheld his War on Poverty platform, to break from the New Deal ideas.

He endorsed racial and economic liberalism making his policies the sphere of influence in Republican president Nixon’s policies in the 1960s. Education was the top priority of Johnson with emphasis in helping poor children thus creating the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 which funds primary and secondary education. Richard Nixon’s most famous policy was Environmental Protection Agency which showed the political dominance of the liberal consensus in those years.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More During his presidency the liberal consensus began to fall apart. In the period of civil rights association with the white Southern Democrats had been gone and planned labour was no longer the central issue. Ronald Regan promoted his Reganomics which decreased tax rates to stimulated economic growth, lessened inflation, and deregulation of the economy and trimmed down government spending.

Regan supported the Economic Recovery Tax act of 1981 which lowered tax brackets and the Job Training Partnership act of 1982 which was a job creation program in the United States. The consensus of liberalism ended during the time of President Regan who implemented policies basing on his own classical belief and understanding of the economy.

Works Cited Beyer, Glenn. Housing and Society. New York: Macmillan, 1969. Print.

Googleberg, Doctor. The American Revolution. 7th ed. Philadelphia: Create Space, 2011. Print.

Donovan, Robert. Tumultuous Years: The Presidency of Harry S. Truman, 1949-1953. Boston: Norton, 1982. Print.

“First Deal.”, 2003. Web.

“Jean Kirkpatrick, academic and ambassador, died on December 7th, aged 80.” The Economist., 19 Dec. 2006. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on The Era of Liberal Consensus specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sitkoff, Harvard. Fifty Years Later: The New Deal Evaluated. Boston: McGraw Hill, 1985. Print.


Cancer treatment by Nanotechnology Report essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents First Draft (Introduction)

Second Draft (Cancer Treatment Using Nanotechnology)



First Draft (Introduction) Cancer is among the greatest killer diseases of the 21st century. Several factors cause cancer infection. A range of these factors either falls within the category of hormonal factors or behavioral factors. Hormonal factors include genetic mutations and somatic mutations while behavioral factors include smoking and lack of nutrition (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291).

Genetic mutations cause cancer because a range of genetic errors causes the rapid multiplication of cells, which eventually lead to the formation of cancer. For instance, for liver cancer, a perfectly healthy liver may experience excessive injuries to cells because of genetic mutations (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291). Consequently, genetic errors are bound to accumulate and unhealthy cells may rapidly multiply to cause the disorganization of cells. This cell disorganization causes cancerous cells (Gold, Slone, Manley and Ames, 2002).

Somatic mutations are notorious in damaging normal cells. Cell damage leads to cancer formation. Somatic mutations work by altering body cells to cause cancer and other diseases (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291). The theory behind the causes of cancer (through mutation) has been existent for the past 50 years.

This theory notes that cancer primarily develops from a single somatic mutation cell, which has undergone years of DNA mutation (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291). Its link with cancer therefore emanates from the fact that cancer is a disease of cell mutations, which affect the cell cycle, thereby causing the disease. Somatic mutation is at the center of the alterations in cell cycles (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 292).

Behaviorally, around the world, smoking has been singled out as the most notorious behavioral cause of cancer (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291). For instance, a fifth of all cancer cases in the world are attributed to smoking (Gold et al., 2002). The most common form of cancer (attributed to smoking) is lung cancer because about four in five lung cancer cases are caused by smoking (Gold et al., 2002).

The link between smoking and cancer can be traced to research studies, which affirm that tobacco smoke (for example) consists of more than 80 cancerous substances (Gold et al., 2002). Nonetheless, proper nutrition is synonymous with good health. In fact, proper nutritional diets do not only help fight cancers; they also help in fighting other diseases as well.

The link between cancer and nutrition is observed from the fact that some types of foods increases one’s risk of developing cancer, while other types of foods support the body in fighting cancer by boosting the immunity (Gold et al., 2002). The lack of certain types of foods may also increase one’s risk of developing cancer. For instance, patients are often advised to take plant-based foods to manage cancer (Gold et al., 2002).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Cancer treatment methods have changed over the years. Old methods of treating cancer include drug administration, radiation and surgery. However, a newer method of cancer treatment includes nanotechnology (and other transitional drug treatment methods).

This paper elaborates on the usefulness of using nanotechnology in the treatment of cancer in Saudi Arabia. To do this, an explanation of the advantages of nanotechnology over other cancer treatment methods will be evaluated. These advantages will be highlighted by explaining how nanotechnology works and how it is fast and efficient in treating cancer.

The latter segment constitutes an explanation of how nanotechnology reduces the side effects of treating cancer and how it facilitates the easy adoption of drugs into the cancerous cells. Consequently, a comprehensive overview of how nanotechnology helps in treating cancer will be explained.

Second Draft (Cancer Treatment Using Nanotechnology) Saudi Arabia has a relatively lower incidence of cancer when compared to other gulf countries. However, cancer treatment and care in Saudi Arabia is normally different from other countries. The difference emanates from the fact that there is a clash between acceptable and unacceptable cancer treatment methods in the Kingdom.

This difference also stretches to the way cancer education is administered, and the manner cancer patients receive care. Similar to the history of cancer in the US, most cancer cases in Saudi Arabia are diagnosed at a late stage. Often, this problem is influenced by late detection and the use of inefficient and old methods of cancer treatment.

Cancer treatment methods are normally diverse and applicable in different types of situations. Conventional cancer treatment methods include surgery, chemotherapy, and radiation. Surgery works by removing cancerous tumors (surgically) as much as possible (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291). Usually, surgery is used to prevent, treat and diagnose cancer, but ordinarily, during treatment, it is combined with radiation and chemotherapy as auxiliary cancer treatment methods (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291).

Chemotherapy is a drug treatment method for treating cancer but unlike other drug treatment methods, it affects the entire human body. Like other surgery treatment methods, chemotherapy may be used alongside other cancer treatment methods (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291). Lastly, radiation works by killing cancerous cells and shrinking certain types of tumors. Similarly, radiation also works by destroying the DNA of cancerous cells thereby causing their inactivity.

We will write a custom Report on Cancer treatment by Nanotechnology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Due to the inefficiencies associated with the above methods of cancer treatment in Saudi Arabia, it is crucial to adopt newer methods of cancer treatment. Nanotechnology is one such method.

Saudi Arabia reports increased causes of cancer every year. For instance, 7,000 new cancer cases are reported every year and it is estimated that in 15 years, the kingdom will report more than 30,000 new cancer cases annually (Gold et al., 2002). These statistics abound, the future of cancer care and treatment in Saudi Arabia rests with nanotechnology.

From an electromagnetic point of view, the adoption of nanotechnology in Saudi Arabia includes the understanding of Paclitaxel-Loaded Gelatin Nanoparticles, Light Absorption by Gold Nanoparticles and Magnetic Nanoparticle Hyperthermia Methods as the main forms of cancer treatment.

Paclitaxel-Loaded Gelatin Nanoparticles is a constituent of electromagnetic cancer treatment method (in nanotechnology), which is commonly used in the treatment of intravesical bladder cancer (Gold et al., 2002). In a study to test the efficiency and use of Paclitaxel-Loaded Gelatin Nanoparticles in treating bladder cancer, it was established that “Paclitaxel-loaded gelatin nanoparticles represent a rapid release, biologically active paclitaxel formulation that can be used for intravesical bladder cancer therapy” (Torchilin, 2007, p. 128).

Its efficacy is therefore undisputed. Gold nanoparticles are exclusive components of cancer treatment using electromagnetic nanotechnology treatment methods. Gold nanoparticles are normally finer than dust particles (Gold et al., 2002). These particles normally contain “peptide” which draws nanospehers directly to the cancerous cells and destroying them (Huang, Jain, El-Sayed and El-Sayed, 2007, p. 681).

Magnetic nanoparticle hyperthermia method is normally used in the early detection of cancer because it is ordinarily contrasted with MRI imaging. The magnetic nanoparticle hyperthermia method works by producing nanoparticle suspensions that are highly effective in the early detection of tumors (Prijic and Sersa, 2011, p. 1). The magnetic nanoparticle hyperthermia method will be useful in the early detection of cancer because most cancer cases in Saudi Arabia are diagnosed late.

Nanotechnology will offer several advantages to the diagnosis, treatment and care of cancer patients in Saudi Arabia. Among the greatest advantages of nanotechnology over other cancer treatment methods is its early detection of cancer. This advantage emanates from the fact that, nanotechnology has a stronger accuracy and precision than conventional cancer detection methods (Mansoori et al, 2007, p. 226).

Precisely, electromagnetic technology aids in detecting DNA alterations at a very early stage in the development of cancer. In fact, advanced electromagnetic technology in cancer treatment helps in exclusively binding cancer cells and isolating normal cells (Mansoori et al, 2007, p. 226).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Cancer treatment by Nanotechnology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The second greatest advantage of nanotechnology is its accuracy in treating cancer because it has a stronger sense of precision and thoroughness when compared to conventional cancer treatment methods in Saudi Arabia (Mansoori et al, 2007, p. 226). In fact, the greatest promise that nanotechnology offers in cancer treatment is the fact that, it can destroy dangerous cancer cells, which have been normally resistant to conventional treatment methods.

Advanced electromagnetic nanotechnology is often combined with radiation therapy to focus cancer treatment on the specific cancer cells using laser light technology to destroy the cancer cells from within (Mansoori et al, 2007, p. 226). This treatment method improves cancer treatment.

It is through this technology that nanotechnology helps to focus drug treatment methods on the cancer cells. Future nanotechnology guarantees the alteration of cancer DNA, returning them back to normal cells. The above advantages will significantly improve the diagnosis, treatment and care of cancer patients in Saudi Arabia.

Conclusion Though there are few statistics regarding the use of nanotechnology cancer treatment in Saudi Arabia, this paper highlights the use of nanotechnology as the future of cancer treatment, diagnosis and care in Saudi Arabia. Weighing the functionality of nanotechnology and its contribution to cancer treatment, we can establish that nanotechnology will greatly improve the efficiency and precision of cancer treatment in Saudi Arabia.

From a broader point of view, nanotechnology brings immense hope in the treatment of cancer such that if a person were diagnosed with cancer, this diagnosis should not amount to an automatic death sentence. However, the use of nanotechnology in Saudi Arabia needs to be understood from the understanding of paclitaxel-loaded gelatin nanoparticles, light absorption by gold nanoparticles and magnetic nanoparticle hyperthermia methods as the main forms of cancer treatment.

Since nanotechnology is more efficient and fast in treating cancer, the future of cancer treatment in Saudi Arabia is expected to change dramatically. Among the greatest advantages of nanotechnology treatment in Saudi Arabia, which is identified in this paper, is the efficiency associated with nanotechnology (Frank and Nowak, 2004, p. 291).

In fact, conventional cancer treatment methods (such as chemotherapy and radiation) are synonymous to cancer resurfacing, thereby warranting the use of higher dosages of cancer treatment drugs in the management of the disease. Nanotechnology eliminates the possibility of cancer resurfacing by making the entire treatment process more efficient.

References Frank, S. A.


The Economic History of the United States of America Research Paper writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Economic Trends

The great depression


List of References

Introduction The United State of America has had a great trend in its economy. There have been depressions and recessions in the economy. 13 small group of farming economies joined in 1776 to form a large United States of America.

This resulted to a huge growth of the United States and it made a quarter of the world’s economy. The growth of the economy received a great boost from the political system, availability of natural resources and agricultural land that was very productive. The citizens had a big impact also since they were very innovative and entrepreneurial.

This attracted so many people from all over the world to came and settle in the United States and made the human resources available. The arrival of Europeans in the United States led to alteration of the economy since the people had to adopt the European way of life. The American Revolution led to war as the Americans were fighting for their rights and it affected the economy. The American Revolution started from 1775 to 1783.

Economic Trends The United States of America faced recessions and depressions in its economy that affected the economy of the whole world. War has been one of the major causes of recession in the United States. In 1953, the rate of unemployment was at 5%.

This was caused by the country trying to recover from the war. The unemployment levels went higher year by year and in 1957, it was at 6.2 %. The Federal Reserve used the money supply policy, which reduced the amount of money for businesses to expand, and as a result, there were no new job opportunities created.

In 1961, the level of unemployment reduced by 1% because of president Kennedy’s effort to increase the government expenditure. This came at a time when people had lacked confidence in the government as many banks were running out of money and many of them were closed. The most severe recession was experienced in 1973-75 were the rate of inflation was very high and adversely affected the whole GDP. The Vietnam War and the oil crisis caused this.

The oil embargo announced by the organization of petroleum exporting countries (OPEC) affected the production of goods and services in the U.S (Taylor 2009, p. 45). By this time, much of the world was dependent on oil for everyday life and business function. The prices of oil escalated and it was followed by the lack of sufficient supply and this affected the American economy. The GDP dropped by 3.2 percent and the unemployment rate was very high that it hit 9% with the recession ending in March 1975.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 1979, the oil prices were sharply increased all over the world due to the Iranian revolution. Izurieta (2003, p. 15) argues that the Iran’s new regime exported the oils in small volumes at very high prices and the supply was not constant. This contributed to businesses operating at high operational cost that they were declared bankrupt in 1982. As a result, many people were left unemployed with unemployment rising 10.8 percent.

During this period, the American Federal Reserve was using a very tight monetary policy in order to control inflation, which had contributed to the high level of unemployment. From 1980, the United State had adopted an economic expansion policy that affected the economy negatively since it raised the level of inflation. Between 1986 and 1989, the Federal Reserve increased the interest rates.

These reduced the amount of cash flowing in the market since the borrowing power of people was affected by that move. In 1990, the price of oil went up again because of Gulf war. In addition, it caused the people to loose confidence with their government.

The debts accumulated, consumer pessimists continued and savings and borrowing habits of the consumers changed (Izurieta 2003, p. 12). This led to another recession in 1990. In 2001 there was approximately of 10% decline in the volume of exports of both goods and services. This recession was also attributed to the sudden drop in housing investment, which was caused by the rise in the interest rates.

The rates on mortgage rose from 6.75 % in 1998 to 8.5% in April 2000. This period is when the federal government was using the contractionary monetary policy, which increased its fund from 4.75 to 6.50 percent. The fall of dot-com bubble stocks and the cases of accounting scandal and fraud at Enron and other big companies was also one of the many causes of this recession (Izurieta 2003, p. 110).

The great depression This was the biggest economic depression felt in the United States of America. Producers and sellers realized that their commodities were not bought and they decided to reduce their levels of production and all this resulted to the fall of aggregate demand. The reduction of the production rate was being caused by the invention of American contractionary monetary policy. The policy had an aim of limiting the stock market speculation.

The gold standard system spread the depression all over the world. High stock prices in 1928 and 1929 forced the Federal Reserve to increase the interest rates to control the prices. The construction and the automobile sector reduced spending due to the increase of the interest rates. Many investors in 1930 lost confidence in the commercial banks and they started demanding their money that they had deposited (Cooper 2008, p.7).

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Economic History of the United States of America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This forced banks to liquidate the loans with an aim of raising money to pay their customers. This whole process lasted for 2 years and caused a fifth of the banks to close. According to some economists, lack of confidence by the investors was caused by bad U.S. economic policies coupled with the debts during the 1920. They also argued that the Federal Reserve reduced the money supply, which was in favor of the gold standard policy.

Franklin Delano Roosevelt who was the president at this moment relied much on the policies made by the eclectic group of advisers and refused to take ideas from an economist John Maynard Keynes who had proposed deficit spending to reduce the level of inflation. Another economist by the name Robert whales also criticized the need deal policy that was introduced by the eclectic group of advisors. He argued that the new deal programs increased the period of depression although Erick Rauchway differed with him.

Tight policies of the Federal Reserve were to blame for them ensuring that there was less money supply in the economy, which boosted the level of unemployment. An economist Jonathan Catalan blamed the government for failing to correct the action against the expansion of the level of money supply until it affected the economy largely (Cooper 2008, p. 28).

During the time of the depression, all the performance determinants declined greatly. They included the production level, tax revenues and profits and wages levels among others. The reduction of all this factors resulted to a serious financial crises in the whole world. Some of these financial crises were caused by the Federal Reserve policies.

Mr. Mariner Eccles who was the chair of the Federal Reserve in 1939 introduced a policy that would have introduced when the crisis was over but he never waited for that. He failed to understand that the policy that he introduced was supposed to be for a stable economy like the way the American economy is like right now. He needed to increase the level of money supply to create employment opportunities and stimulate investment.

The government should have also increased there level of spending in the economy and this would have increased the job opportunities. The policy that he introduced that needed the commercial banks to keep 50% only of all deposit and to give the rest 50% to the federal resulted to the crises. This policy reduced the level of borrowing and consequently the banks raised the interest rates and reduced the economy (Krugman 2009, p. 8).

The economic crises were also caused by the poor performance of large companies especially those who had invested in the internet industry. Later, the industry started to face instabilities, which led to the firms that had invested in them to collapse.

The United States internal policies were the major cause of the financial crises. Today, president Barrack Obama the president of the United States of America has formed financial and microeconomic policies that are aimed at reducing the financial crises all over the world.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Economic History of the United States of America by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The microeconomic policies involve reforming the health sector, making the transition to greener economy, increasing labor and the bargaining power among others. The other policies are the financial which includes, transforming financial firm incentive structure that induce excessive risk taking, extend regulatory oversight to the shadow banking system, restrict or eliminate off balance sheet vehicles (Krugman 2009, p. 23).

To implement a financial pre-cautionary principle is among the financial policies that president Obama’s administration has prepared. This will be implemented for commodities and services to check whether they should in market.

All these reforms are to reduce the excessive debt growth in the boom period. The administration also wants to introduce a policy that restricts the growth of debt through cyclical capital requirement. It will control the expansion rate of financial assets.

The move by the president of the United States to introduce those policies is to deal with the financial problems experienced in the world. All these economic crises have strengthened the radical forces to implementation of economic measures that will lead to long term and sustainable growth (Taylor 2009, p. 144). The united state of America follows a capitalist economic system that was first put forward by Adam Smith.

Through the system, the free hand that implies the forces of demand and supply control the market and are necessary for the attainment of market equilibrium. Prices and quantities of products that are sold in the U.S economy are determined by the demand and supply of similar goods within the market. In addition to the capitalist system, the U.S. economy utilizes the Keynesian theory and economics that relies on increased savings and investments in order to create wealth.

During the great depression, many investors were forced to hoard their money and therefore went against the theory. This is what made the economy to stand still according to this philosopher. During that period of depression, he urged the government to increase its spending or increase the money supply in order to hold up the economy.

Today his theory still holds since he warns against too much savings and the habit of under spending because these habits affects the process of distribution of wealth. The Federal Reserve should promote the monetary policy in order to reduce the level of inflation.

This policy seeks to promote effectively the goals of maximum sustainable output growth and employment and set moderate interest rates. They should also form policies to deal with financial disruption and prevent them from affecting other non-financial sectors and finally they should stabilize the exchange rate of the dollar to reduce its effect on the international markets (Federal Reserve 2011, p. 7).

Conclusion The United States has faced by many economic phases as the rest of the world. Introduction of measures to deal with the economic crises will affect the whole world as has already been experienced because of the high oil prices. The biggest effect of the depression was on the level of unemployment.

This is because it affected the businesses and the production firms there fore reducing the employment opportunities. The banks raising the interest rates also resulted to these. The level of unemployment rose, purchasing and consumer power dropped and the housing prices declined. The implementation of the economic regulation policies will reduce the impact these factors will have on the economy of the United States.

List of References Cooper, G 2008, The origins of financial crisis: Central Banks, Credit bubbles, and the efficient market fallacy, Vintage Publishing, New York.

Federal Reserve, 2011, ‘Monetary Policy and the Economy’. Web.

Izurieta, A, 2003, ‘Economic slowdown in the U.S: Rehabilitation of fiscal policy and the case for a co-ordinated global reflation’. Web.

Krugman, M 2009, ‘The great recession versus the great depression’, New York Times. Web.

Taylor D 2009, Soul of a people: The WPA writers’ project uncovers depression America, McGraw Hill, New York.


Anne Truitt: The Columnist Research Paper college essay help

Table of Contents Background


Truitt as an Unconventional Artist

Influence in Modern Art




Background Anne Truitt was an American minimalist sculptor and color field artist. She was born, Anne Dean on March 16, 1921 in Baltimore, Maryland. She graduated from Bryn Mawr College with a degree in psychology.[1] Anne married journalist James Truitt in 1947 and they moved to Washington DC where Anne studied sculpture at the Institute of Contemporary Art and at the Dallas Museum of Fine Art. Truitt became a full time artist in the 1950s working with clays casted and wrapped in cement.

In the 1960s Truitt began to experiment painting multiple layers of colors on her sculptures which she was later became known for. She once wrote in 1965, “What is important to me in not geometrical shape per se, or color per se, but to make a relationship between shape and color which feels to me like my experience. To make what feels to me like reality”.[2] Anne Truitt’s masterpieces include not only sculptures which she is famous for but also parvas, paintings, piths and other works on paper her artistic mind can create.

Works Anne Truitt’s artistic self was awakened when she and her husband visited New York in 1961. When she was viewing the works of Ad Reinhardt, Barnett Newman and Nassos Daphinis in the exhibit “American Abstract Expressionists and Imaginists” at the Guggenheim Museum.

Examining Dahnis’ work, Truitt was reminded of how much she liked wood and the multitude of color by Newman’s art made a great impact on Truitt’s works. In her third published journal, Prospect, Anne wrote the works“Reverse(d) my whole way of thinking about how to make art”.[3] She realized her passion in making art herself and taking control of materials to use in solidifying her own ideas and creativity. In Prospect she wrote of that afternoon:

“Combined these three works exploded to reverse my whole way of thinking about how to make art. Until that afternoon, I had thought, had initially been trained to think and had continued dumbly to think, that art was somehow intrinsic to material, immanent in it. That if I applied certain techniques to material will due respect for its nature, art would emerge out of it rather inevitably”.[4]

That night Truitt could not sleep with her desire to create something of her own. She wrote:

“And suddenly, the whole landscape of my childhood flooded into inner eye: plain white clapboard fences and houses, barns, solitary trees in flat fields, all set in the wide, widening tidewaters around Easton.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More At one stroke, the yearning to express myself transformed into a yearning to express what this landscape meant to me, not for my own emotional release but for the release of a radiance illuminating it behind and beyond appearance. I saw that I could trust that radiance could rely on its presence even in the humblest object. Before I went to sleep, finally spent, I decided to start making a white picket fence”.[5]

After she was struck by artistic inspiration, that year, Anne Truitt made the white picket fence inspired, wooden sculpture, First. Examining First, incongruities are revealed in that, it has only three (3) pickets and they are of different heights and widths are not evenly spaced. The center picket was the tallest and widest one and all the tops of the pickets are tilted at different pitches.

Carol Diehl in her article compared these pitches to the roofs of neighbouring houses and added that “there is something cathedral like in the upward motion of the trinity of slats to a triangular peak that presages the slightly ecclesiastical aura”[6].

To some First can also be interpreted as a loss of innocence in the anticipation of life being organized with the flawed version of Truitt’s picket fence. Curator Kirsten Hileman interpreted the sculptor as the artist’s relation to her siblings. Hileman wrote:

“the unexpected heighlights of the sculpture’s pickets, one (1) tall and two (2) shorter, expand the work from the concept of boundaries to a depiction of three joined but distinct entities, perhaps not without parallels in the relationships among Truitt and her two (2) siblings”.[7]

Continuing her artistic drive, the following year, 1962, Anne Truitt continued to produce more sculptures but she abandoned remaining references from First and created a great amount of significantly simplified, solely abstract work. During this time she had developed a procedure of coating acrylic paint in several layers, polishing between applications to generate a smooth surface and mixing her own colors. In her journal, Prospect, she wrote:

“I was in an exalted state of mind, possessed…and remember thinking that no matter what the things I was making looked like, I would make them anyway…The sculptures had become what I have been making ever since: proportions of structural form counter-pointed by proportions of metaphorical color-essential paintings in three dimensions”.[8]

We will write a custom Research Paper on Anne Truitt: The Columnist specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As time passed by Anne Truitt started creating more abstract, vertical wooden columns painted in layers of acrylic paint. Her first show was at New York in 1963 at the Andre Emerich Gallery where Clement Greenberg, an art critic, considered her a precursor of the Minimalist movement together with Morris Louis and Kenneth Noland.

Curtor Kristin Hileman defined Truitt’s work as otherwise stating that “minimalist artists sought to purge their work of meaning and strip their work down to its most fundamental features while Truitt tried to fill her work with meaning and trigger emotional associations in viewers”.[9]

Reacting to such comments of her work being minimalist, Anne Truitt commented: “I have never allowed myself, in my own hearing, to be called a minimalist. Because minimal art is characterized by nonreferentiality. And that’s not what I am characterized by. My work is totally referential. I’ve struggled all my life to get maximum meaning in the simplest possible form.”[10]

She produced Hardcastle in 1962 which is an undifferentiated black rectangle about more than eight (8) feet high. It was supported on the back by bright red buttresses. Truitt’s sculptures are metonyms to a multifaceted of relations.[11] Most of her works were associated with Easton, Maryland, her home town and her love of Greek and Roman classical literature. In 1962, Truitt made Ship-lap which was inspired by the Third Haven Friends’ Meetinghouse in Easton Maryland. Built in 1682 – 1684, the house has an early frame arrangement.

The outside has a unique asymmetric geometry while its raw ship-lap wood inner walls and ceiling was held by thick, rustic square columns. Also during that year she made Platte, which was inspired by Teotihuacan and Tula’s four-sided Atlantean pillars and Watauga which resembles a memorial plaque and was painted half black and half purple. The latter seemed shocking when it is applied to a condensed form that implicit Brancusi-like seriousness of purpose.[12]

Truitt’s Morning Choice sculpture made in 1968 is a six (6) foot tall column painted in uneven segments with apple green, navy blue and bright pink with a strip of orange was very intense especially in contrast to its bleak shape. In 1974, Truitt displayed her play in color with the 17th summer sculpture.

Truitt painted the yellow green sculpture purple at the bottom. In her View made in 1999, she painted stripes in vertical form which are irregular and illustrating a more complexities with strips of light colors blue and yellow adjoined darker ones at the column’s edge. Truitt explained this radicalism in her journal:

“What I’m trying to do is lift the color up and set it free in three dimensions…I am trying to move it out into space…magnetized to the line of gravity just as we are (so that) it becomes flesh, it becomes human, it becomes emotion, it becomes alive and it vibrates. And since I don’t let it lie down on the sculpture, it goes around the corners…so it has to move. Sculptors are supposed to be interested in weights and balances, but i am not. I am only interested in the line holding it, the gravity. And the only reason I need the gravity is to set the color so it will move the way we do on our feet”[13]

Not sure if you can write a paper on Anne Truitt: The Columnist by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More One of Anne Truitt’s popular exhibitions was in Danese Gallery, New York in 2011 which featured thirteen (13) of her sculptures. With her signature style of wood column about five (5) to seven (7) foot tall and layered with acrylic paint, the sculptures are monochrome but some have vertical stripes which appears to be lifted off the floor because of the different color painted on the end of the column touching the floor.

Among the works showcased were Sound created in 1999 which is a two (2) sculpted cube painted in blue-green. Twinning Court I made in 2001 is a deep and rich like lacquer ware is “as dignified as sentry, sudden as an electric shock”. Lastly Cambria dated 2002 is painted in maroon giving its viewers the feeling of secrecy and tranquillity perceiving to slumber.

Anne Truitt’s works reveal her personal life as a controversial female artist in the 1960s, author, mother of three (3) and grandmother. Each of her sculptures is a tribute to a specific event or relationship in her life with First (1961) depicting her relationships with her two (2) siblings and the loss of innocence, Creswell (1980) which was attributed to her daughter and her marriage, Sorcerer’s Summer (1991) when she was unfairly demoralized by people in the Washington art scene and Tribute (1997), which marked the beginning of calmness and acceptance in Truitt’s life, honest and forthright without revealing anything.[14]

Truitt as an Unconventional Artist Anne Truitt was different from other artists in a sense that she was an introvert compared to other artist. Photographer John Gossage described Truitt as someone who didn’t fit in with the bohemian art bar world. He depicted her as more of an art historian with her “old-school, Bryn Mawr manners”.[15] In an interview regarding her balancing of time in her art and family Truitt said: “It’s very difficult to do. It’s difficult to hold the line and it’s difficult to stay true, true in very many ways.

True to yourself, true to your experience so you don’t lie about it, don’t fudge it. … It’s extremely difficult and you have to make sacrifices. …You can’t have it all. You can’t. In a way, you can’t have much of a personality or anything because everything has to go into your work. So often you just look dull”.[16] According to curator Kirsten Hileman, Truitt’s importance lies in the fact that she had created art that echoes the movements in American art. Truitt provides the artistic scene “an alternative kind of minimal abstraction”.[17]

For Truitt’s former students, Tim Gunn, Chief Creative Officer of Liz Claiborn and Project Runway co-host, and filmmaker and photographer, Jem Cohen, aside from Truitt’s artistic discipline, her honesty and courage made her undeniable, rich and overdue.[18]

Truitt’s aim was to get maximum meaning into the simplest possible form. Later she realized that she was the one in control of the meaning of her works thus she created sculptures which mirrored the events and relationships in her life as artist, author, mother and later grandmother.

Influence in Modern Art Anne Truitt was associated both the minimalist and Color Field movement together with Morris Louis and Kenneth Noland. Her works of wooden columns with acrylic paints inspired artists in examining layers of paint to produce an array of color which may deem extreme and radical during her time.

Truitt’s intricacy with the minimalist’s rigid assertion on primary structures was reduced to their formal and material essence when Clement Greenberg contrasted her. According to Greenberg, Truitt’s work was new art and that “seriously new art doesn’t ordinarily win acceptance that fast” (Clement Greenberg Changer Anne Truitt). He regarded Truitt as the artist who made the first serious venture into minimalism with her First (1961) and later on Hardcastle (1962) and other “box-like objects of wood and aluminium”.

Conclusion Anne Truitt was an American artist based on Washington DC. She was widely associated with the minimalist and color field movement despite her strong reactions towards such relations to her art. Truitt was famous for her wooden columns painted with acrylic. Her works of art depict her sentiments and relationships during times in her life. She was widely criticized as an artist because unlike others she was very plain and boring as she would say.

She never mingled in the artistic bar scene instead during her free time she spent her time with her family. She distanced herself from the then key social scene at Max’s Kansas City. It is believed that the isolation gave Truitt the courage and freedom to follow and dictate her own path. As Greenberg once wrote “She certainly does not belong. But then how could a housewife with three (3) children, living in Washington belong? How could such a person fit into the role of pioneer of far-out art?”[19]

Bibliography Diehl, Carol. “Anne Truitt: The Columnist.” Art in America, March 2010.

Finch, Charlie. “Mother-in-Law,” Artnet, 2011. Web.

Greenberg, Clement. The Collected Essays and Criticism. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988.

Hileman, Kirsten. “Anne Truitt: Perception and Reflection.” Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden, January 2010.

“Introduction.” Anne Truitt Biography. Web.

June-Friesen, Katy. “Anne Truitt’s Artistic Journey: Balancing the two loves of a Washington, D.C. sculptor – 1950s hostess and emergent artist,” Smithsonian Media, September 30, 2009. Web.

Truitt, Anne. Daybook: The Journey of an Artist. New York: Penguin Books, 1984.

Truitt, Anne. Prospect: Journal of an Artist. New York: Penguin Books, 1996.

Wilson, Meagan and Miller, Talea. “Beloved Sculptor Anne Truitt Gets Her Du.,” Art Beat, 2009. Web.

Footnotes “Introduction.” Anne Truitt Biography.

Anne Truitt, Daybook: The Journey of an Artist. (New York: Penguin Books, 1984), 20.

Anne Truitt, Prospect: Journal of an Artist. (New York: Penguin Books, 1996), 19.

Ibid., 20.


Carol Diehl, “Anne Truitt: The Columnist,” Art in America, March 2010, 136.

Kirsten Hileman, “Anne Truitt: Perception and Reflection,” Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden, January 2010, 14.

Anne Truitt, Prospect: Journal of an Artist. (New York: Penguin Books, 1996), 23.

Katy June-Friesen, “Anne Truitt’s Artistic Journey: Balancing the two loves of a Washington, D.C. sculptor – 1950s hostess and emergent artist,” Smithsonian Media.


Kirsten Hileman, “Anne Truitt: Perception and Reflection,” Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden, January 2010, 72.

Carol Diehl, “Anne Truitt: The Columnist,” Art in America, March 2010, 141.

Anne Truitt, Prospect: Journal of an Artist. (New York: Penguin Books, 1996), 35.

Charlie Finch, “Mother-in-Law,” Artnet, 2011.

Katy June-Friesen, “Anne Truitt’s Artistic Journey: Balancing the two loves of a Washington, D.C. sculptor – 1950s hostess and emergent artist,” Smithsonian Media.


Meagan Wilson and Talea Miller, “Beloved Sculptor Anne Truitt Gets Her Due,” Art Beat.


Clement, Greenberg, The Collected Essays and Criticism. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,1988), 288.


Writer’s choice Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Hi there,
I write my log in information below.
Please go to my canvas and do the beyond labz: TCL #1-1 . This assignment is for my ochem class. Please do that carefully. She also give me a access code for the website but I don’t have computer now and i can not create account, if you guys don’t have beyond labz, please let me know then i will send my information.
Please let me know if you need anything else.
Also I attached pic below then you can see how my assignment looks like.
Thank you so much


psychology discussion Essay scholarship essay help

Healthcare professionals often work rotating shifts. Why is this problematic? What can be done to deal with potential problems?
Researchers believe that one important function of sleep is to facilitate learning and memory. How does knowing this help you in your college studies? What changes could you make to your study and sleep habits to maximizeyour mastery of the material covered in class?
How is narcolepsy with cataplexy similar to and different from REM sleep?


High power DVDs Essay (Article) essay help: essay help

Our new system is certainly the solution to all your entertainment needs. If you have been looking for a stylish way of enjoying yourself, you have just made the right choice by purchasing our new, stylish high power DVD meant for multi-purpose entertainment use. This Stylish High Power DVD System comes with a combination of a DivX® Ultra Playback, Bluetooth options and a ready Progressive Scan, among various other exclusive features.

Product Description GMR OX8SW 200W DVD and CD Micro Component unit is made into special features which are certain to make a difference in your entertainment options (Fenner 12). Among other significant components, the system features Bluetooth options, Progressive system scan, DivX® ultra system play back and a three-USB input host bearing music and sound recording adjustment. All these wonderful features makes the system an exceptional choice for lovers of entertainment.

Other exciting features of GMR OX8SW 200W DVD and CD Micro Component unit include a 4×45 high power Amplifier, double cassette decks and a 50-station memory FM/AM Tuner. The unit’s sound system includes a 9mode Sound field control, Dolby Digital Decoder, MP3 Expander and a Bass X-Boom.

Incase the 3 USB ports were not enough for your entertainment needs, you can always find happiness in our additional terminal extensions which include a Component Video Out, a Composite Video Out, AUX in, headphone input plus a two-way Karaoke microphone input system. Another outstanding feature coming with our new system is its ‘Photo Viewing’ option which enables easy viewing of images through a mini LCD screen which presents itself at the press of a button.

High Power Subwoofer and USB Direct Recording function are other exclusive pack of our High-power DVD micro system. The High Power Subwoofer will always have you daring to move closer to the beat and the vibration mode is enough to turn your house into a club.

The USB direct recording feature makes it easy for you to record music and other audio. This convenience ensures that you are closer to your favorite stuff all the time. On top of the DVD changer, movie fans can enjoy themselves to the fullest in the services of this stylish unit. USB memory devices can be plugged into the system for easy playback of video files of any format including the ones captured using the phone (Yagi 128).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More GMR OX8SW 200W DVD and CD Micro Component unit has proved to be user-friendly in all ways. The unit’s well-defined labels make it easy for anyone to operate. This excellent micro music system also comes with a remote control unit which enables users to operate the system right from the comfort of their seats.

The system is less bulky and it would fit well on top of your shelf right above your television set. Both FM and AM antennas are provided to maximize your entertainment needs. More importantly, the system also comes with an outlet for connection to a Television or computer, a feature that enables the unit to function like a typical DVD player. The system’s compatibility nature with various other electronic equipment and devices makes it a multi-purpose unit which is likely to find use in various environments.

To enjoy the exclusive services of this product, users should always follow the right channels of operation and handling of the system. Power connections and other connectivity to the unit should be done in the right manner, to avoid damage of the device. Overloading the unit with numerous activities at the same time should not be encouraged, for this can result to system’s failure.

The unit comes with a two-year warranty guarantee that gives our users an opportunity to enjoy exclusive after-sales services on our products. Incase of any mechanical problems, you should never hesitate seeking the services of our competent experts who are ever ready to serve you at fair desirable costs. Our company recognizes the value of your money, that’s why we are dedicated to giving the best of our quality products and services. Enjoy the best of our Products!

Works Cited Fenner, Kennedy. Entertainment micro system. New York: Google Patents, 2008. Print.

Yagi, Thomas. “High-power high-efficiency 660-nm laser diodes for DVD-R/RW.” Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics 9. 5 (2003): 126-130. Print.

We will write a custom Article on High power DVDs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Le Corbusier’s Biography Essay essay help free: essay help free

Charles-Édouard Jeanneret was a French architect during the 20th century. He was born in Sweden in 1887 where he spent most of his early life. However, in 1930, he changed his nationality and became a French citizen. He was an urban developer, architect, writer, designer and painter (Lang, 1994).

It is through his remarkable designs that he received his nickname, Le Corbusier that was a rather annoying resemblance to his ancestor. Despite the fact that he did not like the name, Charles decided to keep his nickname. Le Corbusier career lasted five decades from the early 1900s to late 1950s. In the course of his career, he was able to design several buildings in Europe, North America, South America, India and Russia (Barnerjee, 2011). It is through his remarkable designs that many scholars refer to him as the father of modern architecture.

Throughout his career, Le Corbusier experienced a lot of achievement. Le Corbusier finished his studies just after the end of the First World War. During this time, he taught at his old school. However, he spent much of his time practicing the theory of architecture. He presented his ideas through plans and models.

Just before the onset of the first world war, he teamed up with his cousin, Pierre Jeanneret to start an architectural firm that would last up to the 1950s (Barnerjee, 2011). They also formed a studio for painting and photography in France during the early 1920s. However, Le Corbusier grand debut came about in 1922 when he presented a solution of increased number of city dwellers in the cities of France.

The French officials had for a long time experienced the problem of increased population from the individuals of the lower class. This problem had led to the growth of slums within the cities. Le Corbusier presented a model of cell like houses that could be built on top of one another to create more space. In addition, this design allowed for each cell to have a bedroom, kitchen, bathroom and living room. This allowed for more people to live decently in a small area. This design is still in use up to the present moment.

At the same, Le Corbusier presented a contemporary city model to the government of France that would accommodate approximately three million people. This model comprised of a city with huge skyscrapers covered with glass, steel-framed office building, residential areas, a transportation hub including an airport, a train station and a bus terminus, recreation facilities and many other accessories.

Although not all of these were adopted but most modern contemporary models for many other cities in the world adopted this model. It is due to these works and many others that Le Corbusier was regarded as the father of modern architecture. In 1961, he was awarded with the Frank P. Brown medal for his hard work (Moos, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Due to his achievements, it will be an honour to write a book on such an individual. He is the pioneer of modern architecture. Most of his styles and designs are still being used up to the present moment. The buildings that he designed are of great historical value. Some of them serve as monuments of the cities in which they are found in. It will therefore be essential for many people to have more information of the individual behind these designs and ideas. This can only be achieved by writing a book that details his life, personal life and career.

References Barnerjee, T. (2011).Companion to Urban Design. Boston: Taylor


The Tawuniya Health Insurance Company Research Paper writing essay help

Introduction It is rather interesting to note that various theories of consumer decision making processes always seem to assume that consumers pass through distinct stages/steps before, during and after the process of selecting a particular product to buy or service to utilize.

On the other hand Van der Merwe (2010) states that this may not necessarily be the case since not all consumers pass through a particular decision making process and in some instances consumers may in fact skip certain stages all together (Van der Merwe, 11 – 16). What must be understood is that an average consumer is influenced by a myriad of different factors that affect the way in which they choose to patronize a particular product or service (Sahoo, 57 – 63).

This can range from various psychological reactions such as the way in which they think and feel about different products (i.e. brand perception) to the way in which the market environment they are currently present in affects the way in which they perceive a particular product or service (i.e. local culture, their family, local media influences etc.) (Danziger, 5).

For example, the 2008 financial crisis and the subsequent financial recession we are currently experiencing have greatly affected the way in which consumers perceive particular products or services at the present.

When examining the present day consumer decision making process what is apparent is that there is not only a decision to resolve a current problem (i.e. buying food when they’re hungry or picking a particular insurance policy when it is necessary) rather what also happens is the necessity to fulfill a “higher need” in terms of what patronizing a particular product or service means to a customer.

This principle can be seen at work in the insurance industry in Riyadh wherein product choice is not governed by just price and quality but rather by the processes that go into it that consumers have increasingly been taking into consideration before patronizing a particular company.

For example, consumer satisfaction regarding health insurance can be seen as being governed not only by the inherent price of a policy but the various medical institutions that are willing to accept it, the convenience by which claims can be made, the ease of use of the process, the way in which the customer support staff handles their request and finally the readiness in which doctors are willing to assist a patient based on the use of that particular type of insurance policy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is based on this that this study will examine the Tawuniya health insurance company in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia in order to determine the extent of customer satisfaction with the company’s services and to determine if the company has the proper instruments in place to fulfill the “higher need” that customers look for when patronizing the services of a particular company.

Problem Statement

Though Tawuniya is one of the leading health insurance companies within Riyadh it is unknown whether its clients are satisfied with the product itself or the added services it has. This paper will attempt to examine what drives consumer satisfaction in the case of Tawuniya and will determine whether it is based on the price of health insurance or the added services it has.

Research Questions

Do Tawuniya’s current services fulfill the “higher need” of consumers?

What affects consumer satisfaction and service patronage?

What is necessary in maintaining consumer satisfaction in a modern day era?

What tools do businesses need to have in order to stay competitive in today’s business environment?

Are Tawuniya’s consumers satisfied with the company’s current product offering?

What drives consumer satisfaction in the case of Tawuniya?

Review of Related Literature Introduction to Literature

This section reviews and evaluates literature and theories on customer satisfaction, current trends in consumer behavior as well as the evaluation of methods of ensuring product patronage.

The literature in this review is drawn from the following EBSCO databases: Academic Search Premier, MasterFILE Premier; as well as Jstore and various internet sources when applicable. Keywords used either individually or in conjunction include: customer satisfaction, consumer behavior, consumer decision making, consumption and patronage.

Theoretical Framework Theory of Consumer Behavior

The theory of consumer behavior revolves around the concept of the perceived value or satisfaction that a consumer derives from the consumption/ use of a particular commodity. In terms of actually understanding the demand side of market consumption/utilization the theory of consumer behavior uses two distinct methods of measurement, namely Total Utility (TU) and Marginal Utility (MU).

Total utility is defined by various experts in the field of consumer behavior as being the equivalent to the total level of satisfaction that a consumer can get from the use/consumption of a particular good or service. In the field of analyzing consumer behavior marginal utility is basically described as an add-on, namely it is the additional form of satisfaction that a consumer /health insurance client can get from the use/consumption of an added portion of a particular good or service.

It must be noted though that while total utility increases with the overall level of quality, at some point due to the continuous consumption of a particular product or use of a type of service the overall yield will result in smaller and smaller levels of additional utility towards the consumption. To illustrate this point one can imagine a person buying a scoop of dark chocolate ice cream at an ice cream store due to the hot and humid weather in Riyadh.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Tawuniya Health Insurance Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While initially the total utility and marginal utility are equal if the person were to go back and kept on buying the same product in order to stay cold the total utility would increase due to the consumption however the marginal utility would decrease over time as a result of the continuous consumption of the same product. This is based on notion that continuous consumption of the same product would eventually cause a person to get tired of consuming it thus the added value continues to decrease over the course of consumption.

In order to better understand how such a concept integrates itself into business planning and marketing the four fundamental concepts of consumer choice must be taken into consideration namely: rational behavior, preferences, budget constraints and prices. The concept of rational behavior assumes that all consumers are rational individuals who try to use their earned income in order to derive the greatest amount of satisfaction/ utility.

In other words consumers try to get the most out of their income through rational buying behavior which results in a maximization of total utility from the products or services used. In the case of the this paper this comes in the form of clients choosing a particular health insurance company based on their perception that they would get the most value from patronizing that company.

This rational behavior is based on the fact that consumers will act in an economically competent manner in that they will not spend too much money on irrational purchases or services. This can take the form of stockpiling unneeded products or choosing certain services that are well beyond their budgetary means.

As such the concept of rational behavior assumes all consumers engage in rational buying behaviors which becomes the basis for any future analysis of consumer patronage towards a particular type of product or utility.

For the health insurance industry this means that customers have a certain “limit” to the amount they are willing to pay on insurance premiums on a particular insurance package based on the rates that the company has allotted for them (Logie-MacIver and Piacentini, 60 – 76).

It must also be noted that the concept of preferences is based on the fact that each individual consumer has his/her own personal preference towards a particular service or product that is currently available in the market from which they are able to derive the greatest amount of total utility/ satisfaction.

Consumers are inherently aware of how much in the way of marginal utility they are able to derive from successive use/consumption of a particular product or service. It must be noted though that the amount of marginal and total utility derived from a particular product or service differs based on each individual consumer group since they all have individual tastes, preferences and ideologies. In the case of the health insurance industry in Riyadh this comes in the form of various healthcare payment packages that the companies offer customers.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Tawuniya Health Insurance Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More If a customer pays a lot into their health insurance package yet regularly uses their health insurance plan on a yearly basis this mean they are able to derive the greatest amount of total utility/satisfaction from patronizing that company’s services. On the other hand it must be noted that if a customer is paying a lot into a service yet doesn’t use it at all it can be stated that they are not making the most of the service and as such are not able to derive a any total utility/ satisfaction from paying into the service.

Under the concept of budget constraints each consumer is assumed to have a fixed and finite income due to the limited amount of work in exchange for income each individual consumer is capable of achieving. In this case it is assumed that there is unlimited demand for goods and services however this is offset by a limited income.

For the insurance industry in Riyadh this takes the form of having specific types of insurance packages available that take into account varying income levels instead of having fixed price packages that neglect to take into account a person’s level of income before a particular payment plan is set.

Finally, the concept of prices assumes that each individual consumer is part of the total demand in the market. Due to the limited amount of income each consumer is capable of achieving they must choose to obtain the best combination of goods that maximizes their total utility while at the same time remaining within a certain price range.

In this study the point of view of the consumer, namely consumer preference, plays an important role in determining whether the total utility of the consumer knowing that the health insurance company they are under has beneficial practices (i.e. good customer service, widespread insurance usage, online tracking of claims etc.) actually contributes to consumer patronage of that particular health insurance company.

It must be noted that while the concept of consumer preference plays an important role in the choice of a particular product or service the fact remains that the remaining concepts of rational behavior, budget constraint and price also play roles that can actually override the concept of preference.

While a consumer may prefer to use a particular health insurance company that has widespread coverage and great services, barriers to this choice in the form of higher prices which directly conflicts with a consumer’s inherent budget constraints would thus change their pattern of behavior to choose a more affordable solution in order to conform to what is rational.

On the other hand if a consumer is presented with two choices namely a health insurance company that accommodates their “higher need interests” while the other has not with both prices being similar it is likely that the consumer will choose the former choice rather than the latter.

This decision is influenced by all concepts of consumer behavior wherein preference and rational behavior for health insurance companies that have “higher need services” led the consumer to choosing the insurance company that has better services while the similar prices for each insurance company conformed to the consumer’s budget constraint thus letting the choice be left up to preference.

It must be noted that the theory of consumer behavior is basically an examination of what influences a consumer’s choice in a particular product or service. Should a consumer be presented with the same service with both being within budget constraints and prices, the choice is usually left up to consumer preference. On the other hand if a choice is beyond budget constraints, price level and is considered to be an irrational choice preference is no longer included into the decision making process.

Thus in terms of understanding consumer behavior preference should not be considered the sole deciding factor in understanding consumer behavior rather a combination of rational behavior, preference, budget constraints and price must always be taken into consideration in order to understand how consumer behavior towards a particular product or service works.

Market Trends

One of the current marketing trends in the health insurance industry has been to connect special amenities, services and exclusive offers to particular health insurance packages.

For example, in the case of Tawuniya this comes in the form of online methods of claim tracking, international insurance for people travelling to other companies, widespread acceptability of Tawuiya online eServices for individuals and corporations as well as professional customer service representatives that will handle your claim with the utmost respect and cordiality.

These aspects are the “higher need” services indicated in the beginning of this paper and as such are often connected to greater levels of customer satisfaction when it comes to using a particular type of health insurance,

Tools Necessary in Ensuring Consumer Satisfaction Information Systems

Information systems can be described as the interface between people, organizations and technology enabling the business to accomplish a specific task or action. One example of an information system are the various applications and websites utilized by Amazon in selling products, accepting client payments through credit card processing applications, contacting their warehouses and shipping bought products to the correct addresses indicated by their consumers.

While this is only a one example of the plethora of information systems out there what must be understood is that information systems act as methods of integration for a company helping to streamline specific processes so that they can be controlled, influenced and improved when necessary.

Developing proper information systems is an essential aspect for a company for without it a company will be unable to properly deal with the buying, selling and the utilization of resources across various locations in the country. Due to the varied and often complicated nature of company operations it becomes a necessity to streamline and integrate product delivery processes, methods of operation, customer service and various other operational capacities.

A company cannot just simply develop and market a product without taking into consideration how best to allocate specific resources in determining where a product needs to go, which branch needs it most, how will product returns be processed and how HR services will deal with salaries for the myriad employees within a company.

A company requires an efficient and up-to-date information system in order to integrate the factors mentioned into an efficient and effective operational strategy so as to better serve its clients.

The larger a company get the more hectic and haphazard its operations tend to become, especially in instances where its operations are located in different countries. Organizations need to understand how to properly allocate resources to specific international locations, how suppliers can be contacted, what are the limits of production on a daily basis and how will each branch location contact each other.. In other words information systems can be classified as solutions to identified problems or necessary methods of integration.

What must be understood is that while managers and CEOs are great at coming up with specific solutions to problems they are lost when it comes to implementing these particular solutions when they require computer programming as one of the factors behind the implementation. Information systems and information system specialists bridge this gap by being able to integrate the ideas of managers and CEOs into viable technological applications that can be implemented on a company wide basis.

For example, if a company is currently having problems with its archaic method of form based ordering in order to get products from the warehouse to consumers a manager or CEO would think to implement a faster and better means of getting orders to warehouses without having to rely on someone physically going there and handing them the orders.

They would of course think to apply a computer based system for this particular solution and this is where information systems come in. An information system in this particular situation becomes an applied solution where it is developed in order to help a company resolve a particular problem.

On the other hand if the company was to expand and have a more diverse array of products and factories further development of the initial information systems becomes necessary in order to adapt to the growing needs of the company. It is based on this that it can be seen that information systems act as a necessary method of process integration which enables a company to do its job better and as such it is essential to have it within a company.

Turning All Consumer Interactions into an “experience”

In a documented interview, entrepreneurs Rob and Pablo, creators of “Snog”, a U.K. based chain of yogurt outlets, state the following regarding what it takes to become a successful entrepreneur “now we are in a recession and we see businesses that are successful I think the one thing you see that they all have is the experience which is the most important part in everything so we made sure that there was an experience”.

The “experience” that Rob and Pablo refer to is not just the quality of the product itself but what customers feel when they enter into a particular establishment.

In the case of Snog, all their outlets have a warm and friendly ambiance which is not only family friendly but actually promotes, in their words, “a happy feeling” for customers. Going back to the example of Apple Inc., it can be seen that all their stores, no matter what country they are present in, have a stylish and ergonomic design that looks “clean, modern and cutting edge” which has come to exemplify the experience of buying products at an Apple store.

Based on the popularity of not only Snog but of Apple itself, it can be seen that by making their store into an “experience” rather than just a store; this helps to encourage buying behavior among their clientele and even repeat visits. As such, for any business that wants to increase their customer base, it is important to develop the experience, the business provides so as to appeal better to consumers and create repeat business.

Strategy to maintain balance between competitor and customer orientations

Businesses don’t operate within a vacuum and have to deal with intense competitive environment forces on an almost daily basis. What must be understood is that there are three components to market orientation that dictate how a company acts within a competitive environment, these are: customer orientation, competitor orientation, and inter-functional coordination.

In the case of customer orientation a company spends what resources it has in gathering data on the needs and behaviors of various consumers, the same can be said for competitor orientation however it focuses on competitors instead.

What must be understood is that either method has a distinct weakness. Focusing too much on consumer orientation can actually blind a company to changes in the market or may actually stifle innovation since the company focuses too much on consumer satisfaction rather than changing based on trends.

Focusing too much on competitor orientation on the other hand results in too much time and capital being placed on competitive activities which results in companies at times neglecting their consumer bases and focusing too much on getting ahead of the competition. On the other hand both methods also have their own respective strengths such as the customer orientation strategy being more effective in uncertain markets whereas competitor oriented strategies become effective in fast growing markets.

The best way to maintain a balance between the orientations is to first create a market intelligence mechanism that gathers consumer information and disseminates it within the company and secondly is to encourage the free flow of information within the organization. What must be understood is that market orientations tend to become ineffective when organizations are mired in bureaucratic nuances which prevent information from being passed on quickly.

By allowing information to freely flow within an organization this increases its ability to respond to changes in the market and enables it to respond to these changes in an effective manner. One company where such strategies are evident can be seen in the case of Whole foods Inc. which combines both competitor and customer orientation strategies in its business model.

This is evident by its focus on providing consumers with cheap and healthy selections which change depending on consumer preferences within a particular location while at the same time it utilizes a competitor oriented strategy by having prices which are marginally lower than other competitors in the health food market. It must be noted though that a company’s strategies do change over time depending on changes within the market.

For example, as mentioned earlier customer orientation strategy are more effective in uncertain markets whereas competitor oriented strategies become effective in fast growing markets, the inherent problem with this is that markets tend to change over time as seen in the case of Netflix. As such when markets change this necessitates changes in orientations as well with companies at times shifting towards either customer oriented or competitor oriented strategies.

Methodology Aim

The aim of this paper is to research the current level of customer satisfaction with Tawuniya


The main research objectives of this study are the following:

To compare the level of income of Tawuniya customers have and compare it to the level of satisfaction they derive from their current insurance plan.

To examine whether “higher need” services are a necessity towards satisfaction in the case of Tawuniya

Investigate other factors that contribute towards consumer satisfaction

Survey Questions Consumer Demographic Information

Q1) your age is




□Above 30

Q2) Social status



Q3) Current Level of Income

□ Below $1,000

□$1,000 to $3,000

□Above $3,000

Services From the Company

Statement Strongly agree agree Neutral disagree Strongly disagree Do the services of the company in the form of customer service, ease of use of health insurance as well as online transaction requests factor into your satisfaction with the company? Would you consider Tawuniya’s additional services as a necessity? Do additional services influence your choice of health service provider? Does Tawuniya fulfill your service requirement needs? Financial Aspect

Statement Strongly Agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree Does price factor into your choice of a health insurance company? Are you satisfied with the current prices of Tawuniya? Does price affect your patronage of a health service provider? Would you say that based on a combination of price and services you are satisfied with Tawuniya? Do the number of available services in a health insurance company affect your thoughts regarding the price? Customer Service and Information Systems Aspect

Statement Strongly Agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree Would you say that Tawuniya’s information system is easy to use? Did the company give you an adequate experience when you went to their office? Would you consider their customer services as being adequate? Do all the previous factors affect your satisfaction with the company? If your responses had been all negative for the previous factors would you still be satisfied with the company? Would you say that the effectiveness of the company’s customer service department influences your overall satisfaction with your health insurance package? Conclusion

Statement Strongly Agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree Are you satisfied with Tawuniya? For you which is more important, price or the services of the company? Research Plan/Design

Surveys will be carried out for this study with a focus on the various patients within hospitals in Riyadh as well as customers of the randomly selected clinics within the city.

The survey will be in a form of questionnaires with four major areas of focus, namely: how important the interviewee thinks “higher need” services are within the health insurance industry, their level of income, the level of satisfaction derived from using the insurance services of Tawuniya and whether they think Tawuniya has adequate services. Data from the surveys will be collected and filtered based on the pre-defined criteria. The data will then be categorized and analyzed accordingly to achieve the objectives for this study.

Scope and Limitations

The study will be limited to within the city of Riyadh and will only examine confirmed members of Tawuniya’s health insurance section. The goal of this research paper is to encompass 3 local hospitals and 3 local clinics in order to determine the level of consumer satisfaction towards Tawuniya, whether price factored into their decision to choose the company and whether the company is able to administer to their “higher needs” in terms of adequate services to address their health insurance concerns.

Population and Sample

The population for this particular study will consist of 3 hospitals and 3 clinics selected at random in Riyadh. For each individual hospital, 5-10 staff members and 20-30 patients will be selected to participate in the survey. That gives a total of 150-240 potential participants.

The reason this particular type of population was used for this study is due to the experience and expertise staff members have with the consumer health industry and the fact that patients are the primary source of information needed in order to determine the level of satisfaction they derive from a particular service.

Duration of Study

The total duration of the study will last only one month; the collection of the survey results, creating the appropriate graphs, and the overall period of investigation does not entail anything particularly time consuming as such one month has been determined as being more than enough time to complete the study and present the needed results.

Procedures and techniques used for collecting and analyzing data

The data to be utilized in this study will gathered using surveys consisting of questions that will enable this study to determine what the opinion of hotel workers and guests are towards the concept of customer satisfaction and “higher need services”. The data will be collected and analyzed using the online survey tool which has a free online survey maker as well as a data analysis tool that should be more than sufficient in properly analyzing the data from the surveys.

To make sure this study attempted a minor test of the operational capacity of the site by making a small survey campaign using online social networking to get several known acquaintances of the researcher input their data on their favorite movies. After one week the data was examined and analyzed using the online tools of the website and the result was more than satisfactory in terms of data clarity and accuracy of the results.

Cost budget for the research

The overall cost of the study itself was negligible; utilizing the online free survey tool removed the need to print 200 copies of the survey questionnaire. This greatly facilitated the collection of survey results which resulted in the only cost for the study being the cost of transportation to and from the various hospitals/clinics chosen as samples to be used.

Analysis and Discussion Level of Satisfaction and “Higher Need” Services

Based on the results of the survey it was determined that consumers placed more importance on price and then “higher need” services when it came to determining what gave them the most satisfaction. For this section this paper will examine the concept of “higher need” services and then move on to the concept of price in the next section.

What must be understood is that “higher need” service encompasses not only additional amenities such as international health insurance but rather constitutes other services in relation to information systems and the “experience” of customers when dealing with a company. While it may be true that health insurance companies are more competitor driven that customer driven that fact remains that data shows customers appreciate a certain degree of additional service when the patronize a particular company.

In the case of health insurance this comes in the form of information systems which enable the customer to not only make easy payments from a variety of locations but enables them to make an immediate follow up on their claim. What must be understood is that customers are vastly different from the way they were several years ago, today things revolve around being quick, instantaneous and above all convenient.

As such the utilization of effective information systems for the benefit of consumers is a necessity in many of today’s companies. Tawuniya understands this particular aspect as evidenced by their online systems for customer support management and assistance which is considered a “higher need” service in terms of the satisfaction customers can derive from the convenience such a system provides for them. It must also be noted that consumers expect a certain “experience” when dealing with a company.

This can come in the form of either the physical aspect of a location or the psychological aspect of the customer service a company provides. Taking this into consideration it can also be seen that Tawuniya has customer service representatives that are always kind and cordial and as such contribute to a positive consumer interaction resulting in greater product satisfaction. All of these factors have actually contributed to most of the respondents being satisfied with the company’s services due to the addition of these “higher need” services.

Connection of Income Level with Decision Making Process and Customer Satisfaction

The four fundamental concepts of consumer choice must be taken into consideration namely: rational behavior, preferences, budget constraints and prices when trying to determine what drives the decision making process of consumers to choose a particular type of Health Insurance Company.

In the hospital/clinic survey four different kinds of income streams were added namely: those below $1000, $1000 – $2000, $2000 – $3000 and income streams above $3000. These levels of income were directly contrasted to decision making process of the customer. The survey revealed that the greatest factor in the decision making process for patients was the price of the insurance rates, followed by the general applicability of the insurance card in various hospitals, and finally the “higher need” services offered.

It is the assumption of this study that as income levels increase the propensity for consumers to go beyond the demographic of price and consider other factors in the decision making process such as “higher need” services increases as well. In order to prove this point the four fundamental concepts of consumer choice will be utilized in order to trace consumer behavior in this study and will attempt to explain how patients make their decisions regarding what health insurance company to patronize.

The concept of rational behavior assumes that all consumers are rational individuals who try to use their earned income in order to derive the greatest amount of satisfaction/ utility. In other words consumers try to get the most out of their income through rational buying behavior which results in a maximization of total utility from the products or services used.

For people choosing between various health insurance companies within Riyadh this means choosing the appropriate type of insurance company that is commensurate with the budget that they have. The results of the survey show that there are two particular levels of income that act as majorities in the income selection namely incomes below $1000 and incomes above $3000.

An examination of the individual surveys show that individuals with incomes below $1000 chose prices as the determining factor in choosing insurance providers while those with incomes above $3000 chose “higher need” services as the primary factors behind their decisions.

Such actions conform to the concept of preferences which is based on the fact that each individual consumer has his/her own personal preference towards a particular service or product that is currently available in the market from which they are able to derive the greatest amount of total utility/ satisfaction.

For people with health problems in Riyadh their preferences are set according to their inherent preferences which are greatly influenced by their income. Consumers with greater incomes thus have a different set of preferences as compared to those who have lower income rates.

What must be understood is that under the concept of budget constraints each consumer is assumed to have a fixed and finite income due to the limited amount of work in exchange for income each individual consumer is capable of achieving. Due to the limited amount of income each consumer is capable of achieving they must choose, under the concept of price, to obtain the best combination of goods that maximizes their total utility while at the same time remaining within a certain price range.

In this study the point of view of the consumer, namely consumer preference, plays an important role in determining whether the total utility of the consumer knowing that the health insurance company that they utilize has “higher need” services actually contributes to consumer patronage of that particular insurance company.

It must be noted that while the concept of consumer preference plays an important role in the choice of a particular product or service the fact remains that the remaining concepts of rational behavior, budget constraint and price also play roles that can actually override the concept of preference.

While a consumer may prefer to utilize a health insurance company that has “higher need” services, barriers to this choice in the form of higher prices which directly conflicts with a consumer’s inherent budget constraints would thus change their pattern of behavior to choose a more affordable solution in order to conform to what is rational.

Conclusion/Recommendation Based on the results of the survey and the concepts of rational behavior, preference, budget constraints and prices it can be said that consumer preferences in Riyadh’s health insurance industry is one determined by two factors, namely price and “higher need” services.

What must be understood is that a modern day health insurance client greatly differs from one 20 or 30 years ago. As patients become more modern and internationalized with increasing needs in the form of instantaneous assessment or the ability to check their current status at anytime they wish online comes the necessity of providing such services to them.

For a health insurance company that lacks such services this greatly affects the decision making process of consumers since it enables them to instantly know whether a particular health insurance company is bad, lacks particular amenities or is too backwards to utilize for their modern day lifestyle. This differs from past situations where consumers had to physically go to the office in order to file a claim or complete any paperwork.

When it comes to price what must be understood is that due to the current volatile economic situations around the world customers are not careless with their money as they used to be. At the present they take into account first the price of a particular insurance package and then the subsequent benefits and “higher need” services before they choose to patronize a particular company.

It is based on this that strategies involving consumer satisfaction for Tawuniya in the future should begin first with price based changes and then move on to “higher need” additions for particular insurance packages in order to not only satisfy a customer’s inherent need for affordable pricing but their desire for “higher need” services as well.

Works Cited Danziger, Shai, Aviad Israeli, and Michal Bekerman. “Investigating Pricing Decisions In The Hospitality Industry Using The Behavioral Process Method.” Journal Of Hospitality


Hamas and the US Policy Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Emergence and ideology of Hamas

The United States’ policy on Hamas


Reference List

Introduction The United States has been faced with the challenge of having to understand and deal with Islamic fundamentalism in the past decade. The US has found it difficult to come up with a comprehensive foreign policy to address the issue.

However, policymakers have been able to comprehend the ideological tenets behind these fundamental groups or at least they have been able to establish justification for the actions of these fundamental groups. Islamic fundamentalism has been referred to as the successor of the infamous Red Scare during the Cold War era.

In some quarters, this has been referred to as the Green Menace whereas some analysts have regarded these groups as social movements that emphasizes on religion. Generally, it can be agreed that the issue of Islamic fundamentalism requires special attention. This is because of the fact that these fundamentalist groups have resorted to terrorist tactics in advancing their position (Levitt and Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2006).

Hamas is regarded as one of the Islamic fundamentalist organizations which have resorted to terrorist tactics in advancing their course of action. Hamas uses child-soldiers and suicide bombers to launch attacks against their target.

The group does not have discretion for targets; it targets innocent civilians, political party members and any opposing military forces. This group has also resorted to guerilla tactics which pose a real danger to the US Homeland Security. Hamas has a strong support system from other organizations such as the Hezbollah, as well as from nations such as Iran and Lebanon.

The support system of Hamas provides financial aid and training ground to the group (Levitt and Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2006). This paper aspires to provide a detailed analysis of one of the Islamic fundamentalist group known as the Hamas. In addition, the paper will provide analyses of various United States policies towards the Hamas group and other external terrorist organizations.

The Emergence and ideology of Hamas Hamas is an Arabic word which means ‘zeal’ and is derived from the verb ‘hamisa’ which signifies the idea of supporting a cause without any reservations. The term Hamas acquired a distinctive meaning during the formative stage of the Palestinian intifada which begun in December 1987. During this time, Hamas engaged in a military activism against the Jewish state of Israel. Hamas is an acronym that stands for Harakat al-muqawama al-islamiyya which translates to mean the ‘Islamic Resistance Movement’.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hamas was started in Gaza during the fall of the year 1987. The organization served as a political as well as a military arm of the group, Muslim Brotherhood Society, which had been established in 1928 in Isma’iliyya, Egypt. After its formation, the Muslim Brotherhood Society spread its influence in the Arab world establishing branches in Palestine in the period 1936-39 when the country was experiencing an uprising (Muslih, 1999).

There are various reasons which are advanced to explain the formation of Hamas. It is believed that Hamas emerged owing to the mood of active resistance that had been established by the Palestinian intifada. The group was also influenced by the success of the Iranian Islamic Revolution.

In addition, the emergence of Hamas was influenced by the loss of political initiative of the Palestinian Liberation Organization (PLO) during the Palestinian revolt of 1983-87. The military activism of the Islamic Jihad that was established in 1979, having been spearheaded by members of the Muslim Brotherhood who were disgruntled, acted to motivate the emergence of Hamas.

The Islamic Jihad group begun its activities in 1980 and was led by Fathi Shiqaqi in conjunction with Abd al-Aziz Audeh (Muslih, 1999). The 1980s saw the emergence of numerous changes in the structure and outlook of the Muslim Brotherhood society. The Muslim Brotherhood Society stressed upon reforming the society and religion together with the education morals in fighting Israel.

However, the youthful members of the society did not agree to the position adopted by the senior members of the society in dealing with Israeli occupation. These young members emphasized on the adoption of armed resistance in fighting for the rights of the Palestinians (Council on Foreign Relations, Inc, 2012).

Due to increased pressure from the young members of the society, the Muslim Brotherhood began to get involved in politics during the 1980s. At the time when Palestinians called for armed resistance against Israel in December of 1987, the society rose to the occasion through its political wing, the Hamas. Hamas carried out violence using its expansive network of mosques, students and professional organizations as well as charitable organization.

They also achieved their mission of violence through underground cells and command centers (Council on Foreign Relations, Inc, 2012). At first, Israel did not do anything to stop Islamist organizations when the Palestinian intifada was just starting. They in fact seemed to be pleased that the Palestinians were getting divided, leading to the creation of a rival rank to the Palestinian Liberation Organization. It was believed that with the emergence of the radical Hamas, the power of the PLO was going to be weakened.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Hamas and the US Policy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This was a false move by Israel since following the outbreak of the intifada; Hamas resorted to armed violence making them to be regarded as Israeli’s fiercest enemy compared to the PLO. The Hamas group did not just threaten Israel, but also the PLO. The PLO had embraced diplomatic strategies in dealing with Israel. Hamas on the other hand embraced violence in dealing with Israel and this enhanced their popularity among the Palestinians (Council on Foreign Relations, Inc, 2012).

Hamas came up with its charter in the year 1988 which was distinctively different from the nonviolent ethos of the Muslim Brotherhood Society. The group resorted to violence against Israel and adopted terrorist strategies in fighting Israeli occupation. The maiden suicide bombing by the Hamas was executed in the year 1993. When the Hamas came up with their charter, the situation in West Bank and Gaza was ready to explode.

This is because of the despair and anger that had accumulated among residents of these regions, and Hamas brought an avenue upon which active resistance against Israel was to be carried out (Council on Foreign Relations, Inc, 2012). This section of the Palestinian territory was engulfed in a defiant mood in which civic disintegration was eminent and that Hamas members and sympathizers were very active and most warrior-like.

The Hamas group expanded to include Islamist intellectuals and members of other groups apart from those of the Islamic Brotherhood Society. In addition, Hamas spread its influence beyond the Palestinian borders to include the Arab and Islamic nations bordering them.

This necessitated the creation of two leadership organizations including qiyadat al-kharij and qiyadat al-dakhil, Qiyadat al-kharij is the leadership of Hamas in foreign countries whereas qiyadat al-dakhil is the group’s leadership within the Palestinian territory (Muslih, 1999).

Hamas has been regarded as a terrorist organization by Israel, the United States and the European Union. This has been done basing on the fact that this group is greatly involved in terrorist activities. Hamas has a paramilitary wing known as the Izz al-Din al Qassam Brigade which has launched scathing violent attacks on Israel and to some extent, within the Palestinian territories.

The group has engaged in suicide bombings which have claimed numerous lives against civilians both in Israel and Palestinian territory. In addition, Hamas uses makeshift explosives that are planted by the road side and launches rockets into the Israeli territory (Muslih, 1999).

During the 2006 legislative elections that were conducted in the Palestinian territory, Hamas emerged victorious putting an end to Fatah’s grip on the Palestinian Authority. This was a great challenge to Fatah’s leadership. Despite having been democratically elected in power, Hamas has been steadfast on renunciation of the existence of Israel and in calling for use of violence in the fight against Israeli occupation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Hamas and the US Policy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Hamas’ charter is categorical on the use of violence in fighting against Israel occupation. Through the violence means that is common with Hamas, many civilians have been killed. This amounts to terrorism as terrorist activities can be described as those activities that result in indiscriminate murder of people.

Therefore, Hamas can rightfully be argued to be a terrorist organization. There are claims that Hamas is not a terrorist organization, and that it is a nationalist movement. However, this can be rebuked since some Hamas elements have adopted both political and violent strategies, which include terrorism, in their pursuit of their goal of ensuring the establishment of an Islamic Palestinian state (Davidson, 2006).

It has been established that Hamas is known for its countless attacks which claim innocent lives. Due to its terrorist activities, the United States has declared Hamas as a foreign terrorist organization. It is alleged that Hamas gets financial support from other countries such as Iran, Syria and Lebanon. The United States and the European Union member states vowed not to offer any financial assistance to the Hamas unless they renounce their violence approach and recognized the existence of Israel.

For a long time, Hamas has been regarded as a terrorist group; however, the 2006 election produced dramatic victory to the Hamas which broke the dominance of the PLO’s dominance in Palestinian politics. This led to western powers led by the United States and the European Union coming to an agreement that no more funding would be directed towards Hamas.

The change of political guard in the Palestinian territory is attributed to the rampant corruption within the PLO leadership. It is noted that Hamas leadership is often considered to be efficient and does not entertain corruption as the PLO. The election of Hamas to power made the group to be regarded as the most dominant in Palestinian political affairs (Levitt and Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2006).

Hamas terrorist activities are said to have led to the death of many innocent individuals. It is claimed that over 500 people have perished in more than 300 terrorist attacks that have been launched by Hamas since the early 1990s. Apart from suicide bombers, Hamas uses mortars, rockets and small arms.

When recruiting the suicide bombers, Hamas mainly targets youthful male individuals who are deeply religious. Most of these suicide bombers are not desperate individuals, and in fact, they have paying jobs. However, it can be noted that the suicide bombers have an intense hatred towards Israel and this is what drives them to volunteer as suicide bombers.

The United States’ policy on Hamas The United States has been concerned with the activities of Hamas which is adamant about its charter that emphasizes on violence in the fight against Israeli occupation. This has seen the group be regarded by the United States authority as a terrorist group which should be renounced for its activities.

Though Hamas has avoided direct confrontation with the United States, its activities against Israel are an indication that the same can happen to the United States citizens. In addition, since the United States is determined to fight terrorism on the international front, it is imperative to take measures that will enhance homeland security and combat terrorism in all its forms.

The United States has put in place various policies which are aimed at combating terrorism as well as enhancing homeland security. The immigration policy for instance is set to help in the identification of any illegal entry of terrorist and blacklist them.

On the other hand, the border security policy is aimed to enhance the country’s border security, blocking any illegal entry of terrorist elements including Hamas. The policy on combating terrorist use of explosives in the United States will prepare the government agencies on combating and identifying the types of explosives that Hamas operatives might use in attacking the United States.

The maritime security policy and aviation policy shall also protect innocent civilians from unprecedented attacks. The aviation policy shall enhance aviation security whereas the maritime security policy shall help in the identification of any illegal entry or tampering of shipping containers that might contain explosives, or even possibly ‘dirty bombs’.

The immigration policy adopted by the American government is aimed at establishing criteria of admission of aliens into the United States. The Immigration and Nationality Act (INA) clearly stipulates admission requirements and exclusion criteria for immigrants who come to the United States. It is stipulated that any person coming to the United States should not have any links with terrorism.

In this case, anyone who participates in terrorist activities or represents a terrorist organization or is a member of a designated foreign terrorist organization like the Hamas is not eligible to be granted permission to visit the United States. Following the September 11th attack, the INA was enhanced to include the denial of entrance of foreigners who are perceived to represent groups that endorse terrorist activities, individuals who embrace terrorism and to some extent, the close family of individuals who are associated with terrorism.

The Immigration and Nationality Act also provides ground for refusal to admit someone in the United States basing on foreign policy issues. Essentially, the INA is meant to screen foreigners who would wish to come to the United States to ensure that they do not have any association with a terrorist organization. In this way, members of foreign terrorist organizations such as Hamas are blocked from coming to the United States to accomplish their heinous terrorist activities (Garcia and Wasem, 2010).

There is no doubt that security and economic growth of the US is dependent on the aviation system in a significant way. Owing to the importance of the aviation industry in the prosperity of the United States, terrorists have identified the industry as a prime target for attack and which they can take advantage of. The case in point is the dreadful September 11th attack of 2001 and the Heathrow plot of 2006 where terrorists exploited the aviation industry to launch their attacks.

The United States president issued a directive that aimed to ensure the establishment of an accomplished National Strategy for Aviation Security which would guarantee the protection of the US and its interests from terrorist attacks in the Air Domain. The National Strategy for Aviation Security enhances the alignment of Federal government aviation security programs and initiatives to come up with an all-inclusive and consistent national security effort involving all sectors concerned with security issues.

The stakeholders in the security issues include the “Federal, local, and tribal governments and the private sector” (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2007, para 3). These efforts are meant to enhance aviation security and promote the defense of the United States from terrorist activities.

The National Strategy for Aviation Security adopts a collaborative inter-agency approach and has developed various plans to counter threats and challenges facing the aviation domain. The various plans are intertwined and strengthen each other.

plans include the Aviation Transport System Security Plan; the Aviation Operation Threat Response Plan; the Aviation Transport System Recovery Plan; Air Domain Surveillance and Intelligence Integration Plan; International Aviation Threat reduction Plan; Domestic Outreach Plan; and the International Outreach Plan (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2007).

The Secretary of Homeland Security has been given responsibility to ensure close coordination of the Federal government activities that encompass national aviation security programs. With the enhancement of the aviation security, terrorist organizations such as the Hamas shall be thwarted in their mission to launch attacks on the aviation industry which is vital to the American economy (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2007).

As for the border and maritime security policies, the United States has taken considerable measures aimed at enhancing the protection of the United States from attacks emanating from foreign terrorist organizations.

There are various projects that have been put in place by the Department of Homeland Security to ensure maximum protection of American borders. Among these projects is the Advanced Container Security Device (ACSD) Project which is aimed at the development of an enhanced sensor system to screen the veracity of the containers in the maritime supply chain.

The ACSD devise is usually attached to one side of the container and is able to screen the container, reporting intrusions on the container as well as the availability of human cargo that may be contained in the containers. This will act to enhance security measures thereby thwarting any means that could be used by terrorist organizations such as Hamas to launch attacks in the United States (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2011).

In addition, there is the Automatic Target Recognition (ATR) Project which is aimed at coming up with an automatic imagery detection ability to expose unusual content in various cargo categories. This has enhanced the American security as terrorist groups like Hamas may resort to sneak their terrorist elements disguised as cargo.

The Border Detection Grid (BDG) Project is also an essential component of security measures taken by the United States. This project is said to provide “a grid of advanced sensors and detection, classification, and localization technologies to detect and classify cross-border movement” (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2011, para 5).

Such technology is set to boost border surveillance where one Border Patrol officer will have the capability of monitoring over ten miles of the border. This will enhance keeping vigil on the border to ensure that terrorist activists such as members of the Hamas group do not sneak into the United States (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2011).

There is also the CanScan Project which is geared towards the development of a next generation non-intrusive inspection (NII) system that shall be used in the detection of terrorist materials and contraband goods. This project is set to enhance cargo screening to ensure that all cargo coming to the United States is free from terrorist threat posed by groups like the Hamas (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2011). There are other projects which include the Container Security Device (CSD) Project; the Hybrid Composite Container Project; the Marine Asset Tag Tracking System (MATTS) Project; Secure Carton Project; Secure Wrap Project; and the Sensors and Surveillance Project among many other projects. It is worth noting that the various projects aim at enhancing the security status of the American borders and waterways from foreign terrorists without affecting trade and those people who are travelling (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, 2011).

The Department of Homeland Security has also enhanced its mission to protect the United States and its citizens from terrorist attacks. The Small Vessel Security Strategy Implementation Plan has been put in place to address risks related to the possible manipulation of small vessels by terrorists who may want to target the American maritime.

This ensures that terrorist organizations such as Hamas are blocked from advancing their attacks on the American people. The US-VISIT is known to support the Department of Homeland Security in its mission to guarantee protection to the American citizens.

To achieve this mission, the Department of Homeland Security provides biometric identification services that are critical in the identification of individuals to determine whether these individuals may present a risk to the United States. This is important as it will ensure that members of terrorist organizations such as the Hamas will not penetrate the boundaries of the United States and pose a security threat without being noticed.

Also, there is the Container Security Initiative (CSI) which focuses on the enhancement of security for container cargo that comes to the United States from around the world. The CSI is concerned with aspects of border security threats and threats to global trade from terrorist groups like Hamas which could use the maritime container in delivering a weapon (U.S. Department of Homeland Security, n.d.).

Conclusion Hamas has been known to resort to violence and terrorist tactics in its fight against Israeli occupation. Though this group does not pose a direct threat to the United States, it is has been regarded as a foreign terrorist organization by the United States.

Even after Hamas was democratically elected to provide political leadership to the Palestinian people, the group has continued with its terrorist tactics and launched attacks within the Palestinian territory and in Israel. The United States and the European Union urged the group to denounce its terrorist activities so as to continue to benefit from their financial aid all in vain.

Having recognized Hamas as a terrorist organization, the United States has put in place various policy frameworks that are aimed at thwarting any potential terrorist organization from launching its attacks on the American soil. Through the various policies, terrorist organizations such as the Hamas will find it difficult to penetrate the United States or sneak arms and explosives in the US to be used in terrorist activities.

Reference List Council on Foreign Relations, Inc. (2012). Hamas. Web.

Davidson, A. (2006). Hamas: Government or Terrorist Organization? Web.

Garcia, M. J. and Wasem, R. E. (2010). Immigration: Terrorist Grounds for Exclusion and Removal of Aliens. Web.

Levitt, M. and Washington Institute for Near East Policy. (2006). Hamas: Politics, charity, and terrorism in the service of jihad. New Haven: Yale University Press.

Muslih, M. (1999). The Foreign Policy of Hamas. “Council on Foreign Relations Press”. Web.

U.S. Department of Homeland Security. (n.d.). Protecting America. Web.

U.S. Department of Homeland Security (2007). National Strategy for Aviation Security. Web.

U.S. Department of Homeland Security. (2011). Borders and Maritime Security Projects. Web.


Project Management; computer charting Problem Solution Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Abstract


Project management process


Reference List

Abstract Since modern business management requires efficient information management, healthcare providers require enhancing the management of patient information. Thus the concept of computer charting emerges. This paper identifies Charting by Exception, popularly referred to as CBE, as one of the most useful modern computer charting systems.

Implementation of CBE is a complicated process, but can be effective undertaken through a simple project management model. As such, the paper describes CBE project implementation against the 4 D project management model. This model is preferred for its simplicity as well as ability to track project progress.

Introduction Modern business management requires efficient management of information. Within the healthcare industry, the management of patient information is vital as it determines the success of healthcare provision. The need to enhance the management of information has led to the development of computer charting a concept that incorporates the use of IT based patient information management tools.

Computer charting systems have a broad based primary objective; however, the overarching aim seems to be improving efficiency in documentation of patient information. This is aimed at increasing accuracy in decision making regarding the patient care. As a result, the healthcare industry accrues numerous advantages from computer charting (Keenan, Yakel, Tschannen and Mandeville, n.d.).

The ever changing trends in healthcare information management require consistent changes to existing information management tools. While current computer charting systems ensure increased efficiency in patient information management, they are also time consuming since healthcare experts, especially nurses, spend a lot of time keying data in computer charting systems. This reduces the amount of time nurses spend with patients (Harrison, 2003; Huff, 2004).

The need for improved computer charting systems in the healthcare industry is necessitated by the desire to reduce the time spent in documentation. This translates to more time available for nurses to provide patient care. Additionally, other than reducing charting errors and omissions, the need to reduce redundancies in management of patient information necessitates systems change.

This therefore calls for the transition from the current computer charting to Charting by Exception, CBE (Jaffe, 2011). CBE is an improved version of the traditional computer charting systems already in the market. Compared to other computer charting systems, CBE offers numerous advantages to tertiary healthcare providers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other than creating a legally recognized patient data base, CBE eliminates the need for narrative documentation as it only focuses on variances or exceptional patient information. This is attained through recording information that varies from normal charting protocol. CBE uses standard information management tools such as graphs, sheets, among others.

Despite being a rather complex system to implement, CBE is recommended for tertiary healthcare institutions (Jaffe, 2011). Thus, the main objective of CBE is to increase time available for nursing care by reducing documentation time, further enhancing accuracy in decision making for tertiary healthcare providers.

As mentioned earlier, CBE provides additional advantages in the management of patient information for tertiary healthcare providers as compared to other computer charting systems available. Additionally, CBE is a complicated system. Therefore, its implementation needs a simple project management model.

There are numerous project management models, but according to Fischer (2005), 4 D models are the most preferable since they are not only simple but also help project managers verify their project plans at both the strategic and tactical level. Additionally, 4 D models enable managers to minimize and optimize risks as well as enabling managers to follow project progress while addressing emerging opportunities for change.

Project management process The 4 D model is linear and involves four sequential stages. Most projects fail due to lack of a clear project definition. As such, the 4 D model requires a clear detailed definition for the project at hand. A detailed definition for the project includes clear objectives. Additionally, project managers need to identify the desired outcomes for the projects at the definition stage (Park and Meier, 2007).

As indicated earlier, the main objective of CBE is to increase time available for nurses to provide care by reducing documentation time, while further enhancing accuracy in decision making for tertiary healthcare providers. In line with this, the desired outcome for CBE is to limit the time used by tertiary healthcare providers during documentation. Reduced documentation time implies that nurses have extra time. Additionally, CBEs main aim is to reduce errors and thus improve decision making.

To achieve the objective stipulated above requires project managers to set realizable time based goals. As such, since this involves transition to a complicated computer charting system, adequate time is needed to train nurses, manage transition, test and measure its effectiveness and correct changes before delivery. Depending on the size of institution, managers need one to two months to fully implement CBE (Jaffe, 2011).

We will write a custom Essay on Project Management; computer charting specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The most difficult stage is the designing stage. Designing largely involves planning how the objectives are to be achieved. In this case, a step by step plan seems relevant (Park and Meier, 2007). Appropriate actions which culminate in the implementation of CBE are identified. Such actions mainly focus on testing CBEs viability, evaluation and feedback reporting, as well as incorporating necessary adjustments.

To enable this, a project management checklist seems relevant. Such a list not only allows the manager to track the project progress but also record events. In the designing stage, a number of assumptions are made. For instance, the project manager assumes that the healthcare institution charting protocols meets State charting requirements. Additionally, the project manager assumes that nurses understand existing charting protocols.

To avoid any conflict with state authorities, the manager is required to consult attorneys as well as human service representatives within that State. While planning is aligned to the objective set, the project manager needs to also estimate the cost for the entire project. In this case, the cost for training nurses, the cost of the new system, materials needed, contingency plans, the cost incurred while testing and evaluation are factored in.

A project of such magnitude involves a number of risks. It is the role of the manager to identify all the possible management and systems risks. Since CBE offers legally valid patients data, there is the risk of using such data in a lawsuit against the healthcare provider. Additionally, since CBE only records variance or exceptions from the norm, it eliminates the need for narrative data, which poses future liability risks. Moreover, time and money budgeting is done on estimates, thus the risk of cost overruns (Jaffe, 2011).

Of the four stages, the actual implementation takes the longest time. The Doing it stage involves carrying out the activities according to plan (Park and Meier, 2007). This stage involves training the nurses on how to use CBE. After training, nurses gather all the standard CBE forms in a specific location. Using a CBE checklist, nurses read each of the patient notations according to the institutions charting protocol and mark against the checklist where patient data matches the existing charting protocol.

Any variances noted are recorded in narrative form and entered into the system. A resident physician is notified (Jaffe, 2011). Within the process, nurses also record the progress and challenges. Such records provide valuable feedback to the project manager. With the information provided from the feedback report, the manager leads the project management team in making a thorough review on the success of the project.

The purpose of conducting a thorough review is to identify opportunities for improvement. Adjustments are made to the systems design. This provides the manager with a system fully designed to serve the unique needs of the particular healthcare institution (Park and Meier, 2007). The system is thus ready for delivery.

The delivery stage is the final phase of the project. This stage mainly involves measuring the actual outcomes against the initial objectives. The usefulness of the products is evaluated against the previous products.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Project Management; computer charting by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thus, the manager tests whether CBE enables nurses to reduce documentation time, and whether errors and omissions are reduced. The success of the products is determined by evaluating the extent at which CBE improves decision making regarding patients care. Additionally, managers evaluates whether the time saved is spent providing patient care (Park and Meier, 2007; Jaffe, 2011).

Conclusion Despite the fact that computer charting is not a new concept, new trends in information management require healthcare providers to constantly evaluate the usefulness of existing information management tools. Since traditional methods of computer charting fail to address the concept of efficient time management, CBE seems relevant especially for tertiary healthcare providers.

Implementation of CBE is a complicated project, but the 4 D project management model significantly simplifies the process of implementation. Despite the numerous risks associated with CBE, the system accrues numerous benefits to tertiary healthcare providers. Most significantly, the system increases time available for nurses to provide care to patients, minimize errors thus enhancing decision making.

Reference List Fischer, M. (2005). 4D Modeling: Applications and benefits. Web.

Harrison, B. (2003). Becoming familiar with computerized charting. Web.

Huff, C. (2004). Off the Chart? Web.

Jaffe, S. (2011). Nursing practice


The dark side of Dubai Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction






Introduction In response to an article written on Dubai by Jonathan Hari and published online on 07th April, 2009 by “The Independent,” Sultan Sooud Al Qassemi published a rejoinder on 10th April 2009 in which he not only disparages Hari’s style but also his professionalism and motivating factor (Qassemi, 2009).

In this essay, I will show that while the two journalists definitely have clear distinction in their approach towards influencing their readership and in their attitude towards their subject matter, certain similarities and differences can still be drawn between them and their articles.

Discussion Hari’s article seeks to portray Dubai as a city state whose size and prosperity was achieved in a period so short as to be considered unreal (Hari, 2009). He shows its growth is sustained by consumerism and unsustainable economic and environmental practices; and most importantly, he portrays it as a sweatshop whose growth relies on the exploitation of immigrants in a classic case of modern day slavery.

Qassemi, in his rejoinder, seeks to call Hari’s intentions into question and query his credibility, professionalism, honesty and fairness. Thus, he questions his alleged overgeneralization of otherwise possibly isolated cases of maltreatment of immigrant laborers; and to show that similar problems to those that Dubai face are to be found everywhere including in established western cities such as London itself.

Differences The first major difference between the works of the two journalists is that while Hari adopts a direct approach to his exploration of the dark side of Dubai, Qassemi favors a more implicit way of achieving his goals.

He hides behind the veil of a theoretical situation in order to achieve his criticism of the city of London. For instance, he starts on the many hypothetical problems he might have chosen to tarnish London which had not come to his senses by stating “say for example that I had written an article that states that, in wealthy first world Britain there are 380,000 homeless people…” (Qassemi, 2009).

This allows him to both highlight London’s problems, a city he claims to love, while portraying his sensibility in refusing to exploit them. Hari on the other hand is explicit and leaves one little doubt regarding his intentions from the outset. For instance, he writes regarding the popular notion that Dubai owes its existence to the sheikh: “but this is a lie. The sheikh did not build this city. It was built by slaves. They are building it now” (Hari, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second difference between the two writers is that while Hari leans towards the New Journalism by refusing to report impersonally and instead infusing his opinions into his work and using the opinions and emotions of his interviewees to prove his point, Qassemi tends to be more traditional especially regarding the statistical and objective nature of his sources.

For instance, Hari writes regarding a deserted hotel: “standing in the middle, there is a giant shining glass structure that looks like the intestines of every guest who has ever stayed at the Atlantis” (Hari, 2009).

This is clearly his subjective impression of the hotel. One of his interviewees, Karen, says about Dubai: “this isn’t a city; it’s a con-job. They lure you in telling you it’s one thing – a modern kind of place – but beneath the surface it’s a medieval dictatorship” (Hari, 2009).

Qassemi on the other hand tactfully chooses to use hard statistics in highlighting London’s problems. He at times goes even further to cite credible sources to aid his argument. In one apt example, he writes: “or that according to Oxfam 13.2 million people in the UK live in poverty; a staggering 20 per cent of the population in the sixth richest nation in the world” (Qassemi, 2009). In doing so, Qassemi is able to paint Hari as subjective and therefore make his proposition that Hari is sensational more plausible.

Similarities The most obvious similarity between Qassemi’s and Hari’s work regards their intentions for writing the articles. Both intended to disparage their subject matter: Hari intended to vilify Dubai in its treatment of its low cadre immigrant labor force while Qassemi’s objective was to discredit Hari along with western journalists of his ilk. Further consideration of the motivation behind these articles reveals a more fundamental similarity: that both journalists are plagued by fixed mindsets regarding their subject matter.

To begin with, Hari’s complete refusal to acknowledge the great historical feat that Dubai represents, coupled with his complete disregard of the contribution and opinion of the technicians, investors, engineers and many other technocrats who made Dubai a possibility is very obvious.

This blindness to even the slightest positive aspect to Dubai gives the reader the notion that Hari was probably incapable of perceiving any possible positivity relating to Dubai as the result of a deeply ingrained mindset regarding the city state. This is further aggravated by his tone and diction. It hints at a journalist who went into the field, not to find the truth but to prove a certain notion true. This is the reason that this article lacks balance

We will write a custom Essay on The dark side of Dubai specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Qassemi isn’t innocent of this mindset problem regarding his subject matter either. While he would like to paint Hari as quick to make generalizations, he begins his article with such a generalization himself: “I recently figured that if British journalists such as Johann Hari (Tuesday, 7 April) who come to Dubai don’t send back something sensationalist it won’t get printed and they won’t get paid. After all, sleaze sells” (Qassemi, 2009).

His mindset regards the work of western journalists. He regards them all as subjective and as motivated by a need to come with unreal sensational pieces in order to get published. He relates how he told this to a British journalist: “I’m going to write an article about London, the same way your compatriots write about Dubai” (Qassemi, 2009). His use of hard statistics notwithstanding, Qassemi still finds himself using them to validate a subjective attitude regarding western journalism.

Conclusion It is clear that while the two articles may have employed different approaches, they both were informed by similar attitudes and mindsets. This is in spite of the fact that these are the same attitudes that Qassemi wanted to bring to light.

References Hari, J. (2009). The dark side of Dubai. The Independent. Retrieved from

Qassemi, S. (2009). If you think Dubai is bad, just look at your own country. The Independent. Retrieved from


Edith Wharton Books Critical Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Edith Wharton wrote several books between 1900 and 1938. Wharton travelled extensively during the World War I and assisted war victims in Paris. Her novel, The Age of Innocence won the Pulitzer price. Critics and readers considered this novel to be the best literary work of Edith Wharton.

The novel reflects the desire and betrayal in the old city of New York. Several works of Wharton show extensive use of dramatic irony. Her works reflect the lives of American upper class through the use of humor and empathy in describing their lives, and changes in New York towards the beginning of the 20th century. This essay shall analyze two short stories (Roman Fever and The Other Two) of Wharton in terms of themes and stylistic features.

Feminist critics have looked at the works of Wharton in relations to prevailing social and political circumstances with regard to acceptance of women. The social aspects focused on marital duties and responsibilities of women, particular in The Other Two and Roman Fever. Wharton looks at the social prejudice against women at her times. For instance, she discusses issues of sexual gratification men derived from women, marriages for convenience, malicious divorce, and professional working relations.

She sees sexual identity of women as suppressed by men, and women submissively accepted and internalized their roles in a patriarchal society as the other sex. Women believed lies of men in reference to their sexual and responsibilities in society. It is the social hegemony that creates the otherness in women. Feminists believe that men wish to control women because of their efforts for sexual dominance.

Wharton addresses social challenges and advantages women derive from being wives of socially and financially advanced men. Wharton shows that women value social status rather than love. In Roman Fever, Alida Slade derives her happiness from social advantages she gets from Delphin as a wife. For instance, the author notes that “It was a big drop from being the wife of Delphin Slade to being his widow.

As the wife of the famous corporation lawyer, always with an international case or two on hand, every day brought its exciting and unexpected obligation: the impromptu entertaining of eminent colleagues from abroad, the hurried dashes on legal business to London, Paris or Rome, where the entertaining was so handsomely reciprocated; the amusement of hearing in her wakes: What, that handsome woman with the good clothes and the eyes is Mrs. Slade—the Slade’s wife! Really! Generally the wives of celebrities are such frumps” (Wharton 83).

On the other hand, in The Other Two, Wharton looks at the role and status of women, challenges of married women, children and parent relationship, divorce issues and the dynamic social society with a critical perspective on love affairs outside marriage. The author notes that every woman must choose what works for her in social context.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, some women decide not to marry, but choose to face the social risk by using a temporary liaisons build on sexual desires and mutual trusts. Conversely, in Roman Fever, Mrs. Slade views marriage as a means of achieving social success. These thoughts create bitter rivals among the women fighting for the same man.

Wharton’s The Other Two demonstrates how women have used divorce and remarriage to advance themselves in the social ladder. This is what Alice Waythorn does. Alice has been able to attain and adapt to new marriages and expectations. Alice considers herself to be at the highest point of success when she is Waythorn’s wife. After the honeymoon, Mr. Waythorn must face the reality and acknowledge the fact that Alice has changed, but he must accept her the way she is.

Wharton tries to show how men have always defined women. In the eyes of men, women have always been objects of sexual gratification and possessions. At the same time, men have used women to make their social interaction easy and provide a touch of comfort to their ego and competitive instinct. Alice does not change outwardly, but in the eyes of Waythorn she goes through a series of changes. Waythorn likes the girlish traits in Alice.

This is also a trait Waythorn likes because he feels that it makes him look young. Waythorn sees Alice as having the right to divorce in both her marriages. He feels that Alice was the wronged party. During the beginning of the story, Waythorn can only see the positive sides of her lover. However, at the end of the novel, Waythorn also begins to see Alice mistakes. This creates discomfort in Waythorn, but he recognizes the fact that Alice is a mixed being just like himself.

The social world has created women into what they are. These creations and transformation of women are the products men like Waythorn desires and crave to get. Alice knows that her body is her only resource. Therefore, she must use it to her advantage. In this regard, a woman becomes a product who can only be acquired by the highest bidder.

Roman Fever looks at the illicit sexual content in society. Grace shares an illicit and secret love with Delphin Slade. Wharton notes that “Alida feels a bit remorseful for a moment, but her animosity returns when she considers that Grace harbored secret love for her husband over the years and had been living on that letter” (Wharton 86).

Therefore, to Grace, Roman Fever does not only mean catching cold, but also the burning fever of secret love at the Colosseum. Slade influences women with his possessions and wealth. On the other hand, Horace remains sterile and contributes nothing to the story. Horace also has no sexual fever to sire children. Therefore, Roman Fever becomes a symbolic way of fulfilling sexual desires.

We will write a custom Essay on Edith Wharton Books specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Wharton shows that women are capable beings just like men. Women are able to adapt to any situation and progress socially. For instance, Alice is able to adapt to her divorces and move on the social ladder. Alice further fits into different situations by becoming an actress.

Wharton purposefully makes men the audience at the show. Waythorn does not like several sides of his wife, but he must accept her as a performer. Wharton reveals the negative attitude society or men have towards female performers. Men look at actresses as women of loose morals.

However, they fail to appreciate the difficult tasks of performing. Men feel that women have abandoned their privacy in order to satisfy public demands for shows. Though men are unappreciative, they must progress towards accepting diverse women’s roles in society as Waythorn does. This point enables readers to see Alice as a capable woman, gifted as an actress and able to overcome the challenges of life.

Roman Fever shows that women may reject domestic gestures, and opt for other social context in society. For instance, Grace Ansley prefers to confront others, particular Alida Slades. Alida demonstrates the resistances to male dominance that has affected women as a fever.

Grace rejects the social notions of paternity and leaves her daughter for any suitor and even hints that the two daughters (Barbara and Jenny) shall be rivals for the same love. This is a character that puts the whole idea of paternity and patriarchal in America at stake. These have been the conventional reference point for women during times of Wharton.

Social lives are full of deconstructive passions. There are passions Wharton portrays as love, vengeance, enmity, jealousy and fear. These strong passions permeate the relationship between Grace Ansley and Alida Slade. There is a strong passion growing between Grace and Delphin (Alida’s fiancé).

Consequently, fear of losing her fiancé and desire for revenge consumes Alida. She then hatches a plot to expose Grace to a chill that will make Grace sick and remain isolated from Delphin. The next twenty-five years contain growing hatred Alida has for Grace. Alida also does not like Barbara (Grace’s daughter) because she is superior to her own (Jenny). Grace must also live with a sterile Horace while Delphin, the father of her daughter, lives with Alida in the neighborhood.

Wharton is a writer gifted with the use of language in expressing the social context of Americans changing society. She uses language artistically to attack social and sexual prejudices against women. Wharton uses symbols in Roman Fever to refer to several aspects of the story. For instance, the title of the story Roman Fever shows Grace’s sexual attraction towards Delphin. This leads to siring of a love child, Barbara.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Edith Wharton Books by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This also creates hatred between Alida Slade and Grace Ansley. The knitting symbolizes the challenges joining the social and marriage lives of Grace and Alida. Crimson silk represents the passionate love Alida, and Grace probably have for Delphin. As Grace drops her knitting, a destroyed relationship comes to display between the two characters. Evening darkness shows the discovery of dark secrets between Alida and Grace.

On the other hand, The Other Two shows use of symbolism through both male and female characters. Waythorn represents male figures under the influence of patriarchal and economically depended society.

Male figures in the changing society have their eyes focused on advancing their social status in society at the expense of their marriages. Waythorn is unable to understand his wife, Alice. Wharton shows the destructive effects on wives and marriages of a society too depend on material wealth. Just like material wealth, society also sees a woman as a possession of a man.

Through the troubled and divorced marriages of Alice, Wharton shows the readers the consequences of such acts on both the wife and subsequent husbands, who fail to see any other adorable features in their wives, and concentrate on their wives past experiences with their former husbands. We must understand the psychological and social implications of divorce. Wharton offers readers various perspectives to analyze the consequences of divorce and marriages.

Wharton also presents her works through the use of irony. For instance, Alida Slade tell Grace that “I was wondering, ever so respectfully, you understand… wondering how two such exemplary characters as you and Horace had managed to produce anything quite so dynamic” (Lewis 120). Alida refers to Barbara.

Horace is sterile and incapable of fathering children. This irony confirms doubts Alida has been having regarding the paternity of Barbara. The setting of the story is a Colosseum. This is damp and cold place. Colosseum served as a fighting place for gladiators. Unknowingly, Grace and Alida have used all the tools in their lives to fight as gladiators. They have used their husbands, bodies, daughters and lives to settle twenty-five years old rivalry. They also have explored both literal and figurative means of killing each other (Killoran 98).

Conversely, The Other Two reflects instance of irony in the manner Alice relates with her daughter. The relationship between mother and daughter shows no paternity connections. Alice shows lack of concern for her sick child. Instead, she is more worried about the impending visit of her ex-husband than her daughter’s well-being.

Once the Waythorns have settled the issue, Alice relaxes, but the health condition of her daughter has not changed. During periods of Wharton, typhoid was a serious illness, which mothers could not ignore to concentrate on a visit of an ex-husband. Wharton shows that not all women can rise to the motherly roles society expected of them. This reveals a low opinion of her character, Alice as a mother.

The two stories, The Other Two and Roman Fever show that being self is weak and marriage affects everyone to the very core. When we look at the two stories together, we see that marriage is a slippery and even dangerous involvement. This is because individual characters change. This makes married couples find their lives changing beyond their control.

For instance, Waythorn wonders how Alice could adapt to three different men after divorce as Alice Haskett, Alice Varick and now Alice Waythorn. This leads him to conclude that Alice is as easy as an old shoe. She had left her a little emotion, privacy, personality and unknown self in every marriage. Divorce exposes the manners and stern attitudes that couples choose to conceal or express about the nature of their sexual affairs, both social and psychological torture, and prejudice couples endure after divorce (Haytock 133).

The Other Two gives Wharton an opportunity to present her central female character, Alice through the eyes of a man, Waythorn. She lets the readers see the mistakes of Waythorn judgment regarding her wife. Readers wonder whether Waythorn could have been able to adapt with different women as her wife did.

By choosing female characters to be the protagonists of the two stories, Wharton highlights that women are equally superior to men as their roles demand. Wharton also portrays the issues of moral standards society expects from both men and women in order to rise above the social ladder and avoid tendencies of savagery.

Wharton lets readers see a different Alice from the one Waythorn knows. Wharton shows readers the strength in women and struggle they experience in order to perform the ever-changing and difficult tasks of pleasing men.

The Other Two and Roman Fever have their secret aspects. For example, characters are in dismaying situations, particular the rivalry, marriage and divorce issues, but we must see the humorous sides of the story. These stories present no comical or tragic ending but Wharton allows the stories to social challenges in marriage and modern society.

Works Cited Haytock, Jennifer. Edith Wharton and the Conversations of Literary Modernism. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2008. Print.

Killoran, Helen. The Critical Reception of Edith Wharton. Rochester, NY: Camden House, 2001. Print.

Lewis, Nancy. The Letters of Edith Wharton. New York: Collier Books, 1988. Print.

Wharton, Edith. Roman Fever. New York: Liberty Publishing, 1934. Print.


History of Multiculturalism Movements Essay scholarship essay help

Multiculturalism is the recognition and appreciation of various cultures. It is the integration of various cultures to ensure people live harmoniously. Multiculturalism is what enables people of different backgrounds and cultures to live together in a culturally diverse society. Multiculturalism is about reaching out to new comers and natives of an area and finding a way in which they could both participate in the enhancement of the society. (Perkins, 2011)

People who support multiculturalism argue that it allows people to express who they really are in a society. It is a more tolerant way of adapting to the diversity of various people. (Wilson, 2012)

Multiculturalism rose after the Second World War. This was when there were rapid changes in the Western societies. The fight for human rights persisted and grew as more and more peoples were advocating for equal treatment for everyone of every race and nationality.

It was during the period when the European Colonial System was collapsing as more Asian and Africa countries were fighting for their independence. In America it came with the rise of the Civil Rights Movement. In the West the whole aspect of multiculturalism at that time was seen as a way of protecting minorities from racial discrimination. (Modood, 2007)

During the postwar period, multiculturalism was one of the most important developments in American Literature. In the first two and a half century of American history the literature was not multicultural as it did not involve everyone in the society. Even though the society at the time was already diverse with peoples of various origins, the literature was still not as diverse.

First of all, the literature was not homogeneous as it was only written by men. Marginalized groups such as Women, Indians, African Americans, French Canadians in New England, Creoles and Cajuns in Louisiana, and Spaniards were doing very little writing and were represented to the public manly through the writing of others. (Perkins, 2011)

After the Second World War, most of the marginalized communities’ literature started getting their way into mainstream. Jewish American literature was becoming popular in America. This was spear headed by the two Noble price winners, Saul Bellow and Isaac Bashevis. There was also the third generation of Jewish immigrants who did very good literature. Bernard Malamud, often identified with recent immigrants, was the master of Short stories, his most famous one being The Assistant.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Among the African Americans there were also prolific writers who caught the attention of many people. After Richard Wright there were many other good talented writers that jumped into the scene. Writers such as Ralph Ellison and James Baldwin had established good reputations in this field.

In 1946 the novel The Street which was a portrait of Harlem written by Ann Petry was the first work by an African American woman to gain a lot of critical attention. Many others followed after her and helped in presenting the African American society from their own perspective. This includes Dorothy West who wrote about the wealthy black Bostonians in her work in 1948, The Living Is Easy. Paule Marshall was another writer who wrote about the blacks in Brown Girl, Brownstones (1959) which tells of Barbadians living in Brooklyn.

Multiculturalism literature increased rapidly in the last third of the twentieth century. As this happened, people became more concerned with the American identity and forgot about the differences of race or ethnicity. This was also seen when the federal government allowed people to declare themselves ‘mixed’ during the 2000 census rather than sticking strictly to Caucasian, Native American, Black, Hispanic or Asian. (UTwatch, 2012)

After the Harlem Renaissance and the splendid writing of people like Richard Wright, Gwendolyn Brooks, Ralph Ellison, and James Baldwin the African Americans were able to inherit readership from these literacy accomplishments.

Braced by the accomplishments of the civil rights movements the writers of this period were assured of large audiences who were sympathetic. The writers were therefore able to capitalize on this and gain critical attention for their works. During this period there were a number of really good poets who were striving harder than ever to transform the best imaginings into social and political reality.

Among the poets that emerged during this period were Amiri Baraka who was a poet and a novelist, Ishmael Reed who was also a poet and a novelist; Gloria Taylor who was best known for The Women of Brewster Place (1982); Alice Walker, who wrote ‘The Color Purple, in 1982 and the author of Brothers and Keepers, John Edgar Wideman in 1982. Other writers include Charles Johnson who wrote about the slave trade in a rather new fashion in his work Middle Passage in 1990.

There was also the Nobel Prize winner Toni Morrison who’s 1970 Song of Solomon propelled her to the top, to be recognized among the best of her generation. Among the best of the poets who have come into critical view from the seventies onward are Michael Harper; Rita Dove, a poet laureate of the United States; and Jay Wright, who dismantles stereotypes with his multifaceted allusions and accommodations. (UTwatch, 2012)

We will write a custom Essay on History of Multiculturalism Movements specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The multiculturalism movement has mostly been promoted by the oldest inhabitants of America. The new literature of multiculturalism mostly comes from the Native Americans and the other minorities which have been underrepresented in the country over the years. Most of these people have grown rapidly in numbers over the years and are pushing more and more for their voices to be heard. They are doing this through literature and hence coming up with this new multiculturalism literature that is taking over America.

The most acclaimed American Indian writer is Louise Erdrich. She has been celebrated for her novels such as Love Medicine from 1984 which talks about the life of Indians in North Dakota. There are other Indian writers who mostly focused on fiction such as Scott Momaday who was from the earlier generation, Leslie Marmon Silko and Michael Doris. (UTwatch, 2012)

The Hispanics also had renowned writers such as Rudolfo Anaya who earned his place as a leading Chicano writer with his first novel Bless Me, Ultima (1972). There is also Nash Candelaria who wrote the Memories of the Alhambra which traced a family’s history through various generations.

Among the Asian immigrants there have been fictional works that speak about the heritage left behind and the challenges and experiences they had while adjusting to the different ways of Americans. One of the most successful writers in America with a Chinese ancestry is Maxine Hong Kingston. (Perkins, 2011)

Works Cited Modood, T. (2007). Multiculturalism: a civic idea. Cambridge: Polity.Print.

Perkins. (2011). American Literature: Civil War to Present. New York: Mcgraw Hill.Print.

UTwatch. (2012). The “Multiculturalism” Movement and the Making of a Right Wing Counterattack at UT-Austin. Web.

Wilson, K. (2012). Multicultural Education. Retrieved from

Not sure if you can write a paper on History of Multiculturalism Movements by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Supply and Demand Definition Essay college essay help: college essay help

Economics lessons include both demand and supply analysis. The research focuses on the analysis of demand. The research centers on supply analysis. Price influences both supply and demand. Demand. Demand is the economic term for the quantity needed, wanted, or desired by the buyers or customers. Different persons have different supply type demands. Each individual has different supply quantity demands.

There is a direct relationship between product price and product demand (Miller, 2011). The economic demand theory states that an increase in the product’s selling price will trigger an opposite decline in the demand for the products, if all other economic factors are equal. For example, ten people have demands for product AC at $11 per unit. An increase in the selling price of product AC to $12 per unit may reduce the demand to only eight people.

A further increase in the selling price to $15 per unit may reduce the amount demanded by the current and prospective clients to only 5 people. However, a decrease in the price of product AC from $11 per unit to $8 per unit may create a 13 person demand. Likewise, a further decline in the selling price of product AC from $11 to $ 6 may create an increase in the demand for the products to 17 persons (Miller, 2011).

Supply. Supply is the economic term for the quantity of products available to the current customers. Prospective clients are eager to determine the current supply status. The quantity also refers to the quantity suppliers are willing to produce for the current and prospective clients. There is a direct economic relationship between the products’ selling price and the quantity of supplies produced (Officer, 2009).

The economic law of supply dictates that as the prices of goods and services increase, the manufacturers or suppliers increase their production outputs. An increase in selling price translates to higher supplier profits. On the other hand, a decline in the selling prices prods the suppliers to reduce their production outputs. For example, ten people demand product BD at $11 per unit. An increase in the selling price of product BD to $12 per unit will normally persuade the suppliers to increase their production output to twelve units.

A further increase in the selling price to $15 per unit will generate an increase in the quantity or products manufactured to17 units. On the other hand, a decline in the price of goods from $11 to $7 can trigger a decline in the suppliers’ production output from ten units to only six units. Another decline from $11 to $5 can reduce the supplier’s production output to two units (Officer, 2009).

Equilibrium Price. Equilibrium price is also called the agreed price. The equilibrium price is the price that both the buyer and the supplier agree in exchange for goods or services offered by the suppliers. For example, Customer A wants to buy a toy car for $ 5k from the supplier. The supplier offers the products to the customer for $ 20. To receive the offered products, the customer gives a higher $ 8 purchase price.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The supplier counters by stating the new selling price is $14 to the prospective client. The prospective client accepts the $14 per unit selling price. The $14 amount is the equilibrium price. It is the price that both the sellers and buyers agree as the exchange price for the suppliers’ goods and services.

Disequilibrium. Disequilibrium occurs when the supplier’s price is higher than the equilibrium price. Consequently, there is a lower demand for the suppliers’ products and services. Thus, there is an oversupply of the suppliers’ products. On the other hand, there is an excess demand for the company’s products if the suppliers’ price is below the equilibrium price.

There is a shortage of the supply because there are too many current and prospective clients eager to grab the suppliers’ products (Sowell, 2009). The supply and demand economy theory is important. The prospective customers will not just buy apples from a grocery store just because the store is selling apples. Likewise, the people will not enter a hamburger restaurant just because it is selling hot tasty cheeseburgers. The people will buy the hamburgers because the customers are hungry.

Likewise, the customers will buy apples because they need to fill their hungry stomachs. After eating a hamburger, the hamburger customer will have no demand for more hamburgers. In the same manner, the apple customer will not buy another apple after eating more apples. On a full stomach, the customer will not demand for another apple or another hamburger (Sowell, 2009).

Different products have different selling prices. Gold fetches a high price because of its rarity. Some universities can afford to charge higher school fees compared to other schools. Gasoline prices fluctuate depending on the global fossil fuel supply and demand activities. Chinese labor salaries are cheaper than salaries paid to California workers (Sowell, 2009). Going further, the stores would not just sell stones to residents.

The residents do not need the stones to fill their empty stomach. The stores do not just sell Eskimo clothes in California. The California residents do not need the Eskimo clothes in the hot California sunshine. The stores sell hamburgers because the competing hamburger store is selling lots of hamburgers. There is a high community demand for hamburgers. In addition, another tore is selling surfboards near a surfing beach resort.

The demand for the store’s surfboard products is flourishing because the establishment is catering to the demands of the current and prospective clients for surfboards (Sowell, 2009). Effect of economy on supply and demand. However, the effective supply and demand principle normally occurs in a laissez Faire economy. The economy is characterized by the freedom of the sellers to sell their products at any price they democratically want.

We will write a custom Essay on Supply and Demand specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Likewise, the economy includes the buyers’ right to freely buy any object or property at any price. In a monopoly, there is only one seller. Thus, the current and prospective clients are forced to buy from the lone store. The lone store has no competitors. Consequently, the lone store can raise or lower the prices of their goods and services. The buyers are at the mercy of the sellers (Rothbard, 2006). There are factors that affect the demand for goods and services.

An economic depression creates a decline for the demand for goods or services. An economic depression occurs when businesses close shop. The 2008 economic depressions triggered the bankruptcy of more than 100 business entities in the United States, including banks. The closure of the businesses triggered an increase of the unemployment lines. An increase in the United States’ unemployment rate precipitates to a decline in the average individual’s purchasing power.

The decline contributed to the reduction in the demand for products. The closure of many businesses precipitated to the reduction of the various supplies available to the current and prospective clients (Rothbard, 2006). In times of plenty, the demand for many products is high. Many companies are having abundant sales from selling more supplies.

The unemployment lines are short. More people have jobs. With more jobs, the people have higher demands for diverse supplies. Companies produce more supplies to fill the high supply demands (Rothbard, 2006). Based on the above discussion, economics topics incorporate both demand and supply analysis. The selling priced affects demand. The selling price influences supply. Indeed, price affects both supply and demand.

References Miller, R. (2011). Economics Today. New York: Addison-Wesley.

Officer, L. (2009). Everyday Economics. New York: Palgrave MacMillan Press.

Rothbard, M. (2006). Making Economics Sense. New York: Ludiwg Von Press.

Sowell, T. (2009). Economics. New York: Persus Press.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Supply and Demand by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


Marketing Research: Customer Loyalty at Al-Marai Company Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Introduction Background Information

Al-Marai is the largest dairy processing plant in the Middle East. Al-Marai means green pastures in Arabic. The company came into existence in 1976 as a business partnership between three entrepreneurs. The partners were Alastair McGuckian, Paddy and HH Prince Sultan bin Mohammed bin Saud Al Kabeer.

The chairman (HH Prince Sultan bin Mohammed bin Saudi Al Kabeer) felt the need to improve the traditional farming techniques to match the needs of the domestic market which was growing very fast. The chairman supervised many agricultural activities aimed at achieving the outlined objectives. The processing of milk and laban was started and this gave rise to the modern firms envisaged.

The company merged with PepsiCo to produce high quality fruit juice. Infant formula was introduced to cater for the nursing parents’ market. The company felt the need to venture into the infant formula’s market and it therefore entered into a joint venture with Mead Johnson Nutrition. This is the world’s largest and of course leader in infant formula production.

Mead Johnson has over 70 products that are found in over 60 markets worldwide. It is the universal leader in paediatric nutrition. The mission of the company is to supply nutritional products that can offer infants and children a strong foundation in life. Mead Johnson has led the market for over 100 years. This is a long time by any standards.

The mergers between Al-Marai and other companies is perhaps one of the reasons why it has continued to attract more and more customers over the years. This is given the fact that customer loyalty is one of the features that defines this company in the market.

Problem Statement

It is noted that Al-Marai is the dominant company in the dairy market with many products from one company. One cannot help but wonder why and how Al- Marai Company commands such customer loyalty as compared to other brands which are similar. It is noted that Al-Marai has a long history in the market with more than 30 years of existence.

This probably gives it an edge over the competitors. This is because the products have been passed down from one generation of customers to the other. This means that since their childhood, most of the consumers today have experienced Al-Marai products. This in extension means that customer loyalty has been passed down from one generation to the other.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Al-Marai has expanded its operations beyond the original country making it the only company to export its products from the Gulf Cooperation Council region. The other companies such as Al-Safi, Nadec and others rarely reach outside the borders. Their consumers are concentrated in the local market. Such companies experience unstable market shares given that Al-Marai is dominating the whole region.

The Al-Marai uses various strategies to win over its customers. This study is going to look at some of these strategies. The reasons why the company is still dominating the market after many years will also be analyzed including the importance of competition in the market.

The whole study will revolve around customer loyalty as far as Al-Marai is concerned. The issues mentioned above will be discussed within the customer loyalty context. The study will take the form of a ranking survey. Al-Marai will be compared to Al-Safi and Nadec Dairy Companies as far as customer loyalty is concerned. The researcher settled on the two companies given that they offer products that are similar to those of Al-Marai.

The two also operate within the region where Al-Marai dominates and as such, can be considered as competitors to this company. Two physical attributes and three perceptual attributes were used to rank the three companies. The physical attributes are packaging and availability while the perceptual attributes are price, taste and texture of the products offered by the three companies.

Objectives of the Study

The study comprised of one major aim and several specific objectives. The major aim of the study was to find out why Al-Marai Company has customer loyalty which is dominant than that of other similar brands in the market. The following are the specific objectives of the study:

Identify the various strategies used by Al-Marai Company in its production and marketing processes to establish consumer loyalty

Identify and analyse the differences between Al-Marai products that make them preferred over those of Nadec and Al-Safi

Identify and analyze the differences between Al-Marai company and its competitors as far as establishing customer loyalty is concerned

Identify the relationship between Al-Marai and other companies locally and internationally as far as consumer loyalty is concerned

Analyse the various reasons why consumers are loyal to Al-Marai products as opposed to those of competitors such as Nadec and Al-Safi

Research Questions

The research is comprised of several questions that the researcher intends to answer. The questions are related to the objectives of the study. By answering the research questions, the researcher will have effectively addressed the objectives of the study. Here are the research questions:

What are the various strategies that Al-Marai is using to dominate the local and international markets?

What are the differences between Al-Marai products and those of competitors as far as customer loyalty is concerned?

What is the difference between Al-Marai and other companies in the region as far as establishing consumer loyalty is concerned?

What is the relationship between Al-Marai and other companies as far as establishing consumer loyalty in the local and international market is concerned?

Why are consumers loyal to Al-Marai products and not those of the competitors?

Significance of the Study

The findings of this research will play a significant role in the production and marketing of dairy and other related products in the region. As far as commercial and marketing principles are concerned, the findings from this research will help marketers in coming up with strategies to win over consumers. The following are the possible significant applications of the study:

We will write a custom Research Paper on Marketing Research: Customer Loyalty at Al-Marai Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The findings will help marketers in formulating effective strategies to cater for customers’ needs in the market

The study will identify various strategies used by Al-Marai Company and their effectiveness in production. This will help other companies in coming up with strategies that suits their production and improves the quality of their goods hence establishing loyalty amongst the customers

The findings will enable those involved in marketing to identify factors that interfere with consumer loyalty and how to overcome such challenges

The findings of the study will help the management in improving the quality of goods availed to the clients in effect sustaining consumer loyalty

Assumptions Made in the Study and Scope and Limitations

Reichheld (201) states that it is not possible for the researcher to control all the variables in a study. There are many variables at play in a given field and the researcher is able to deal with only a few of them. The other variables that the researcher is unable to control are assumed to remain constant throughout the study.

If at all there is change in the variables presumed to remain constant further assumptions are made to the effect that the changes will not interfere with the findings of the study. This is what is referred to as assumptions of the study (Reichheld 203).

This study was no different. The following are some of the assumptions made in the study together with the scope and limitations:

The study addressed itself to customers from Arabic countries only

It was assumed that the participants are familiar with Al-Marai, Al-Safi and Nadec products and they have used them in the past

The researcher assumed that the other companies in the field were fully aware of the various strategies used in establishing consumer loyalty in the dairy industry

It was assumed that the customers are fully aware of the existence of other products in the market other than those from l-Marai Company

It was assumed that factors influencing consumer loyalty in Al-Marai are largely similar to those in other companies in the dairy market

Literature Review Al-Marai Company: An Overview

Before embarking on a critical analysis of literature in this field, it is important to look at various aspects concerning Al-Marai Company. This will help the reader in relating the literature review to the Al-Marai company. The researcher will begin by looking at the various products of Al-Marai Company.

Al-Marai Products

Al- Marai is involved in the production and supply of over three dozen dairy products. From 2005, the company has increased milk production while at the same time promoting brand awareness among the consumers. For the last six years the number of dairy cows has more than doubled from 55,500 to 103,000. This resulted in increased milk production that surpassed the 674 million litres mark. This represented 60% of the total milk production in Saudi Arabia. The following are some of the products from this company:

Fresh Dairy

In the Gulf Cooperation Council region, the hot climate is taken into account when manufacturing and supplying this product. Initially, companies involved in dairy farming produced powdered and canned milk. On the contrary, Al-Marai supplies fresh products from raw milk harvested from its herd of dairy cows.

The products include laban, fresh milk, cream and yoghurt. The supply of these products is consistent and this satisfies the customers’ needs. As a result of this, Al-Marai has emerged the leader in this market segment in Saudi Arabia recording a 19% over the years.

Long-Life Dairy This dairy product can last for a long time and it is convenient for long distance transportation. This leads to lower production costs. However, it is noted that consumers prefer dairy fresh milk rather than long-life dairy milk. This challenge has been addressed by launching various brands of long-life dairy milk.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing Research: Customer Loyalty at Al-Marai Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is for example the launch of the only lactose- free milk in Saudi Arabia and the surrounding regions. As a result of this diversification, the company has emerged the leader in the region and has grown by 30% from 2003 to date as far as the long-life dairy market segment is concerned (Morris 78).

Fruit Juices Al-Marai does not depend mainly on the seasonal fruits harvested in the region. On the contrary, it obtains most of the fruits from other parts of the world. The initiative was launched in 1999 to expand the company’s range of products. With the joint venture Al-Marai has entered into with International Dairy and Juice the company is expected to export its products as far as Asia.

Cheese and Butter

These products account for the second largest share of the company’s sales after milk products. The products account for 21% of total revenue in the company. Despite the fact that competitors import the product from Europe and Australia, Al-Marai provides the consumers with fresh cheese and butter. The products include spreadable cheese, slices among others. A growth of 24% in this market niche has been recorded for the past five years.


Al-Marai has also gained an upper hand in the bakery industry. This is through the establishment of Western Bakeries Limited in the year 2007. Products from this subsidiary include bread, croissants among others. The new facility which was introduced in the year 2010 has contributed significantly to the growth of bakeries. This has doubled from the initial 85,000 tonnes.

Al-Marai and Customer Loyalty

Brand loyalty is achieved given the fact that Al-Marai has consistently availed quality products to its consumers around the region and even around the world. The products have being in existence for over three decades making them famous throughout the generations. This is due to the fact that the customer is aware of the products since childhood.

The constant availability of the products cultivates customer loyalty given that the consumers find no need to try other brands in the market. Dairy products are used on a daily basis hence the customer should be familiar with the available products in the market. Al-Marai has achieved this by providing an elastic brand over the generations.

Another factor that has boosted Al-Marai’s customer loyalty is price control. This segment is very sensitive given that Al-Marai does not pass increased costs of production over to the customers. There are chances of losing customers if this is not regulated. Customers will go for those products in the market which have favourable and affordable prices.

In the past few years, Al-Marai has dominated the dairy market especially in Saudi Arabia and other regions around. For example, the company controls about 28% of the GCC market share. In the fresh milk segment, the company controls about 21% of the market share. Although Al Safi Company (one of the competitors) has managed to dominate in the flavoured UHT segment, Al-Marai has achieved tremendous growth in the segment as compared to the other players.

Dairy Products in Saudi Arabia

Demand for Dairy Products

The production and consumption of dairy products depends greatly on demographic patterns. In Saudi Arabia, the lower age group consumes more dairy products than the older generation. These are the children aged between 0 and 14 years. Saudi Arabia has a population of about 24.8 million people and about 33% of this falls under the lower age group category. Also important to note is the fact that the population growth in this country is about 2.5% annually. This means that the demand for the dairy products targeted at the lower age group is rising annually. Based on statistics, the consumption of dairy products in Saudi Arabia is much lower than in other countries around the region (Morris 122).

Price Trend and Dairy Products in Saudi Arabia

A 95% growth in this trend has been recorded in the Middle East, India, China and Pakistan. This is due to the fact that the demand is high as a result of the growing population craving for the dairy products. The change in diet as a result of new lifestyles has also contributed significantly to the increased demand for the dairy products. The increasing awareness as far as dairy products are concerned has additionally increased demand for the same.

Loyalty as a Business Strategy

The Strategy

This is a strategic business model used by the management to win customers’ and stakeholders’ loyalty in order to achieve the marketing objective (Malony 122). In simple terms, the model specifies that a product or service of high quality attracts a large number of customers while at the same time making them loyal to that product or service.

This leads to high profits in the long run. When the customer is first exposed to the product or service, they will either be satisfied of or unsatisfied. This means that the probability of the product performing better in the future will depend on a previous experience. Customer’s expectations will be high only if recent experiences supersede prior experiences (Malony 123).

A relationship is established between the consumer and the business. The strength of this relationship is determined by previous customer experiences with the service or the product offered by the company. If the level of satisfaction is low the strength of this relationship will then be affected negatively.

The bond between the business and the customer as well as level of satisfaction plays an important role in determining the kind of relationship that exists. The quality of the product and the customer’s commitment to the business also signifies tolerance. To this end, the customer can tolerate a service or product which is poor so long as they have a stronger perception of the quality (Malony 119).

According to Malony (133), there are various types of bonds that exist between the customer and the business. These include cultural bonds among others. For example, Al-Marai has a culture of promoting dairy products as part of the diet and as a lifestyle. This creates customer loyalty. There are also legal bonds whereby the customer is confined to the business by a legal contract. The business in this case has an obligation to satisfy the customer as per the contract.

Technological bonds also play a role in customer loyalty. This arises when technology is shared between the business and the client. In the case of Al-Marai, technology has been used to satisfy the needs of the clients. The joint ventures with other companies such as Mead Johnson, PepsiCo and many others are as a result of technology. Quality products were supplied as a result of merging with other companies in the same field (Morris 34).

Factors Determining Level of Loyalty

Relationship Strength This is a scenario where the customer is in a position to access the services or products without a hindrance. The product or service is available to the customer at the right time and place without compromising on the quality. Relationship may be terminated if the customers shift away from the production area. This makes the company reduce its production. Another possible way of ruining the relationship is where the customer is not in need of the product or the services any more (Malony 45).

Available Alternatives If a more suitable alternative is available, the customer tends to shift towards that company. In the case of Al-Marai, it is the only suitable company available to the customer and hence able to dominate the market.

Critical Episodes In this case, the company is expected to make some decisions which will affect its production as well as the welfare of the customer. For example, it is noted that Al-Marai does not hike its prices even after the cost of production has increased. This increases customer loyalty (Morris 39).

The Effects of Loyalty on Profits

According to Stieb (95), it is more expensive to win over a new customer than it is to maintain an existing one. He argues that if 5% of the company’s profits are used to improve the current situation of the company and to maintain the customers, a profit increase of between 25% and 85% can be realized. Here are some effects of customer loyalty on profits:

The cost of acquiring the customer is high but after some time it declines thereby increasing profits. For example, Al-Marai has been in the business for over 30 years hence several generations are familiar with the company

Customers who have a long- standing relationship with a particular company are less sensitive to a hike in prices. This will lead to stable profits in the long run

Long term customers are effective when it comes to referring new customers to the company

If the company retains a high number of customers, the work load for the employees will be reduced. A virtuous circle of satisfaction will be formed thereby increasing profits

Customers who visit the business on a regular basis are less expensive to cater for since they are acquainted with the processes of production. As such, they do not need to be inducted and at the same time cannot shift their loyalty to competitors

Methodology Research Question and Problem

The research question for this study read, “Why does Al-Marai Company have higher customer loyalty as compared to other similar brands such as Al-Safi and Nadec?” This has been tackled before but the researcher will shed more light on the question. According to Morris (201) Al-Marai has been into existence for over 30 years ago.

Research Population and Sample

Research Population

The population for this study are those individuals who consume Al-Marai products. As already noted in chapter one, the study will use the clients found in Saudi Arabia. This is despite the fact that the company has loyal clients in other parts of the world. The researcher will use participants drawn from Riyadh. It is noted that the population of this region stands at around 24 million (Malony 49). Al-Marai supplies products to over 43,500 customers on a daily basis. This is the population size for this study.

Sample Population and Sample Size

The sample population was drawn from the research population identified above. The researcher administered questionnaires on consumers who were found purchasing Al-Marai on local retail outlets. The researcher targeted 100 customers. This number was settled at after the researcher determined that it is easily manageable.

It was also assumed that not all the 100 consumers will return the completed questionnaires. It was expected that about 50 consumers will return the completed questionnaire since it was self-administered. At the end of the 7 days period, 70 questionnaires were returned. This means that the sample size for this study was 70 (N=70).

Sample Characteristics

Out of the 70 respondents, 43 were female while 27 were male. The age distribution of the respondents is as illustrated below:

Table 1: Age of Respondents

Age (Yrs) Number Below 24 24 25-45 32 Above 45 14 Total 70 Sampling Technique

The researcher used a combination of purposive and random sampling techniques to come up with the sample. Five retail outlets in Riyadh which sell Al-Marai products were randomly selected for the study.

The researcher then positioned himself along the supermarket aisle where Al-Marai products were displayed. It is noted that Al-Marai products are usually displayed alongside those of competitors notably Al-Safi and Nadec. However, the researcher concentrated on those clients who picked Al-Marai dairy products. Customers who picked Al-Marai products from the shelves and put them in their shopping baskets were approached.

The researcher then handed out questionnaires to those customers who accepted the request to participate. Twenty willing customers were selected from each of the supermarkets. To reduce cases of multiple selections of respondents, the sampling was carried out simultaneously in all the five stores. The sampling was carried out between 11 in the morning and 7 in the evening.

Data Collection


Data for this study was collected using a self-administered Likert scale questionnaire. The respondents were given the questionnaire and informed that they should complete it and return it to the supermarket within 7 days if possible. The researcher went around the five retail stores after 7 days collecting the completed questionnaires.

The questionnaire had several sections. The first section touched on background information such as the age of the participant, gender, level of education and such others. The second section addressed level of loyalty as far as Al-Marai products are concerned. In this section, the participants were required to rank Al-Marai products against those supplied or offered by Al-Safi and Nadec.

Likert Scale Questionnaire

As already indicated above, the questionnaire required the respondents to compare Al-Marai products with those of Al-Safi and Nadec. Two physical attributes and three perceptual attributes of the products were used. The respondent was required to rank the products using these attributes. The scale used to rank the products had five points. These ranged from 1 (very bad) to 5 (very good). Below is an illustration of the five levels:

Very bad




Very good

Level 3 (neutral) was used to capture the opinion of those respondents who felt that there was no difference between Al-Marai products and those of Al-Safi and Nadec. The researcher opted for this scale since it was felt that it was the most effective in ranking the attitudes of the respondents towards the three brands.

Data Analysis and Presentation

The researcher analysed the data using the five attributes using in the questionnaire. First, the researcher determined how each of the 70 respondents had rated the three brands along the 1-5 scale. After this, the researcher calculated the scores of each of the three brands in the five attributes. The data was used to draw a loyalty curve for the three brands. The x-axis of the curve represented the level of each of the five attributes ranging from “very bad” to very “good”. The y-axis represented the five attributes.

Findings Scores for Each of the Five Attributes

It was found that Al-Marai brand scored the highest in all the five categories or attributes used for the study. It was followed closely by Al-Safi. The figure below (loyalty curve) is a representation of the scores of the three brands in each of the attributes:

Figure 1: Loyalty Curve

The figure above indicates that customers favour Al-Marai brands over those of Al-Safi and Nadec. It is noted that Al-Marai scored the highest in all the five categories. The brand scored the highest in the availability attribute (4.3) and lowest in the texture attribute (3.3). The table below shows the scores of the three brands in each of the five categories:

Table 2: Scores for the Five Categories

Attributes/ Brand Al-Marai Al-Safi Nadec Price 4.1 3.2 3.1 Packaging 3.9 2.9 2.3 Taste 4.2 2.8 2.7 Texture 3.3 2.9 2.6 Availability 4.3 3.8 2.9 Mean Score 3.96 3.12 2.72 The table above shows that Al-Marai commands more customer loyalty as compared to the other two brands. Nadec has the least customer loyalty (2.72 out of the possible 5.0).

Recommendations and Conclusion Recommendations

Upcoming or medium sized companies should realise that it is very important to establish customer loyalty. They should also realise that the initial cost of establishing customer loyalty is relatively high. After satisfying the needs of these customers, they need to maintain them in their business. Maintenance costs for long term customers will be low and this increases business profit.

Quality of products and consistency is paramount when a company wants to establish customer loyalty. The item or service should be availed at the right time, the right place and at the right price. If these factors are taken into consideration, customer loyalty will be established and maintained.

Conclusion It is a fact beyond doubt that Al-Marai has implemented strategies that have enabled it to dominate the market. The strategies include production of high quality goods, consistency and establishment of customer loyalty. Regular customers refer new clients to the company.

This means that the company does not have to spend much in winning over new clients. The number of customers increases annually thereby increasing profits. This study concluded that customer loyalty is an important business model that should be embraced by all businesses.

Works Cited Malony, Chris. Winning Your Customer Loyalty: The Best Tools, Techniques and Practices. San Diego: Ink Press, 2006. Print.

Morris, Charles. Al-Marai Co. Ltd.: Dairy in the Desert. New York: Wisdom Publications, 2008. Print.

Reichheld, Frank. The Loyalty Effect. Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 2007. Print.

Stieb, James. Clearing up the Egoist Difficulty with Loyalty. London: Penguin Books, 2006. Print.


Consumer’s Utility and its Maximization Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents Utility Maximization and Scarcity




Utility Maximization

List of References

Utility Maximization and Scarcity Economic concepts are usually concerned about the problem of scarcity of resources that are used to fulfill many unlimited needs of individuals. Many resources that are used to fulfill the needs of different people exist. However, they are randomly distributed throughout the world and across different countries without any formula.

The resources are limited although they are significant in fulfilling the wants that are unlimited as depicted by consumers. Due to the scarcity issues facing the resources, the demand is created. The resources provide the supply of all things that could be used to fulfill all needs. However, the needs of consumers reflect the demand. Due to many consumer needs, the demand for products is usually high and consumers have to budget their purchases based on monetary resources available (that are also limited).

Therefore, the supply of resources and products forms one force within a market while the demand forms the other force whose combined effects shape the activities taking place in the market (Kehoe


Production Possibility Frontier Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

A production possibility frontier is a curve that represents the rates of production of two commodities that use the same factors of production within a specified period (Bradford, 2007). During this period, the technology that affects the process of production is assumed to be constant.

This ensures that the rates of production of these two commodities given the available factors of production remain constant. The production possibility frontier (PPF) thus shows the production levels of commodity A that results to a specific production level of commodity B. These commodities are either goods or services. In normal practice, the PPF curve has a concave curve that bulges downwards from the origin.

However, a straight line can also be used to represent the PPF. The shape of the PPF thus depends on the factors of production that are required to manufacture the goods or produce the services in question. A production possibility Frontier can be used to represent a number of economical factors. These include efficiency, opportunity cost, marginal rate of transformation and other economic indicators (Ramsey, 2007). The graph below represents an example of a PPF for commodity A and Commodity B.

The above graph can be used to show the efficiency of production of the two products; product A and product B. As explained earlier, a PPF is used to show the possible production levels of two commodities that use the same factor of production holding all other factors constant.

This therefore means that to increase the production of one commodity, the production of the other commodity has to be reduced. This is due to the fact that these two commodities use the same factors of production. Thus to increase the production of one commodity, the production of the other commodity has to be sacrificed. This is as a result of constant technologies of production and limited factors of production that are available in the economy at a particular moment.

From the above graph, let us assume that product A is tea and product B is coffee. These are the two commodities that are produced in country X. The red line thus represents the PPF of these two commodities for a specific period holding all other factors constant. All the points that fall under the graph such as point x represent all the possible combinations that can be produced for coffee and tea in the country.

However, on this level of production, not all the resources will be utilized. This is because the level of production is not optimum with regards to these two products and the factors of production. Such a level of production is thus inefficient as some of the factors of production are not utilized (Turvey, 2005).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, points of production above the PPF cannot be attained at the present moment with the use of the available factors of production and technology. Point Y is a good example of a level of production that country X cannot attain given its factors of production and level of technology at the present moment. However, such point may be attained in future if there are technological advancements and/or an increase in the factors of production for coffee and tea (Dreze, 2004).

Finally, the points along the curve represent the optimum level of production. This includes levels of production such as A, B and C. On these levels of production, all the factors of production are used to the maximum in the production of coffee and tea in country X. This is thus the most efficient level of production for country X.

From the graph, it can be seen that if production is set at point A, more quantities of tea (product A) will be produced and less quantities of coffee (product B will be produced). On the other hand, if production is set a point C, more quantities of coffee will be produced at the expense of tea. However, if production is set at point B equal amounts of these products will be produced. PPF can therefore be used to regulate the amount of production of these two commodities with regards to their demand in the market.

A PPF can also be used to measure opportunity cost. It has been stated that a PPF represents the possible combinations of production of two products given limited resources and factors of production.

Therefore, in the process of increasing the production of one commodity, some of the factors of production that were used to manufacture the other commodity will therefore have to be sacrificed. In the case of country X for example, if the government wants to increase the production of tea, it has to sacrifice the factors of production that were used to manufacture coffee.

As a result, the level of production of coffee will decline. In this respect therefore, the number of units of coffee that will be sacrificed to increase the production of tea represent the opportunity cost. Opportunity cost can be defined as the units of a commodity that are forgone to produce an extra unit of another commodity (Debreu, 2004). The above graph can therefore be used to calculate the opportunity cost of either of the two products.

PPFs are also used to calculate the marginal rate of transformation. Marginal rate of transformation is a term that is used to describe the amount of units of product A that have to be given up to produce an extra unit of commodity B (Bradford, 2007). The slope of the PPF at any point represents the marginal rate of transformation at that point.

We will write a custom Essay on Production Possibility Frontier specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More At point A for example in the above graph, the marginal rate of transformation of product A can be calculated by simply calculating the slope of the curve at that specific point. The same method can be applied to calculate the marginal rate of transformation of product B at point C on the curve.

From the above discussion, it is evident that a PPF can be applied in various sectors of the economy. A household, a production company or a government to regulate the production of two goods that utilize the same factors of production can use a PPF. For efficiency to be achieved, production should be maintained at points within the curve.

However, the profitable point of production may vary along the curve. A firm should therefore produce at the point in which it earns maximum profits. This will be regarded as the optimum level of production of the firm. A PPF is thus a powerful tool for households, production companies and governments. This is because it enables them to determine the most efficient level of production to achieve maximum profits and meet the market demand.

References Bradford, M. (2007). Optimal Departures from Marginal Costs System. American Economic Review, 6 (1), 15-22.

Debreu, F. (2004). Economics in the 21st Century. New York: Sage.

Dreze, C. (2004). Market Socialism. Boston: Long Horn Publishers.

Ramsey, L. (2007). Contribution to the Theory of Taxation. Chicago: Chicago University Press.

Turvey, T. (2005). Cost Benefit Analysis. Journal of Economics, 1 (5), 41-48.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Production Possibility Frontier by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More


The School Culture Descriptive Essay scholarship essay help

Describe the artifacts you find or recall that define the culture of the organization

In this paper, I will describe the culture of a school organization. Essentially, organizational culture of a school entails its personality, which includes the values, assumptions, norms and tangible signs (artifacts) of the members and their behaviors. When walking across the compound of this particular school, though located in an economically depressed community, there are a well groomed green lawns and flowers that spread throughout.

The school appears clean and neat as you walk through the walkways. A school mission which is displayed on an expansive banner contains a symbolic message. As you take a trip down the hall, the kids together with the staff are taking care of actual live plants that decorate the hall. There are also some banners that contain words such as “hopefulness” perhaps to display the power of close bond between the staff and the kids, with the intention of improving the learning environment (Katz